Canon EOS 5DS User manual

Canon EOS 5DS User manual
Instruction manuals (PDF files) and software can be
downloaded from the Canon website (p.4).
www.canon.com/icpd
ENGLISH
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
Introduction
The EOS 5DS/EOS 5DS R is a digital single-lens reflex camera
featuring a full-frame CMOS sensor (approx. 36.0 mm x 24.0 mm) with
approx. 50.6 effective megapixels, Dual DIGIC 6, approx. 100%
viewfinder coverage, high-precision and high-speed 61-point AF,
approx. 5.0 fps continuous shooting, 3.2-inch LCD monitor, Live View
shooting, and Full High-Definition (Full HD) movie shooting.
Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following
To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety
Precautions” (p.20-22) and “Handling Precautions” (p.23-25).
Refer to This Manual While Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they
come out. You can then better understand the camera.
Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the
images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon
cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded
images of people and certain subjects for anything but private
enjoyment. Also be aware that certain public performances, exhibitions,
etc., may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment.
About the EOS 5DS R
The EOS 5DS R’s optical low-pass filter is disabled, and the effect is
eliminated to obtain a higher-looking resolution.
Since the optical low-pass filter is for reducing moire and false colors, images
taken with the EOS 5DS R may show more moire and false colors than with
the EOS 5DS depending on the subject and shooting conditions.
2
Item Check List
Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your
camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
Eyecup Eg
Camera
(with body cap)
Wide Strap
Battery Charger
Battery Pack
LP-E6N
LC-E6E*
(with protective cover)
Interface Cable
IFC-150U II
Cable
protector
* Battery Charger LC-E6E comes with a power cord.
 The Instruction Manual and CD-ROM provided are listed on the next page.
 Be careful not to lose any of the above items.
Connecting to Peripheral Devices
When connecting the camera to a computer or printer, use the provided
interface cable or one from Canon. When connecting an interface cable,
also use the provided cable protector (p.36).
3
Instruction Manual and CD-ROM
Camera Basic
Instruction Manual
EOS Solution Disk (Software CD-ROM)
EOS Solution Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
Contains software such as image-editing software.
For more information and installation procedures of the
software, see pages 504-506.
Downloading the Instruction Manuals (PDF Files)
The Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon
website to your computer or the like.
 Instruction Manual (PDF files) download site:
• Camera Basic Instruction Manual
• Camera Instruction Manual

www.canon.com/icpd
 To view the Instruction Manuals (PDF files), Adobe Acrobat Reader
DC or other Adobe PDF viewer (most recent version recommended)
is required.
 Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded for free from the Internet.
 Double-click a downloaded Instruction Manual (PDF file) to open it.
 To learn how to use PDF viewing software, refer to the software’s Help
section or the like.
4
Compatible Cards
The camera can use the following cards regardless of capacity: If the
card is new or was previously formatted (initialized) by another
camera or computer, format the card with this camera (p.67).
 CF (CompactFlash) cards
* Type I, UDMA mode 7-compatible.
 SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards
* UHS-I cards supported.
Cards that Can Record Movies
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with a fast reading/
writing speed as shown in the table.
Movie Recording Size
(p.297)
CF card
SD card
ALL-I (I-only)
IPB
30 MB/sec. or faster
10 MB/sec. or faster
20 MB/sec. or faster
6 MB/sec. or faster
 If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may
not be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card
with a slow reading speed, the movie may not play back properly.
 If you want to shoot still photos while shooting a movie, you will need
an even faster card.
 To check the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card
manufacturer’s website.
In this manual, “CF card” refers to CompactFlash cards and “SD
card” refers to SD/SDHC/SDXC cards. “Card” refers to all memory
cards used to record images or movies.
* The camera does not come with a card for recording images/
movies. Please purchase it separately.
5
Quick Start Guide
1
Insert the battery (p.42).
To charge the battery, see page 40.
Insert the card (p.43).
2
The camera-front side slot is
for a CF card, and the
camera-back side slot is for
an SD card.
* Shooting is possible with either a CF card or an SD card in the camera.
3
Attach the lens (p.52).
4
Set the lens’s focus mode
switch to <f> (p.52).
5
6
Align it with the red dot.
Set the power switch to <1>
(p.47).
Quick Start Guide
6
While holding down the center
of the Mode Dial, set it to <A>
(Scene Intelligent Auto) (p.33).
All the necessary camera settings
will be set automatically.
7
Focus on the subject (p.55).
8
Take the picture (p.55).
9
Review the picture.
Look through the viewfinder and
aim the viewfinder center over the
subject.
Press the shutter button halfway,
and the camera will focus on the
subject.
Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.
The image just captured will be
displayed for 2 sec. on the LCD
monitor.
To display the image again, press
the <x> button (p.320).
 To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View
Shooting” (p.255).
 To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.320).
 To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.358).
7
Conventions Used in this Manual
Icons in this Manual
<6>
<5>
<9>
<0>
0/9/4/7/8
:
:
:
:
:
Indicates the Main Dial.
Indicates the Quick Control Dial.
Indicates the Multi-controller.
Indicates the Setting button.
Indicates that each function remains active for
4 sec., 6 sec., 8 sec., 10 sec., or 16 sec. after
you let go of the button.
* In this manual, the icons and markings indicating the camera’s buttons, dials,
and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the
LCD monitor.
3
: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the
<M> button to change its settings.
M
: When shown on the upper right of a page, it indicates that
the function is available only in the <d>, <s>, <f>,
<a>, or <F> mode.
(p.**)
: Reference page numbers for more information.
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Troubleshooting advice.
Basic Assumptions
All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch
is set to <1> and the <R> switch is set to the left (Multi
function lock released) (p.47, 59).
It is assumed that all the menu settings, Custom Functions, etc. are
set to their defaults.
The illustrations in this manual show the EOS 5DS attached with the
EF50mm f/1.4 USM lens as an example.
8
Chapters
For first-time DSLR users, Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera’s
basic operations and shooting procedures.
Introduction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
2
Getting Started
39
Basic Shooting
79
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
85
Image Settings
145
Advanced Operations
203
Flash Photography
243
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
255
Shooting Movies
279
Image Playback
319
Post-Processing Images
363
Sensor Cleaning
373
Printing Images and Transferring Images to a Computer
379
Customizing the Camera
399
Reference
441
Downloading Images to Your Computer
501
9
Contents
Introduction
2
Item Check List................................................................................. 3
Instruction Manual and CD-ROM ..................................................... 4
Compatible Cards............................................................................. 5
Quick Start Guide ............................................................................. 6
Conventions Used in this Manual..................................................... 8
Chapters........................................................................................... 9
Index to Features ........................................................................... 17
Safety Precautions ......................................................................... 20
Handling Precautions ..................................................................... 23
Nomenclature ................................................................................. 26
1
Getting Started
39
Charging the Battery ...................................................................... 40
Installing and Removing the Battery............................................... 42
Installing and Removing the Card .................................................. 43
Turning on the Power ..................................................................... 47
Setting the Date, Time, and Zone .................................................. 49
Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 51
Attaching and Detaching a Lens .................................................... 52
Basic Operation.............................................................................. 54
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ....................................... 61
3 Menu Operations .................................................................. 64
Before You Start............................................................................. 67
Formatting the Card..................................................................... 67
Disabling the Beeper ................................................................... 69
Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off ................................. 69
Setting the Image Review Time ................................................... 70
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings ............................. 70
10
Contents
l Displaying the Grid. .................................................................. 74
Q Displaying the Electronic Level ...............................................75
Setting the Viewfinder Information Display .....................................77
Help .......................................................................................... 78
2
Basic Shooting
79
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...................80
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) ......................... 83
3
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
85
f: Selecting the AF Operation ..................................................... 86
S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point ......................................... 90
AF Area Selection Modes ............................................................... 95
AF Sensor ....................................................................................... 99
Lenses and Usable AF Points.......................................................100
Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics ..........................................109
Customizing AF Functions ............................................................ 118
Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus ........................................ 134
When Autofocus Fails ................................................................... 140
MF: Manual Focus .....................................................................141
o Selecting the Drive Mode ...................................................... 142
j Using the Self-timer ................................................................. 144
4
Image Settings
145
Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback ...........................146
Setting the Image-Recording Quality ............................................ 149
Setting Crop/aspect ratio ..............................................................154
i: Setting the ISO Speed .......................................................... 158
A Selecting a Picture Style.......................................................164
A Customizing a Picture Style .................................................. 168
11
Contents
A Registering a Picture Style ................................................... 172
B: Setting the White Balance ................................................... 174
O Custom White Balance........................................................ 176
P Setting the Color Temperature ............................................ 178
u White Balance Correction ....................................................... 179
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast................................. 182
Setting Noise Reduction ............................................................... 183
Highlight Tone Priority .................................................................. 187
Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations ......... 188
Reducing Flicker........................................................................... 191
Setting the Color Space ............................................................... 193
Creating and Selecting a Folder................................................... 194
Changing the File Name............................................................... 196
File Numbering Methods .............................................................. 199
Setting Copyright Information....................................................... 201
5
Advanced Operations
203
d: Program AE ............................................................................ 204
s: Shutter-Priority AE................................................................ 206
f: Aperture-Priority AE ............................................................. 208
Depth-of-Field Preview .............................................................. 209
a: Manual Exposure ................................................................... 210
q Selecting the Metering Mode.................................................. 212
O Setting Exposure Compensation............................................. 214
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)........................................... 215
A AE Lock................................................................................... 217
F: Bulb Exposures....................................................................... 218
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting .............................. 221
P Multiple Exposures ................................................................. 226
2 Mirror Lockup ........................................................................ 234
12
Contents
Using the Eyepiece Cover ............................................................ 236
F Using a Remote Switch............................................................. 237
R Remote Control Shooting...........................................................237
H Interval Timer Shooting ...................................................... 239
6
Flash Photography
243
D Flash Photography .................................................................... 244
Setting the Flash ........................................................................... 247
7
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
255
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor ............................................... 256
Shooting Function Settings ...........................................................262
Menu Function Settings ................................................................ 264
Using AF to Focus (AF Method) ................................................... 268
MF: Focusing Manually................................................................. 275
8
Shooting Movies
279
k Shooting Movies .....................................................................280
Autoexposure Shooting ..............................................................280
Shutter-priority AE ......................................................................281
Aperture-priority AE.................................................................... 282
Manual Exposure Shooting ........................................................286
Shooting Still Photos ..................................................................293
Shooting Function Settings ...........................................................295
Setting the Movie Recording Size.................................................297
Setting the Sound Recording ........................................................300
Silent Control ................................................................................302
Setting the Time Code ..................................................................303
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies ................................................306
Menu Function Settings ................................................................ 313
13
Contents
9
Image Playback
319
x Image Playback ..................................................................... 320
B: Shooting Information Display ............................................ 322
x Searching for Images Quickly ................................................ 327
H Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)..... 327
I Jump through Images (Jump Display).................................. 328
u Magnifying Images.................................................................. 330
X Comparing Images (Two-Image Display)............................... 332
b Rotating the Image .................................................................. 333
K Protecting Images................................................................... 334
Setting Ratings ............................................................................. 337
Q Quick Control for Playback ..................................................... 340
k Enjoying Movies ..................................................................... 342
k Playing Back Movies .............................................................. 344
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ................................. 346
Slide Show (Auto Playback) ......................................................... 348
Viewing Images on a TV Set ........................................................ 351
a Copying Images ...................................................................... 354
L Erasing Images........................................................................ 358
Changing Image Playback Settings ............................................. 361
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness....................................... 361
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images ............................................... 362
10
Post-Processing Images
363
R Processing RAW Images with the Camera .......................... 364
S Resizing JPEG Images........................................................... 369
N Cropping JPEG Images .......................................................... 371
14
Contents
11
Sensor Cleaning
373
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning................................................... 374
Appending Dust Delete Data ........................................................375
Manual Sensor Cleaning...............................................................377
12
Printing Images and Transferring Images to a Computer
379
Preparing to Print .......................................................................... 380
w Printing ...................................................................................382
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)..........................................389
W Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images ..................................392
d Transferring Images to a Computer........................................ 393
p Specifying Images for a Photobook .........................................397
13
Customizing the Camera
399
Custom Functions .........................................................................400
Setting Custom Functions............................................................. 402
C.Fn1: Exposure ........................................................................ 402
C.Fn2: Exposure ........................................................................ 408
C.Fn3: Others.............................................................................409
83: Custom Controls ..................................................................413
Custom Quick Control ..................................................................427
Registering My Menu .................................................................... 432
w: Registering Custom Shooting Modes..................................... 437
15
Contents
14
Reference
441
B Button Functions ................................................................ 442
Checking the Battery Information ................................................. 446
Using a Household Power Outlet ................................................. 450
H Using Eye-Fi Cards................................................................. 451
System Map ................................................................................. 454
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode ............. 456
Menu Settings .............................................................................. 460
Troubleshooting Guide ................................................................. 471
Error Codes .................................................................................. 487
Specifications ............................................................................... 488
15
Downloading Images to Your Computer
501
Downloading Images to a Computer ............................................ 502
Software Overview ....................................................................... 504
Installing the Software .................................................................. 505
Index............................................................................................. 509
16
Index to Features
Power
LCD Monitor
Charging the battery
 p.40
Brightness adjustment
 p.361
Battery level
 p.48
Electronic level
 p.75
Help
 p.78
Battery information
check
 p.446
Household power outlet  p.450
Auto power off
 p.69
Card
AF
AF operation
 p.86
AF area selection mode  p.90
AF point selection
 p.93
Formatting
 p.67
AF point registration
 p.418
Recording function
 p.146
Lens group
 p.100
Selecting card
 p.148
AF points lighting up
in red
 p.132
AI Servo AF
characteristics
 p.109
AF Custom Functions
 p.118
AF Microadjustment
 p.134
Focusing manually
 p.141
Release shutter without
card
 p.44
Lens
Attaching
 p.52
Basic Settings
Language
 p.51
Date/Time/Zone
 p.49
Beeper
 p.69
Copyright information
 p.201
Clear all camera settings  p.70
Viewfinder
Metering
Metering mode
 p.212
Drive
Drive mode
 p.142
Self-timer
 p.144
Maximum burst
 p.153
Dioptric adjustment
 p.54
Eyepiece cover
 p.236
Recording Images
Grid display
 p.74
Recording function
 p.146
Electronic level
 p.76
Creating/Selecting
a folder
 p.194
File name
 p.196
File numbering
 p.199
Show/hide in viewfinder  p.77
17
Index to Features
Image Quality
Exposure
Image-recording quality  p.149
Exposure compensation  p.214
Crop/aspect ratio
 p.154
ISO speed
 p.158
Exposure compensation
with M+Auto ISO
 p.211
Picture Style
 p.164
AEB
 p.215
White balance
 p.174
AE lock
 p.217
Safety shift
 p.405
Auto Lighting Optimizer  p.182
Noise reduction for
high ISO speeds
Flash
 p.183
External Speedlite
 p.244
Noise reduction for long
exposures
 p.185
Flash exposure
compensation
 p.244
Highlight tone priority
FE lock
 p.244
Flash function settings
 p.247
 p.187
Lens aberration
correction
 p.188
Anti-flicker
 p.191
Color space
 p.193
Shooting
Flash Custom Function
settings
 p.253
Live View Shooting
Live View shooting
 p.255
Shooting mode
 p.33
AF method
 p.268
HDR
 p.221
Continuous AF
 p.264
Multiple exposures
 p.226
Focusing manually
 p.275
Mirror lockup
 p.234
Crop/aspect ratio
 p.262
Bulb timer
 p.219
Silent LV shooting
 p.266
Interval timer
 p.239
Depth-of-field preview
 p.209
Remote control
 p.237
Quick Control
 p.61
18
Index to Features
Movie Shooting
Image Editing
Movie shooting
 p.279
RAW image processing  p.364
AF method
 p.268
Resizing JPEGs
 p.369
Movie Servo AF
 p.313
Cropping JPEGs
 p.371
Movie recording quality  p.297
Printing and Transferring
Images
Sound recording
 p.300
Time code
 p.303
PictBridge
 p.379
Time-lapse movie
 p.306
Print Order (DPOF)
 p.389
Still photo shooting
 p.293
Image transfer
 p.393
Photobook Set-up
 p.397
Playback
Customization
Image review time
 p.70
Single-image display
 p.320
Custom Functions (C.Fn)  p.400
Shooting information
 p.322
Custom Controls
 p.413
Index display
 p.327
Custom Quick Control
 p.427
My Menu
 p.432
Image browsing
(Jump display)
 p.328
Magnified view
 p.330
Two-image display
 p.332
Image rotation
 p.333
Protect
 p.334
Rating
 p.337
Movie playback
 p.344
Slide show
 p.348
Custom shooting mode  p.437
Sensor Cleaning and Dust
Reduction
Sensor cleaning
 p.374
Append Dust Delete Data  p.375
Interface
Cable protector
 p.36
Software
Viewing images on a
TV set
 p.351
Overview
 p.504
Copying
 p.354
Installation
 p.505
Erasing
 p.358
Quick Control
 p.340
19
Safety Precautions
The following precautions are provided to prevent harm or injury to
yourself and others. Make sure to thoroughly understand and follow
these precautions before using the product.
If you experience any malfunctions, problems, or damage to the
product, contact the nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer
from whom you purchased the product.
Warnings:
Follow the warnings below. Otherwise, death or
serious injuries may result.
 To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, explosions, and electrical shock,
follow the safeguards below:
• Do not use any batteries, power sources, or accessories not specified in the
Instruction Manual. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.
• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery. Do not apply heat or
solder to the battery. Do not expose the battery to fire or water. Do not subject the
battery to strong physical shock.
• Do not insert the battery’s plus and minus ends incorrectly.
• Do not recharge the battery in temperatures outside the allowable charging
(working) temperature range. Also, do not exceed the recharging time indicated in
the Instruction Manual.
• Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,
accessories, connecting cables, etc.
 When disposing of a battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent
contact with other metallic objects or batteries. This is to prevent a fire or an explosion.
 If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted when recharging the battery,
immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop recharging.
Otherwise, it may cause a fire, heat damage, or electrical shock.
 If the battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it
immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process. It may cause a fire,
electrical shock or skin burn if you keep using it.
 Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can
cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or
clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a
physician immediately.
 Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the
insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.
 Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the
camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause
skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is
recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when
using the camera in very hot places.
 Do not fire the flash at anyone driving a car or other vehicle. It may cause an accident.
20
Safety Precautions
 When the camera or accessories are not in use, make sure to remove the battery
and disconnect the power plug from the equipment before storing. This is to prevent
electrical shock, excessive heat, fire, or corrosion.
 Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an
explosion or a fire.
 If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts,
do not touch the internal parts. There is a possibility of an electrical shock.
 Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause
electrical shock.
 Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or
lens. Doing so may damage your vision.
 Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants, including when in use. Straps
or cords may accidentally cause choking, electrical shock, or injury. Choking or injury
may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory. If
a child or infant swallows a part or accessory, consult a physician immediately.
 Do not use or store the equipment in dusty or humid places. Likewise, store the
battery with its protective cover attached to prevent short-circuit. This is to prevent a
fire, excessive heat, electrical shock, or burn.
 Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.
Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s
instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.
 To prevent a fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:
• Always insert the power plug all the way in.
• Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.
• When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.
• Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the
cord. Also do not twist or tie the cords.
• Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.
• Do not use a cord whose wire is broken or insulation is damaged.
 Unplug the power plug periodically and clean off the dust around the power outlet
with a dry cloth. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power
outlet may become moist and short-circuit the outlet, causing a fire.
 Do not connect the battery directly to an electrical outlet or a car’s cigarette lighter
outlet. The battery may leak, generate excessive heat or explode, causing a fire,
burns or injuries.
 A thorough explanation of how to use the product by an adult is required when the
product is used by children. Supervise children while they are using the product.
Incorrect usage may result in electrical shock or injury.
 Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera in the sun without the lens cap
attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.
 Do not cover or wrap the product with a cloth. Doing so may trap heat within and
cause the casing to deform or catch fire.
 Be careful not to get the camera wet. If you drop the product in the water or if water
or metal get inside the product, promptly remove the battery. This is to prevent a fire
and an electrical shock.
 Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the product.
Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.
21
Safety Precautions
Cautions:
Follow the cautions below. Otherwise, physical injury
or property damage may result.
 Do not use or store the product inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source.
The product may become hot and cause skin burns. Doing so may also cause
battery leakage or explosion, which will degrade the performance or shorten the life
of the product.
 Do not carry the camera around when it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause
injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.
 Do not leave the product in a low-temperature environment for an extended period of
time. The product will become cold and may cause injury when touched.
 Do not fire the flash near the eyes. It may hurt the eyes.
 Never play the provided CD-ROM in a drive that is not compatible with the CD-ROM.
If you use it in a music CD player, you may damage the speakers and other
components. When using headphones, there is also a risk of injury to your ears from
excessively loud volume.
22
Handling Precautions
Camera Care
 This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical
shock.
 The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater.
 To maximize the camera’s dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal
cover, battery compartment cover, card slot cover, and all other covers firmly
closed.
 This camera is designed to be dust- and drip- resistant, in order to help
prevent sand, dust, dirt, or water that falls on it unexpectedly from getting
inside, but it is impossible to prevent dirt, dust, water, or salt from getting
inside at all. As far as possible, do not allow dirt, dust, water, and salt to get
on the camera.
 If water gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry and clean cloth. If dirt, dust,
or salt gets on the camera, wipe it off with a clean, well-wrung wet cloth.
 Using the camera in a location with large amounts of dirt or dust may cause
a malfunction.
 Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust, water, or
salt to remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.
 If you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that
moisture (water), dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly
consult the nearest Canon Service Center.
 Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such
as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near
anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong
magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.
 Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct
sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
 The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
23
Handling Precautions
 Do not block the mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing so may cause a
malfunction.
 Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and
focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean
the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest
Canon Service Center.
 Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to
prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera
misoperation.
 If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to
the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
 If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid
damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and
battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before
using the camera.
 If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the
camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to
check that the camera is still working.
 Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and
corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
 If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions
before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is
an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera
checked by your nearest Canon Service Center or check the camera
yourself and make sure it is working properly.
 If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or movie shooting for a
prolonged period, the camera may become hot. This is not a malfunction.
 If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting
may occur.
24
Handling Precautions
LCD Panel and LCD Monitor
 Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there may be a few dead pixels
displaying only black or red, etc. among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels.
Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.
 If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.
 The LCD monitor display may seem slow in low temperatures, or look black
in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
 Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
 Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything
metallic.
 Do not affix any stickers, etc., on the card.
 Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field,
such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Also avoid places prone to having
static electricity.
 Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
 Store the card in a case.
 Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Lens
After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the
lens with the rear end up and attach the rear lens cap to
avoid scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.
Contacts
25
Nomenclature
<o> Drive mode selection/
AF operation/AF method selection button (p.142/86/268)
<m> Flash exposure
compensation/ISO speed
setting button (p.244/158)
<U> LCD panel
illumination button
(p.59)
<6> Main Dial
(p.56)
<n> White balance selection/
Metering mode selection button (p.174/212)
<B> AF area selection/
Multi-function button (p.92/244)
Lens mount index (p.52)
Flash sync contacts
Hot shoe (p.244)
Mode Dial lock-release
button (p.56)
Shutter button
(p.55)
Mode Dial (p.33, 56)
Self-timer lamp
(p.144)
Built-in
microphone
(p.301)
Strap mount
(p.35)
Remote control
sensor (p.237)
Lens release
button (p.53)
Grip
(Battery
compartment)
DC coupler cord hole
(p.450)
Depth-of-field preview button
(p.209)
Lens lock pin
Lens mount
Contacts (p.24)
Mirror (p.234, 377)
Body cap (p.52)
26
Nomenclature
LCD panel (p.29-30)
Eyecup (p.236)
Viewfinder eyepiece
<p>
AF start button
(p.55, 86, 257, 291)
<A> AE lock
button (p.217)
<S>
AF point
selection
button
(p.92-93)
<B> Info button
(p.60, 75, 78, 258,
289, 320, 442)
Power switch (p.47)
<Q> Quick
Control
button (p.61)
<M>
Menu button (p.64)
Terminal cover
<5> Quick
Control Dial (p.57)
Touch pad (p.58)
<0> Setting button
(p.64)
<Y> External microphone IN terminal (p.301)
Cable protector socket
<D> HDMI mini OUT terminal (p.351)
<D> PC terminal (p.245)
<g> Digital terminal (p.380, 393, 502)
Cable protector socket
<F> Remote control terminal (N3 type) (p.237)
When connecting the interface cable to a digital terminal, you must use the
provided cable protector (p.36).
27
Nomenclature
Dioptric adjustment knob (p.54)
<V> Focal plane mark
<A/k> Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch
(p.255/279)
<0> Start/Stop button
(p.256, 280)
<b/X>
Creative Photo/
Comparative playback
(Two-image display)
button (p.164, 221,
226/332)
<9> Multi-controller
(p.58)
<c>
Rating button
(p.336, 337)
Strap mount
(p.35)
<u>
Index/Magnify/
Reduce button
(p.327/330)
Card slot
cover (p.43)
<x> Playback
button (p.320)
<L> Erase button
(p.358)
Battery
compartment
cover release
lever (p.42)
Speaker
Ambient light sensor
(p.361)
Battery compartment
cover (p.42)
LCD monitor (p.64, 256,
280, 320, 361)
Tripod socket
Multi function lock switch (p.59)
SD card slot (p.43)
CF card slot (p.43)
CF card eject button (p.45)
28
Access lamp (p.45)
Serial number
Nomenclature
LCD Panel
Shutter speed
FE lock (FEL)
Remaining number of
exposures for time-lapse movie
Busy (buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
No card warning (Card)
Error code (Err)
Cleaning image sensor (CLn)
White balance
(p.174)
Q Auto: Ambience
priority
Qw Auto: White priority
W Daylight
E Shade
R Cloudy
Y Tungsten
light
U White
fluorescent
light
I Flash
O Custom
P Color temperature
Aperture
AF point selection
([
] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)
AF point registration
([
] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP)
Card warning (Card 1/2)
Card full warning (FuLL 1/2)
Possible shots
Self-timer countdown
Bulb exposure time
Card error warning (Err)
Error number
Remaining images to record
<g> SD card indicator
<u> White balance correction
(p.179)
<J> SD card selection icon
<a> Time-lapse movie shooting
(p.306)
<O> Exposure compensation
(p.214)
<N> Auto Lighting Optimizer
(p.182)
<f> CF card indicator
<J> CF card selection icon
<2>Mirror lockup (p.234)
* The display will show only the settings currently applied.
29
Nomenclature
<w> HDR shooting
(p.221)
<P> Multiple-exposure
shooting (p.226)
<J> Bulb timer shooting
(p.219)
<H> Interval timer
shooting (p.239)
<r> GPS
acquisition status
<y>
Flash exposure
compensation
(p.244)
Exposure level
indicator
Exposure compensation amount
(p.214)
AEB range (p.215)
Flash exposure compensation
amount (p.244)
AF operation (p.86)
X
One-Shot AF
9
AI Focus AF
Z
AI Servo AF
4L
Manual focus
Drive mode (p.142)
u Single shooting
o High-speed
continuous shooting
i Low-speed
continuous shooting
B Silent single shooting
M Silent continuous
shooting
Q Self-timer: 10 sec./
remote control
k Self-timer: 2 sec./
remote control
Metering mode (p.212)
q Evaluative metering
w Partial metering
r Spot metering
e Center-weighted
average metering
Battery level (p.48)
<0> Monochrome
shooting (p.166)
<h> AEB (p.215)
<i> ISO speed
(p.158)
ISO speed (p.158)
<A> Highlight tone priority
(p.187)
30
Nomenclature
Viewfinder Information
Electronic level (p.75)
Spot metering circle (p.213)
Focusing screen
Aspect ratio
line (1:1)
<S> Single AF point
<O> Spot AF point
(p.95)
Grid (p.74)
Crop area (1.6x)
Area AF frame
(p.91, 97)
Crop area (1.3x)
<
> Battery
level (p.48)
<z> Warning symbol
(p.409)
White balance (p.174)
Flicker detection
(p.191)
Drive mode (p.142)
AF operation (p.86)
JPEG/RAW (p.149)
Metering mode (p.212)
* The display will show only the settings currently applied.
31
Nomenclature
<i> ISO speed
(p.158)
<o> Focus
indicator
(p.80, 87)
<A> AE lock (p.217)
AEB in-progress
(p.215)
<D> Flash-ready
(p.244)
Improper FE lock
warning
<d> FE lock (p.244)
FEB in-progress (p.251)
<e> High-speed sync (p.251)
<y> Flash exposure
compensation (p.244)
Shutter speed (p.206)
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
No card warning (Card)
Error code (Err)
Aperture (p.208)
32
<e> AF status indicator
(p.80)
Maximum burst (p.153)
Number of remaining
multiple exposures (p.228)
ISO speed (p.158)
<A> Highlight tone priority (p.187)
<O> Exposure compensation (p.214)
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount (p.214)
AEB range (p.215)
Flash exposure compensation (p.244)
AF point selection
([
] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)
AF point registration
([
] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP)
Card warning (Card 1/2)
Card full warning (FuLL 1/2)
Nomenclature
Mode Dial
You can set the shooting mode. Turn the Mode Dial while holding down
the Mode Dial center (Mode Dial lock release button).
F : Bulb (p.218)
a : Manual exposure (p.210)
f : Aperture-priority AE (p.208)
s : Shutter-priority AE (p.206)
d : Program AE (p.204)
A : Scene Intelligent Auto (p.80)
Custom shooting mode
You can register the shooting mode (d/s/f/a/F), AF
operation, menu settings, etc., to w, x, y Mode Dial positions
(p.437).
33
Nomenclature
Battery Charger LC-E6E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.40).
Power cord
Charge lamp
Battery pack slot
Power cord socket
34
Nomenclature
Attaching the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through the
camera’s strap mount eyelet from the
bottom. Then pass it through the strap’s
buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the
strap to take up any slack and make sure the
strap will not loosen from the buckle.
 The eyepiece cover is also attached to
the strap (p.236).
Eyepiece cover
35
Nomenclature
Using the Cable Protector
When connecting the camera to a computer, printer, Wireless File
Transmitter or GPS Receiver, use the provided interface cable or one
from Canon (shown in the System Map on page 454).
When connecting the interface cable, also use the provided cable
protector. Using the cable protector prevents the cable from accidental
disconnection and the terminal from getting damaged.
Using the Provided Interface Cable and a Genuine HDMI Cable
(sold separately)
1
2
Clamp
3
Cable protector
4
Provided interface cable
5
HDMI cable (sold separately)
36
Nomenclature
Using a Genuine Interface Cable (sold separately)
If you use a genuine interface cable (sold
separately, p.454), run the cable through the
clamp before attaching the clamp to the cable
protector.
Clamp
 Connecting interface cable without using the cable protector may
damage the digital terminal.
 Do not use a USB 2.0 cable equipped with a Micro-B plug. It may
damage the camera’s digital terminal.
 As shown in the lower-right illustration for step 4, check that the interface
cable is securely attached to the digital terminal.
To connect the camera to a TV set, using HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately) is recommended. Using the cable protector is recommended
even when connecting an HDMI cable.
37
38
1
Getting Started
This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start
shooting and basic camera operations.
39
Charging the Battery
1
Remove the protective cover.
 Detach the protective cover provided
with the battery.
the battery.
2 Attach
 As shown in the illustration, attach the
battery securely to the charger.
 To detach the battery, follow the
above procedure in reverse.
the battery.
3 Recharge
 Connect the power cord to the
charger and insert the plug into
a power outlet.
 Recharging starts automatically and
the charge lamp blinks in orange.
Charge Level
0-49%
50-74%
75% or higher
Fully charged
Color
Orange
Green
Charge Lamp
Display
Blinks once per second
Blinks twice per second
Blinks three times per second
Lights up
 It takes approx. 2 hr. and 30 min. to fully recharge a completely
exhausted battery at room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time
required to recharge the battery will vary greatly depending on the
ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.
 For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /
41°F - 50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).
40
Charging the Battery
Tips for Using the Battery and Charger
 Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
 Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity.
 After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the
charger from the power outlet.
 You can attach the cover in a different
orientation to indicate whether the battery
has been recharged or not.
If the battery has been recharged, attach the
cover so that the battery-shaped hole <
> is
aligned over the blue sticker on the battery. If the battery is
exhausted, attach the cover in the opposite orientation.
 When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount
of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge and shorter
battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover attached. Storing
the battery when it is fully charged may lower the battery’s performance.
 The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz
power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter for
the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage
transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can damage the battery charger.
 If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully
charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.
Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.446) and purchase a new battery.
 After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for
approx. 10 sec.
 If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.446) is 94% or higher, the battery
will not be recharged.
 The charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6.
41
Installing and Removing the Battery
Load a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N (or LP-E6) into the camera.
The camera’s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is installed,
and darkens when the battery is removed.
Installing the Battery
1
Open the cover.
 Slide the lever as shown by the
arrows and open the cover.
the battery.
2 Insert
 Insert the end with the battery
contacts.
 Insert the battery until it locks in
place.
the cover.
3 Close
 Press the cover until it snaps shut.
Only Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 can be used.
Removing the Battery
Open the cover and remove the
battery.
 Press the battery lock lever as shown
by the arrow and remove the battery.
 To prevent short circuiting of the
battery contacts, be sure to attach the
provided protective cover (p.40) to
the battery.
42
Installing and Removing the Card
The camera can use a CF card and an SD card. Images can be
recorded when at least one card is installed in the camera.
If both types of card are inserted, you can select which card to record
images to, or simultaneously record images on both cards (p.146-148).
Cautions for Using an SD Card
If you use an SD card, be sure the card’s write-protect switch is set
upward to enable writing/erasing.
Installing the Card
1
CF card
SD card
Write-protect switch
Open the cover.
 Slide the cover as shown by the
arrows to open it.
the card.
2 Insert
 The camera-front side slot is for a CF
card, and the camera-back side slot
is for an SD card.
 Face the CF card’s label toward
you and insert the end with the
small holes into the camera.
If the card is inserted in the wrong
way, it may damage the camera.
 The CF card eject button will stick
out.
 With the SD card’s label facing
you, push in the card until it clicks
in place.
43
Installing and Removing the Card
the cover.
3 Close
 Close the cover and slide it in the
Possible
Card
selection icon shots
direction shown by the arrows until it
snaps shut.
 When you set the power switch to
<1> (p.47), the number of possible
shots and the loaded card(s) will be
displayed on the LCD panel.
The images will be recorded to the
card indicated by the arrow < >
icon.
CF card indicator
SD card indicator
 The camera cannot use Type II CF cards, hard disk-type cards, or CFast
cards.
 Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used (card error will be displayed).
 Ultra DMA (UDMA) CF cards can also be used with the camera. UDMA
cards enable faster data writing.
 SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards are supported. UHS-I SDHC or SDXC
memory cards can also be used.
 The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the
card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.
 “Possible Shots” displays the number of shots based on the [z4: Crop/
aspect ratio] setting (p.154).
 Even if shooting 2,000 or more shots is possible, the indicator will display
only up to 1999.
 Setting [z1: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent
you from forgetting to insert a card (p.460).
44
Installing and Removing the Card
Removing the Card
1
Open the cover.
 Set the power switch to <2>.
 Make sure the access lamp is off,
then open the cover.
 If [Recording...] is displayed on the
LCD monitor, close the cover.
Access lamp
the card.
2 Remove
 To remove the CF card, push the
CF card eject button
eject button.
 To remove the SD card, push it in
gently and release it. Then pull it out.
 Pull the card straight out, then close
the cover.
45
Installing and Removing the Card
 When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are
being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being
transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time. Also,
never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or
blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or banging the camera around.
• Unplugging and connecting a power cord (when household power
outlet accessories (sold separately, p.450) are used).
 If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (p.199).
 If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove
and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer, transfer all
the images and then format the card with the camera (p.67). The card
may then return to normal.
 Do not touch the SD card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects.
Do not expose the contacts to dust or water. If smudges adhere to the
contacts, contact failure may result.
46
Turning on the Power
If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting
screen appears, see page 49 to set the date/time/zone.
<1> : The camera turns on.
<2> : The camera is turned off and
does not operate. Set to this
position when not using the
camera.
Automatic Sensor Cleaning
 Whenever you set the power switch
to <1> or <2>, sensor
cleaning will be executed
automatically. (A small sound may be
heard.) During the sensor cleaning,
the LCD monitor will display <f>.
 You can still shoot during sensor cleaning by pressing the shutter
button halfway (p.55) to stop cleaning and take a picture.
 If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and
not a malfunction.
3 Auto Power Off
 To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after 1
minute of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just press the
shutter button halfway.
 You can change the auto power off time with [52: Auto power off]
(p.69).
If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to
the card, [Recording...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the
recording finishes.
47
Turning on the Power
z Battery Level Indicator
When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be
indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon <b> indicates
that the battery will be exhausted soon.
Display
Level (%) 100 - 70 69 - 50 49 - 20 19 - 10
9-1
0
Number of Possible Shots
Temperature
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
Possible shots
Approx. 700 shots
Approx. 660 shots
 The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, no Live View
shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
 Possible shots with Battery Grip BG-E11 (sold separately)
• With LP-E6N x 2: approx. twice the shots without the battery grip.
• With AA/LR6 alkaline batteries at room temperature (23°C / 73°F): approx.
140 shots.
 Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery sooner:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor frequently.
 The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual
shooting conditions.
 The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on
the lens used, the battery may exhaust faster.
 For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 257.
 See [53: Battery info.] to check the battery’s condition (p.446).
 With Battery Grip BG-E11 (sold separately) loaded with AA/R6 batteries,
a four-level indicator will be displayed. (x/m will not be
displayed.)
48
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone are
reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow the steps
below, making sure to set the time zone first. Set the camera to the time
zone in which you currently live so that, when you travel, you can simply
change the setting to the correct time zone for your destination and the
camera will automatically adjust the date/time.
Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based
on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
the [52] tab, select [Date/
2 Under
Time/Zone].
 Press the <Q> button and select the
[5] tab.
 Turn the <6> dial to select the [52]
tab.
 Turn the <5> dial to select [Date/
Time/Zone], then press <0>.
the time zone.
3 Set
 [London] is set by default.
 Turn the <5> dial to select [Time
zone].
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the time
zone, then press <0>.
49
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
the date and time.
4 Set
 Turn the <5> dial to select the number.
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
desired setting, then press <0>
(Returns to <s>).
the daylight saving time.
5 Set
 Set it if necessary.
 Turn the <5> dial to select [Y].
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Turn the <5> dial to select [Z], then
press <0>.
 When the daylight saving time is set
to [Z], the time set in step 4 will
advance by 1 hr. If [Y] is set, the
daylight saving time will be canceled
and the time will go back by 1 hr.
the setting.
6 Exit
 Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],
then press <0>.
 The date/time/zone and daylight
saving time will be set and the menu
will reappear.
 The date/time/zone settings may be reset when the camera is stored
without the battery, when its battery becomes exhausted, or when it is
exposed to below freezing temperatures for a prolonged period. If this
happens, set the date/time/zone again.
 After changing the time zone, check that the correct date/time are set.
 When performing [Sync time between cameras] via Wireless File
Transmitter, using another EOS 5DS/EOS 5DS R is recommended. If
you perform [Sync time between cameras] using different models, the
time zone or time may not be set correctly.
50
3 Selecting the Interface Language
 The date/time that were set will start from when you select [OK] in step 6.
 In step 3, the time displayed on the upper right of the screen is the time
difference compared with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If you do
not see your time zone, set the time zone while referring to the difference
with UTC.
3 Selecting the Interface Language
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
the [52] tab, select
2 Under
[LanguageK].
 Press the <Q> button and select the
[5] tab.
 Turn the <6> dial to select the [52]
tab.
 Turn the <5> dial to select
[LanguageK], then press <0>.
the desired language.
3 Set
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
language, then press <0>.
 The interface language will change.
51
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
The camera is compatible with all Canon EF lenses. The camera
cannot be used with EF-S or EF-M lenses.
Attaching a Lens
1
Remove the caps.
 Remove the rear lens cap and the
body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.
the lens.
2 Attach
 Align the red dots on the lens and
camera and turn the lens as shown by
the arrow until it clicks in place.
the lens’s focus mode switch
3 Set
to <AF>.
 <AF> stands for autofocus.
 <MF> stands for manual focus.
Autofocus will not operate.
4 Remove the front lens cap.
52
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Detaching the Lens
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrow.
 Turn the lens until it stops, then
detach it.
 Attach the rear lens cap to the
detached lens.
 Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause
loss of vision.
 When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
 If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do
not touch the rotating part.
Minimizing Dust
 When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
 When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to attach the
body cap to the camera.
 Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
53
Basic Operation
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity
Turn the dioptric adjustment
knob.
 Turn the knob left or right so that the
AF points in the viewfinder look
sharp.
 If the knob is difficult to turn, remove
the eyecup (p.236).
If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder
image, using Dioptric Adjustment Lens Eg (sold separately) is
recommended.
Holding the Camera
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera
shake.
Horizontal shooting
Vertical shooting
1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.
3. Rest your hand’s right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.
6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 255.
54
Basic Operation
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing Halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder
and on the LCD panel for 4 sec.
(metering timer/0).
Pressing Completely
This releases the shutter and takes the
picture.
Preventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called
camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,
note the following:
• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the
shutter button completely.
 In the <d> <s> <f> <a> <F> shooting modes, pressing the
<p> button will execute the same operation as pressing the shutter
button halfway.
 If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first
or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely
immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.
 Even during menu display or image playback, you can go back to
shooting-ready by pressing the shutter button halfway.
55
Basic Operation
Mode Dial
Turn the dial while holding down
the lock release button at the
center of the dial.
Use it to set the shooting mode.
6 Main Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<6> dial.
When you press a button such as
<n> <o> <m>, the
respective function remains selected for
6 sec. (9). During this time, you can
turn the <6> dial to change the setting.
When the function selection ends or if
you press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will be ready to shoot.
 Use this dial to select the metering
mode, AF operation, ISO speed, AF
point, etc.
(2) Turn the <6> dial only.
While looking at the viewfinder or LCD
panel, turn the <6> dial to change the
setting.
 Use this dial to set the shutter speed,
aperture, etc.
The operations in (1) are possible even when the <R> switch is set to
the right (Multi function lock, p.59).
56
Basic Operation
5 Quick Control Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<5> dial.
When you press a button such as
<n> <o> <m>, the
respective function remains selected for
6 sec. (9). During this time, you can
turn the <5> dial to change the setting.
When the function selection ends or if
you press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will be ready to shoot.
 Use this dial to select the white
balance, drive mode, flash exposure
compensation, AF point, etc.
(2) Turn the <5> dial only.
While looking at the viewfinder or LCD
panel, turn the <5> dial to change the
setting.
 Use this dial to set the exposure
compensation amount, the aperture
setting for manual exposures, etc.
The operations in (1) are possible even when the <R> switch is set to
the right (Multi function lock, p.59).
57
Basic Operation
9 Multi-controller
The <9> consists of an eight-direction key and a button at the center.
Use your thumb to tilt the <9> in the desired direction.
 Use it to select the AF point, correct
the white balance, move the AF point
or magnifying frame during Live View
shooting, scroll around magnified
images during playback, operate the
Quick Control screen, etc.
 You can also use it to select and set
menu items.
 For menus and Quick Control, the
Multi-controller works only in the
vertical and horizontal directions. It
does not work in diagonal directions.
h Touch Pad
During movie shooting, the touch pad provides a quiet way to adjust the
shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, ISO speed, and
sound recording level (p.302).
This function works when [z5: Silent Control] is set to [Enable h].
After pressing the <Q> button,
tap the <5> dial’s inner ring at
the top, bottom, left, or right.
58
Basic Operation
R Multi Function Lock
By setting [83: Multi function lock] (p.410) and moving the <R>
switch to the right, you can prevent the Main Dial, Quick Control Dial,
and Multi-controller from moving and changing a setting inadvertently.
<R> switch set to the left:
Lock released
<R> switch set to the right:
Lock engaged
If the <R> switch is set to the right and you try to operate any of the
locked camera controls, <L> will appear in the viewfinder and on the LCD
panel. Also, [LOCK] will appear on the Quick Control screen (p.60).
U LCD Panel Illumination
You can illuminate the LCD panel by
pressing the <U> button. Turn on (9)
or off the LCD panel illumination by
pressing the <U> button.
During a bulb exposure, pressing the shutter button completely will turn off
the LCD panel illumination.
59
Basic Operation
Displaying Quick Control Screen
After you press the <B> button a number of times (p.442), the
Quick Control screen (p.62) or Custom Quick Control screen (p.427)
will appear. You can then check the current shooting function settings.
Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control of the shooting
function settings (p.61).
Then you can press the <B> button to turn off the screen.
60
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the
LCD monitor. This is called Quick Control.
The basic operating procedures are the same for the Quick Control
screen (p.60) and the Custom Quick Control screen (p.427).
1
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
the desired functions.
2 Set
 Use <9> to select a function.
 The setting of the selected function is
displayed.
 Turn the <5> or <6> dial to
change the setting.
 <A> mode
 <d/s/f/a/F> modes
the picture.
3 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 The captured image will be displayed.
In the <A> mode with the Quick Control screen displayed, you can only
set recording function, card selection, image-recording quality, and drive
mode.
61
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
Settable Functions on Quick Control Screen
Aperture (p.208)
Shutter speed (p.206)
AE lock* (p.217)
Highlight tone priority* (p.187)
Shooting mode* (p.33)
Exposure
compensation/
AEB setting
(p.214/215)
ISO speed (p.158)
Flash exposure
compensation (p.244)
Picture Style (p.164)
Custom Controls (p.413)
AF operation (p.86)
Image-recording quality
(p.149)
White balance (p.174)
Metering mode (p.212)
White balance correction /
White balance bracketing
(p.179/180)
Recording function/Card selection
(p.146)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
(p.182)
Drive mode (p.142)
* Functions marked with an asterisk cannot be set with the Quick Control
screen.
Custom Quick Control Screen
You can customize the layout of the Custom Quick Control screen. This
feature lets you display and position the shooting functions on the
Custom Quick Control screen as desired. For details, see page 427.
On the Custom Quick Control screen, if you press the <Q> button and
there are no functions you can set with Quick Control, the Quick Control
icon on the lower left of the screen will be displayed in orange.
62
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
Quick Control Screen
 <0>
 Select a function and press <0>.
The function setting screen will
appear.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to
change some of the settings. There
are also functions that are set by
pressing the button.
 Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to the previous screen.
 When you select <
> (p.413) and
press the <M> button, the
previous screen will reappear.
63
3 Menu Operations
You can set various settings with the menus such as the image-recording
quality, date/time, etc.
<M> button
<6> Main Dial
LCD monitor
<5> Quick Control Dial
<Q> button
<0> button
A Mode Menu Screen
* Certain menu tabs and menu items are not displayed in the <A> mode.
d/s/f/a/F Mode Menu Screen
3: Playback
2: AF
z: Shooting
Secondary
tabs
5: Set-up
8: Custom Functions
9: My Menu
Main tabs
Menu settings
Menu items
64
3 Menu Operations
Menu Setting Procedure
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
a tab.
2 Select
 Each time you press the <Q> button,
the main tab will switch.
 Turn the <6> dial to select a
secondary tab.
 For example, the [z5] tab refers to
the screen displayed when the z
(Shooting) tab’s fifth dot “ ” from the
left is selected.
the desired item.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the item,
then press <0>.
the setting.
4 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
desired setting.
 The current setting is indicated in
blue.
the setting.
5 Adjust
 Press <0> to set it.
the setting.
6 Exit
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to shooting-ready.
65
3 Menu Operations
 The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have
pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.
 You can also use <9> to operate and set menu functions. (Except for
[31: Erase images] and [51: Format card].)
 To cancel the operation, press the <M> button.
 For details about each menu item, see page 460.
Dimmed Menu Items
Example: When Multi Shot
Noise Reduction is set
Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The
menu item is dimmed if another function
setting is overriding it.
You can see the overriding function by
selecting the dimmed menu item and
pressing <0>.
If you cancel the overriding function’s
setting, the dimmed menu item will
become settable.
Some dimmed menu items will not show the overriding function.
With [54: Clear all camera settings], you can reset the menu functions to
the default settings (p.70).
66
Before You Start
3 Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or
computer, format the card with this camera.
Cautions for Formatting the Card
When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be
erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is
nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images and data to
a computer, etc., before formatting the card.
1
Select [Format card].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Format
card], then press <0>.
the card.
2 Select
 [f] is the CF card, and [g] is the SD
card.
 Select the card, then press <0>.
[OK].
3 Select
 The card will be formatted.
 When [g] is selected, low-level
formatting is possible (p.68).
For low-level formatting, press the
<L> button to append [Low level
format] with a checkmark <X>, then
select [OK].
67
Before You Start
Format the card in the following cases:




The card is new.
The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
The card is full with images or data.
A card-related error is displayed (p.487).
Low-level Formatting
 Perform low-level formatting if the SD card’s reading or writing speed
seems slow or if you want to totally erase all data on the card.
 Since low-level formatting will erase all recordable sectors on the SD card,
the formatting will take longer than normal formatting.
 You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this
case, normal formatting will be completed and you can use the SD card as
usual.
 When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management
information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the
card, execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to
prevent the personal data from being leaked.
 Before using a new Eye-Fi card (p.451), the software on the card must
be installed on your computer. Then format the card with the camera.
 The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller
than the capacity indicated on the card.
 This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
68
Before You Start
3 Disabling the Beeper
You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved or
during self-timer operation.
1
Select [Beep].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Beep],
then press <0>.
[Disable].
2 Select
 Select [Disable], then press <0>.
 The beeper will not sound.
3 Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after a set
time of idle operation elapses. The default setting is 1 min., but this
setting can be changed. If you do not want the camera to turn off
automatically, set this to [Disable]. After the power turns off, you can
turn on the camera again by pressing the shutter button or other
buttons.
1
Select [Auto power off].
 Under the [52] tab, select [Auto
power off], then press <0>.
the desired time.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Even if [Disable] is set, the LCD monitor will turn off automatically after 30
min. to save power. (The camera’s power does not turn off.)
69
Before You Start
3 Setting the Image Review Time
You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor just
after shooting. To keep the image displayed, set [Hold]. To not have the
image displayed, set [Off].
1
Select [Image review].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
review], then press <0>.
the desired time.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
If [Hold] is set, the image will be displayed until the auto power off time
elapses.
3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN
The camera’s shooting function settings and menu settings can be
reverted to their defaults.
1
Select [Clear all camera settings].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Clear all
camera settings], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
 Clearing all the camera settings will
reset the camera to the default
settings on pages 71-73.
70
Before You Start
AF Settings
Shooting Function Settings
AF operation
AF area selection
mode
AF point selection
Registered AF point
Metering mode
ISO speed
ISO speed range
Auto ISO range
One-Shot AF
Single-point AF
(Manual Selection)
Center
Canceled
q (Evaluative metering)
Auto
Minimum limit: 100
Maximum limit: 6400
Minimum limit: 100
Maximum limit: 3200
Minimum shutter Auto
speed
Drive mode
u (Single shooting)
Exposure
Canceled
compensation/AEB
Flash exposure
Canceled
compensation
Multiple exposure Disable
HDR Mode
Disable HDR
Interval timer
Disable
Bulb timer
Disable
Anti-flicker shooting Disable
Mirror lockup
Disable
Viewfinder display
Electronic level Hide
Grid display
Hide
Show/hide in
Only Flicker
viewfinder
selected
Custom Functions Unchanged
External Speedlite control
Flash firing
Enable
E-TTL II
Evaluative flash
flash metering metering
Flash sync. speed Auto
in Av mode
Case 1 - 6
AI Servo 1st
image priority
AI Servo 2nd
image priority
Lens electronic
MF
AF-assist beam firing
One-Shot AF
release priority
Lens drive when
AF impossible
Selectable AF
point
Select AF area
selection mode
AF area selection
method
Orientation linked
AF point
Initial AF point,
AI Servo AF
Automatic AF
point selection:
EOS iTR AF
Manual AF point
selection pattern
AF point display
during focus
VF display
illumination
AF point during
AI Servo AF
AF
Microadjustment
Case1/Parameter
settings of all
cases cleared
Equal priority
Equal priority
Enable after
One-Shot AF
Enable
Focus priority
Continue focus
search
61 points
All items
selected
M-Fn button
Same for both
vertical/horizontal
Auto
Enable
Stops at AF area
edges
Selected
(constant)
Auto
Non illuminated
Disable/
Adjustment
amount retained
71
Before You Start
Image Recording Settings
Camera Settings
Image quality
73
Auto power off
1 min.
Crop/aspect ratio
Full-frame
Beep
Enable
Picture Style
Standard
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Enable
Standard
Release shutter
without card
Image review time
2 sec.
Highlight alert
Disable
Peripheral illumination Enable/Correction
correction
data retained
AF point display
Disable
Playback grid
Off
Chromatic aberration Enable/Correction
correction
data retained
Histogram display
Brightness
Lens aberration correction
Movie playback count Unchanged
Magnification
(Approx.)
2x (magnify
from center)
Custom White Balance Canceled
Control over HDMI
Disable
White balance shift
Image jump w/6
e (10 images)
Auto rotate
OnzD
LCD brightness
Auto
White balance
Q (Ambience
priority)
Canceled
White balance
bracketing
Canceled
Color space
sRGB
Long exposure
noise reduction
High ISO speed
noise reduction
Disable
Standard
Highlight tone priority Disable
Date/Time/Zone
Unchanged
Eye-Fi settings
Disable
Language
Unchanged
Video system
Unchanged
z button display All items
options
selected
Record function
Standard
File numbering
Continuous
Custom Quick
Control
File name
Preset code
m button function Rating
Auto cleaning
Enable
Custom shooting mode Unchanged
Dust Delete Data
Erased
Copyright information Unchanged
Configure:
MY MENU
Menu display
72
Unchanged
Unchanged
Normal display
Before You Start
Live View Shooting Settings
Live View shooting
AF method
Continuous AF
Grid display
Enable
u+Tracking
Disable
Off
Exposure
simulation
Enable
Silent LV
shooting
Mode 1
Metering timer
8 sec.
Movie Shooting Settings
Movie Servo AF Disable
AF method
u+Tracking
Grid display
Off
Movie recording NTSC: L6X
size
PAL: L5X
Sound recording
Wind filter
Attenuator
Silent LV shooting
Metering timer
Time code
Count up
Start time setting
Auto
Disable
Disable
Mode 1
8 sec.
Unchanged
Unchanged
Movie
Unchanged
recording count
Movie playback
Unchanged
count
Drop frame
Silent control
Unchanged
Disable h
V button
function
/z
Time-lapse
movie
Disable
73
l Displaying the Grid
You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera tilt
or compose the shot.
1
Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Grid display].
[Show].
3 Select
 When you exit the menu, the grid will
appear in the viewfinder.
You can display a grid on the LCD monitor during Live View shooting and
before you start shooting a movie (p.265, 315).
74
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor and in the
viewfinder to help you correct camera tilt.
Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor
1
Press the <B> button.
 Each time you press the <B>
button, the screen display will
change.
 Display the electronic level.
 If the electronic level does not
appear, set [53: z button
display options] so that the
electronic level can be displayed
(p.442).
the camera’s tilt.
2 Check
 The horizontal and vertical tilt are
Vertical level Horizontal level
displayed in 1° increments.
 When the red line turns green, it
indicates that the tilt is almost
corrected.
 Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx.
±1°.
 If the camera is very tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error will be larger.
During Live View shooting and before movie shooting, you can also display
the electronic level as described above (except with u+ Tracking).
75
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
3 Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder
An electronic level can be displayed on the upper part of the viewfinder.
Since this can be displayed while you shoot, you can correct the
camera tilt while shooting.
1
Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Electronic level].
3 Select [Show].
the shutter button halfway.
4 Press
 The electronic level will be displayed
in the viewfinder.
 This also works with vertical shooting.
1°
1°
4° or greater
7°
7.5° or greater
Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx.
±1°.
76
3 Setting the Viewfinder Information DisplayN
The shooting function settings (Battery, White balance, Drive mode, AF
operation, Metering mode, Image quality: JPEG/RAW, Flicker
detection) can be displayed in the viewfinder.
By default, only Flicker detection is checkmarked [X].
1
Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Show/hide in viewfinder].
[X] the information to
3 Checkmark
be displayed.
 Select the information to display and
press <0> to append a checkmark
<X>.
 Repeat this procedure to append a
checkmark [X] to all the information
to be displayed. Then select [OK].
 When you exit the menu, the
checkmarked information will appear
in the viewfinder (p.31).
If no card is inserted in the camera, the image-recording quality will not be
displayed.
 When you press the <n> or <o> button, operate the lens’s
focus mode switch, or when a lens equipped with electronic manual
focusing function is used and the AF/MF switches as the lens’s focusing
ring is turned (p.120), the respective information will appear in the
viewfinder regardless of whether it is checkmarked.
 If [Battery] is not checkmarked, the battery check icon (
/
) will
be displayed in the viewfinder when the battery level is low.
77
Help
When [z Help] is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen, the
feature’s description (Help) can be displayed. The Help screen is
displayed only while you hold down the <B> button. If the Help fills
more than one screen, a scroll bar will appear on the right edge. To
scroll, hold down the <B> button and turn the <5> dial.
 Example: [21: Case2]
B

Scroll bar
 Example: [24: Orientation linked AF point]
B

 Example: [83: Multi function lock]
B

78
2
Basic Shooting
This chapter explains how to use the Mode Dial’s <A>
(Scene Intelligent Auto) mode for easy picture taking.
In the <A> mode, all you do is point and shoot and the
camera sets everything automatically (p.456). Also, to prevent
botched pictures due to mistaken operations, advanced
shooting function settings cannot be changed.
Scene Intelligent Auto
Auto Lighting Optimizer
In the <A> mode, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.182) will adjust
the image automatically to obtain the optimum brightness and
contrast. It is also enabled by default in the <d>, <s>, or
<f> mode.
79
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
<A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene
and sets the optimum settings automatically. It also adjusts focus
automatically by detecting whether the subject is still or moving (p.83).
1
Area AF frame
Set the Mode Dial to <A>.
 Turn the Mode Dial while holding
down the lock release button at the
center.
the Area AF frame over the
2 Aim
subject.
 All the AF points will be used to focus,
and the camera will focus on the
closest object.
 Aiming the center of the Area AF
frame over the subject will make
focusing easier.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway. The
lens elements will shift to focus.
 During the autofocus operation,
<e> will be displayed.
 The AF point that achieves focus will
be displayed. At the same time, the
beeper will sound and the focus
indicator <o> will light up.
 In low light, the AF point(s) will light
up briefly in red.
Focus indicator
80
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 The captured image will be displayed
for 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.
The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes. If you did not obtain the desired color tones, change the
mode to <d>, <s>, <f>, or <a>, set a Picture Style other than
<D>, then shoot again (p.164).
FAQ
 The focus indicator <o> blinks and focus is not achieved.
Aim the Area AF frame over an area with good contrast, then press
the shutter button halfway (p.55). If you are too close to the subject,
move away and try again. If focus cannot be achieved, the AF status
indicator <e> will also blink.
 When focus is achieved, the AF points do not light up in red.
The AF points light up in red only when focus is achieved in low-light
conditions.
 Multiple AF points light up simultaneously.
Focus has been achieved at all those points. You can take the
picture as long as an AF point covering the target subject is lighting
up.
 The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus indicator <o>
does not light up.)
It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving
subject. (The AF status indicator <e> lights up, but the focus
confirmation light <o> does not light up.) You can take sharp
pictures of a moving subject.
Note that focus lock (p.83) will not work in this case.
81
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
 Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus on the
subject.
If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus),
set it to <AF> (autofocus).
 The shutter speed display is blinking.
Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject
due to camera shake. Using a tripod or a Canon EX-series Speedlite
(sold separately, p.244) is recommended.
 When the external flash was used, the bottom part of the
picture came out unnaturally dark.
If a hood is attached to the lens, it can obstruct the flash light. If the
subject is close, detach the hood before taking the picture with flash.
82
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Recomposing the Shot
Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to
create a balanced background and good perspective.
In the <A> mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a
still subject will lock the focus on that subject. Recompose the shot
while keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, and then press the
shutter button completely to take the picture. This is called “focus lock”.
Shooting a Moving Subject
In the <A> mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes)
while or after you focus, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus on the
subject continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long
as you keep the Area AF frame positioned over the subject while
pressing the shutter button halfway, the focusing will be continuous.
When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button completely.
83
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
A Live View Shooting
You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is
called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 255.
1
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image on
2 Display
the LCD monitor.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely.
 The picture is taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD
monitor.
 When the playback display ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
 Press the <0> button to exit the
Live View shooting.
84
3
Setting the AF and
Drive Modes
The AF points in the viewfinder
are arranged to make AF shooting
suitable for a wide variety of
subjects and scenes.
You can also select the AF operation and drive mode
that best match the shooting conditions and subject.
 A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a
function that can be used only in the following modes: <d>
<s> <f> <a> <F>.
 In the <A> mode, the AF operation and AF area selection
mode are set automatically.
<AF> stands for autofocus. <MF> stands for manual focus.
85
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting
conditions or subject. In the <A> mode, “AI Focus AF” is set
automatically.
1
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <AF>.
the <d> <s> <f> <a>
2 Set
<F> mode.
3 Press the <o> button. (9)
the AF operation.
4 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
X : One-Shot AF
9 : AI Focus AF
Z : AI Servo AF
In the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or <F> mode, AF is also possible by
pressing the <p> button.
86
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
Suited for still subjects. When you
press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will focus only once.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
that achieved focus will be displayed,
and the focus indicator <o> in the
viewfinder will also light up.
 With evaluative metering (p.212), the
AF point
Focus indicator
exposure setting will be set at the
same time as focus is achieved.
 While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be
locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.
 If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder
will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter
button is pressed completely. Recompose the shot and try to focus again
or see “When Autofocus Fails” (p.140).
 If [z1: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus
is achieved.
 After achieving focus with One-Shot AF, you can lock the focus on a
subject and recompose the shot. This is called “focus lock”. This is
convenient when you want to focus on a peripheral subject not covered
by the Area AF frame.
87
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing
distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button
halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously.
 The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
 When the AF area selection mode (p.90) is set to 61-point automatic
selection AF, focus tracking will continue as long as the Area AF
frame covers the subject.
With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
Also, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder will not light up.
AI Focus AF for Switching the AF Operation Automatically
AI Focus AF switches the AF operation from One-Shot AF to AI
Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving.
 After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF, if the subject starts
moving, the camera will detect the movement, change the AF
operation automatically to AI Servo AF, and start tracking the moving
subject.
When focus is achieved with AI Focus AF with the Servo operation active,
the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus indicator <o> in
the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus will not be locked in this case.
88
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
AF Operation Indicator
While you press the shutter button
halfway and the camera focuses with AF,
the <e> icon will appear under the
focus indicator in the viewfinder.
In One-Shot AF mode, the icon also appears if you press the shutter
button halfway after focus is achieved.
AF Points Lighting Up in Red
By default, the AF points light up in red in low-light conditions. In the
<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or <F> mode, you can set whether to have
the AF points light up in red (p.132).
89
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
The camera has 61 AF points for autofocusing. You can select the AF
area selection mode and AF point(s) suiting the scene or subject.
Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of
usable AF points and AF point patterns will differ. For details,
see “Lenses and Usable AF Points” on page 100.
AF Area Selection Mode
You can select one of six AF area selection modes. For the setting
procedure, see page 92.
Single-point Spot AF
(Manual selection)
For pinpoint focusing.
Single-point AF
(Manual selection)
Select one AF point to focus.
AF point expansion
(Manual selection )
The manually-selected AF point <S>
and four adjacent AF points <w> (above,
below, on the left, and on the right) are
used to focus.
90
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
AF point expansion (Manual
selection, surrounding points)
The manually-selected AF point <S>
and the surrounding AF points <w> are
used to focus.
Zone AF
(Manual selection of zone)
One of nine zones is used to focus.
61-point automatic selection
AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is
used to focus. This mode is set
automatically in the <A> mode.
91
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode
1
Press the <S> button. (9)
the <B> button.
2 Press
 Look through the viewfinder and
press the <B> button.
 Each time you press the <B>
button, the AF area selection mode
changes.
 With [24: Select AF area selec. mode], you can limit the selectable
AF area selection modes (p.125).
 If you set [24: AF area selection method] to [S9Main Dial], you
can select the AF area selection mode by pressing the <S> button,
then turning the <6> dial (p.126).
92
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
Selecting the AF Point Manually
You can manually select the AF point or zone.
1
Press the <S> button. (9)
 The AF points will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
 In AF point expansion modes,
adjacent AF points will also be
displayed.
 In the Zone AF mode, the selected
zone will be displayed.
an AF point.
2 Select
 The AF point selection will change in
the direction you tilt <9>. If you
press <9> straight down, the center
AF point (or center zone) will be
selected.
 You can also select a horizontal AF
point by turning the <6> dial and
select a vertical AF point by turning
the <5> dial.
 In the Zone AF mode, turning the
<6> or <5> dial will change the
zone in a looping sequence.
 When [24: Initial AF pt,
AI Servo AF] is set to [Initial
AF pt
selected] (p.128), you can use this method to manually select the AI
Servo’s AF starting position.
 When you press the <S> button, the LCD panel displays the following:
• 61-point automatic selection AF and Zone AF:
AF
• Single-point Spot AF, Single-point AF, and AF point expansion: SEL
(Center)/SEL AF (Off-center)
93
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
AF Point Display Indications
Pressing the <S> button lights up the AF points that are cross-type AF
points for high-precision autofocusing. The blinking AF points are
horizontal-line or vertical-line sensitive. For details, see pages 99-104.
Registering the AF point
You can register a frequently-used AF point to the camera.
When you use the button set with the [83: Custom Controls] (p.413)
menu’s detailed settings screens for [Metering and AF start], [Switch
to registered AF point], [Direct AF point selection], or [Register/
recall shooting func], you can instantly switch from the current AF
point to the registered AF point.
For details on registering the AF point, see page 418.
94
AF Area Selection ModesN
Single-point Spot AF (Manual selection)
For pinpoint focusing over a narrower area than
with single-point AF (manual selection). Select one
AF point < > to focus.
Effective for pinpoint focusing or focusing
overlapping subjects such as an animal in a cage.
Since Single-point Spot AF (manual selection)
covers a very small area, focusing may be difficult
during hand-held shooting or for a moving subject.
Single-point AF (Manual selection)
Select one AF point <S> to be used for focusing.
AF point expansion (Manual selection
)
The manually-selected AF point <S> and adjacent AF points <w>
(above, below, on the left, and on the right) are used to focus. Effective
when it is difficult to track a moving subject with just one AF point.
With AI Servo AF, the initial manually-selected AF point <S> must
focus-track the subject first. However, it is superior to Zone AF in
focusing on the target subject.
With One-Shot AF, when focus is achieved with expanded AF points,
the expanded AF points <S> will also be displayed along with the
manually-selected AF point <S>.
95
AF Area Selection ModesN
AF point expansion (Manual selection, surrounding points)
The manually-selected AF point <S> and surrounding AF points <w>
are used to focus. The AF point expansion is larger than with AF point
expansion (manual selection ), so the focusing is executed over a
wider area. Effective when it is difficult to track a moving subject with
just one AF point.
AI Servo AF and One-Shot AF work in the same way as with AF point
expansion (manual selection ) mode (p.95).
Zone AF (Manual selection of zone)
The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing. All the AF
points in the selected zone are used for the automatic AF point
selection. It is superior to single-point AF or AF point expansion in
achieving focus, and it is effective for moving subjects.
However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on
a specific target may be more difficult than with single-point AF or AF
point expansion.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
96
AF Area Selection ModesN
61-point automatic selection AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used to focus. This mode is set
automatically in the <A> mode.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
With One-Shot AF, pressing the shutter button
halfway will display the AF point(s) <S> that
achieved focus. If multiple AF points are displayed,
it means they all have achieved focus. This mode
tends to focus on the nearest subject.
With AI Servo AF, you can set the AI Servo AF’s
starting position with [Initial AF pt,
AI Servo
AF] (p.128). As long as the Area AF frame can
track the subject during shooting, focusing will
continue.
97
AF Area Selection ModesN
 When AI Servo AF mode is set with 61-point automatic selection AF, or
Zone AF (manual selection of zone), the active AF point <S> will keep
switching to track the subject. However, under certain shooting
conditions (such as when the subject is small), it may not be able to track
the subject. Also, in low temperatures, the tracking response may
become slower.
 With Single-point Spot AF (manual selection), focusing with an EOSdedicated, external Speedlite’s AF-assist beam may be difficult.
 If a peripheral AF point or a wide-angle lens is used, achieving focus may
be difficult with an EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite’s AF-assist beam.
In such a case, use an AF point closer to the center.
 When the AF point(s) light up, part or all of the viewfinder may light up in
red. Also, if [z4: Crop/aspect ratio] is set, the semi-transparent,
masked area may light up in red. This is a characteristic of the AF point
display (using liquid crystal).
 In low temperatures, the AF point’s display may be difficult to see. This is
a characteristic of AF point display (using liquid crystal).
 With [24: Orientation linked AF point], you can set the AF area
selection mode + AF point (or only the AF point) separately for the
horizontal and vertical orientations (p.126).
 With [24: Selectable AF point], you can change the number of
manually selectable AF points (p.124).
98
AF Sensor
The camera’s AF sensor has 61 AF points. The illustration below shows the AF
sensor pattern corresponding to each AF point. With f/2.8 or larger maximum
aperture lenses, high-precision AF is possible at the viewfinder center.
Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of usable
AF points and AF pattern will differ. For details, see pages 100-108.
Diagram
Cross-type focusing: f/4 horizontal + f/5.6 vertical
Cross-type focusing:
f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal
f/5.6 vertical
focusing
Dual cross-type focusing:
f/2.8 right diagonal + f/2.8 left diagonal
f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal
These focusing sensors are geared to obtain higher
precision focusing with f/2.8 or larger maximum aperture
lenses. A diagonal cross pattern makes it easier to focus
subjects that may be difficult to focus. They cover the five
AF points vertically aligned at the center.
These focusing sensors are geared to obtain high-precision
focusing with f/4 or larger maximum aperture lenses. Since
they have a horizontal pattern, they can detect vertical
lines.
These focusing sensors are geared for f/5.6 or larger
maximum aperture lenses. Since they have a horizontal
pattern, they can detect vertical lines. They cover the three
columns of AF points at the viewfinder’s center. The center AF
point and the adjacent AF points at the top and bottom are
compatible with f/8 or larger maximum-aperture lenses.
These focusing sensors are geared for f/5.6 or larger maximum
aperture lenses. Since they have a vertical pattern, they can
detect horizontal lines. They cover all 61 AF points. The center
AF point and the adjacent AF points on the left and on the right
are compatible with f/8 or larger maximum-aperture lenses.
99
Lenses and Usable AF Points
 Although the camera has 61 AF points, the number of usable AF
points and focusing patterns will differ depending on the lens. The
lenses are thereby classified into nine groups from A to I.
 When using a lens in Groups F to H, fewer AF points will be usable.
 See which group each lens belongs to on pages 105-108. Check
which group the lens in use belongs to.
 When you press the <S> button, the AF points indicated by the mark
will blink. (The / / AF points will stay lit.) Regarding lighting up or
blinking of the AF points, see page 94.
 Regarding new lenses marketed after the EOS 5DS/EOS 5DS R (in the
first half of 2015), check the Canon website to see which group they
belong to.
 Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions.
Group A
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Dual cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and the focusing
precision is higher than with other AF
points.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
100
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group B
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Dual cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and the focusing
precision is higher than with other AF
points.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
Group C
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
101
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group D
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Dual cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and the focusing
precision is higher than with other AF
points.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
Group E
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
102
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group F
Autofocusing with only 47 points is possible. (Not possible with all 61
AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During
automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area
(Area AF frame) will be different from 61-point automatic selection AF.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
Group G
Autofocusing with only 33 points is possible. (Not possible with all 61
AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During
automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area
(Area AF frame) will be different from 61-point automatic selection AF.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
103
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group H
AF is possible with the center AF point and the adjacent AF points above,
below, on the left, and on the right. Only the following AF area selection
modes are selectable: Single-point AF (manual selection), Single-point Spot
AF (manual selection), and AF point expansion (manual selection ).
If an Extender is attached to the lens and the maximum aperture is f/8
(between f/5.6 and f/8), AF will be possible.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to vertical lines
(top and bottom AF points adjacent
to the center AF point) or horizontal
lines (left and right AF points
adjacent to the center AF point).
Not manually selectable. It works
only when “AF point expansion
(manual selection )” is selected.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
 If the maximum aperture is smaller than f/5.6 (maximum aperture
number is between f/5.6 and f/8), focus may not be achieved with AF
when shooting low-contrast or low-light subjects.
 When Extender EF2x is attached to the EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
lens, AF is not possible.
 If the maximum aperture is smaller than f/8 (maximum aperture number
exceeds f/8), AF is not possible during viewfinder shooting.
Group I
Autofocusing with 61 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal lines.
104
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Lens Group Designations
EF14mm f/2.8L USM
EF14mm f/2.8L II USM
EF15mm f/2.8 Fisheye
EF20mm f/2.8 USM
EF24mm f/1.4L USM
EF24mm f/1.4L II USM
EF24mm f/2.8
EF24mm f/2.8 IS USM
EF28mm f/1.8 USM
EF28mm f/2.8
EF28mm f/2.8 IS USM
EF35mm f/1.4L USM
EF35mm f/1.4L II USM
EF35mm f/2
EF35mm f/2 IS USM
EF40mm f/2.8 STM
EF50mm f/1.0L USM
EF50mm f/1.2L USM
EF50mm f/1.4 USM
EF50mm f/1.8
EF50mm f/1.8 II
EF50mm f/1.8 STM
EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro
EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro
+ LIFE SIZE Converter
EF85mm f/1.2L USM
EF85mm f/1.2L II USM
EF85mm f/1.4L IS USM
EF85mm f/1.8 USM
EF100mm f/2 USM
EF100mm f/2.8 Macro
EF100mm f/2.8 Macro USM
EF100mm f/2.8L Macro IS USM
EF135mm f/2L USM
EF135mm f/2L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF135mm f/2L USM + Extender EF2x
EF135mm f/2.8 (Softfocus)
EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
B
B
B
B
A
A
B
B
A
D
B
A
A
A
A
D
A
A
A
A
A
A
C
E
A
A
A
A
A
C
E
C
A
A
C
A
G
G
A
A*
EF200mm f/1.8L USM + Extender EF2x C*
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
A
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
A
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
C
+ Extender EF2x
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
A
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
C
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
E
+ Extender EF2x
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
A
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
C
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
E
+ Extender EF2x
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
A
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
C*
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
E*
+ Extender EF2x
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
A
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
C
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
E
+ Extender EF2x
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
A
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
C
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
E
+ Extender EF2x
EF300mm f/4L USM
C
EF300mm f/4L USM
E
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF300mm f/4L USM + Extender EF2x H (f/8)
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
C
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
E
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
H (f/8)
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
A
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
C*
+ Extender EF1.4x
105
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/5.6L USM
EF400mm f/5.6L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF600mm f/4L USM
EF600mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
106
E*
EF600mm f/4L USM + Extender EF2x
A
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM
EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF8-15mm f/4L Fisheye USM
EF11-24mm f/4L USM
EF16-35mm f/2.8L USM
EF16-35mm f/2.8L II USM
EF16-35mm f/2.8L III USM
EF16-35mm f/4L IS USM
EF17-35mm f/2.8L USM
EF17-40mm f/4L USM
EF20-35mm f/2.8L
EF20-35mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF22-55mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF24-70mm f/2.8L USM
EF24-70mm f/2.8L II USM
EF24-70mm f/4L IS USM
EF24-85mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM
EF24-105mm f/4L IS II USM
EF28-70mm f/2.8L USM
EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5
EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 II
EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 III USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 IV USM
C*
E*
A
C
E
A
C
E
C
E
H (f/8)
C
E
H (f/8)
E
H (f/8)
C
E
H (f/8)
C
E
H (f/8)
E
H
(f/8)*
C
E*
H
(f/8)*
C
E
H (f/8)
C
E
H (f/8)
F
H (f/8)
G
H
(f/8)*
C
I
A
A
A
C
A
C
A
E
F
B
A
C
E
E
C
C
A
F
F
C
F
F
F
F
F
F
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 V USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 III
EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 II USM
EF28-105mm f/4-5.6
EF28-105mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6
EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6 USM
EF28-300mm f/3.5-5.6L IS USM
EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5A
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 PZ
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 II
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 III
EF35-105mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF35-135mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-135mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF35-350mm f/3.5-5.6L USM
EF38-76mm f/4.5-5.6
EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5
EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5L
EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
F
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
F
F
E
E
E
E
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
E
H
H
E
E
F
E
E
E
E
E
A
C*
E*
A
C
E
A
C
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF70-210mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF70-210mm f/4
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS II USM
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6L IS USM
EF70-300mm f/4.5-5.6 DO IS USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM
EF80-200mm f/2.8L
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II
EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6
EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF100-200mm f/4.5A
EF100-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF100-300mm f/5.6
EF100-300mm f/5.6L
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x: With built-in Ext. 1.4x
E
C
E
H (f/8)
C
E
H (f/8)
E
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
A
E
F
F
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
H (f/8)
E
H (f/8)
I
E
107
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
E
1.4x + Extender EF1.4x
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x: With built-in Ext. 1.4x
H (f/8)
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
H (f/8)
1.4x + Extender EF2x
TS-E17mm f/4L
C
TS-E24mm f/3.5L
C
TS-E24mm f/3.5L II
C
TS-E45mm f/2.8
A
TS-E50mm f/2.8L Macro
C
TS-E90mm f/2.8
A
TS-E90mm f/2.8L Macro
C
TS-E135mm f/4L Macro
C
When using a lens and an extender in the combination marked with *,
precise focus may not be achieved with AF. Refer to the instruction manual
of the lens or extender used.
 Both “Extender EF1.4x” and “Extender EF2x” apply to all the I/II/III
models (under this grouping).
 If you use a TS-E lens, manual focusing will be required. The lens group
designation of TS-E lenses applies only when you do not use tilt or shift
function.
108
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
You can easily fine-tune AI Servo AF to suit a particular subject or
shooting scene just by selecting an option from case 1 to case 6. This
feature is called the “AF Configuration Tool.”
1 Select the [21] tab.
a case.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select a case
icon, then press <0>.
 The selected case will be set. The
selected case is indicated in blue.
Case 1 to 6
As explained on pages 114 to 116, case 1 to 6 are six setting
combinations of “Tracking sensitivity”, “Acceleration/deceleration
tracking”, and “AF point auto switching”. Refer to the table below to
select the case applicable to the subject or shooting scene.
Case
Icon
Applicable Subjects
Page
Case 1
Versatile multi purpose
setting
Description
For any moving subject.
110
Case 2
Continue to track subjects,
ignoring possible obstacles
Tennis players, butterfly
swimmers, freestyle
skiers, etc.
110
Case 3
Instantly focus on subjects
suddenly entering AF points
Starting line of a bicycle
race, alpine downhill
skiers, etc.
111
Case 4
For subjects that accelerate
or decelerate quickly
Soccer, motor sports,
basketball, etc.
111
Case 5
For erratic subjects moving
quickly in any direction
Figure skaters, etc.
112
Case 6
For subjects that change
speed and move erratically
Rhythm gymnastics, etc.
113
109
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Case 1: Versatile multi purpose setting
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
• AF pt auto switching: 0
Standard setting suited for any moving
subject. Works with many subjects and
scenes.
Select [Case 2] to [Case 6] for the
following: When an obstacle cuts across
the AF points or the subject tends to
stray from the AF points, when you want
to focus on a subject appearing
suddenly, when the speed of a moving
subject changes suddenly, or when the
subject dramatically moves horizontally
or vertically.
Case 2: Continue to track subjects, ignoring possible obstacles
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: Locked on: -1
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
• AF pt auto switching: 0
The camera will try to continue focusing
on the subject even if an obstacle enters
the AF points or if the subject strays from
the AF points. Effective when there may
be an obstacle blocking the subject or
when you do not want to focus on the
background.
If an obstacle gets in the way or if the subject moves away from the AF
points for a prolonged period and the default setting is unable to track the
target subject, setting [Tracking sensitivity] to [-2] may give better results
(p.114).
110
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Case 3: Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering AF points
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: Responsive: +1
• Accel./decel. tracking: +1
• AF pt auto switching: 0
Once an AF point starts tracking the
subject, this setting enables the camera
to consecutively focus on subjects at
different distances. If a new subject
appears in front of the target subject, the
camera will start focusing on the new
subject. Also effective when you want to
always focus on the closest subject.
If you want to quickly focus on a subject appearing suddenly, setting
[Tracking sensitivity] to [+2] may give better results (p.114).
Case 4: For subjects that accelerate or decelerate quickly
Geared for tracking moving subjects
whose speed can change dramatically
and suddenly.
Effective for subjects having sudden
movements, sudden acceleration,
sudden deceleration, or sudden stops.
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: +1
• AF pt auto switching: 0
If the subject is in motion, and prone to sudden, dramatic changes in speed,
setting [Accel./decel. tracking] to [+2] may give better results (p.115).
111
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Case 5: For erratic subjects moving quickly in any direction
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
• AF pt auto switching: +1
Even if the target subject moves
dramatically up, down, left, or right, the
AF point will switch automatically to
focus-track the subject. Effective for
shooting subjects that move dramatically
up, down, left, or right.
It is recommended to use this setting
with the following modes; AF point
expansion (manual selection
), AF
point expansion (manual selection,
surrounding points), Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), and 61-point
automatic selection AF.
With Single-point Spot AF (manual
selection) or Single-point AF (manual
selection) mode, the tracking action will
be the same as with Case 1.
If the subject moves even more dramatically up, down, left, or right, setting
[AF pt auto switching] to [+2] may give better results (p.116).
112
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Case 6: For subjects that change speed and move erratically
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: +1
• AF pt auto switching: +1
Geared for tracking moving subjects
whose speed can change dramatically
and suddenly. Also, if the target subject
moves dramatically up, down, left or right
and it is difficult to focus, the AF point
switches automatically to track the
subject.
It is recommended to use this setting
with the following modes; AF point
expansion (manual selection
), AF
point expansion (manual selection,
surrounding points), Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), and 61-point
automatic selection AF.
With Single-point Spot AF (manual
selection) or Single-point AF (manual
selection) mode, the tracking action will
be the same as with Case 4.
 If the subject is in motion, and prone to sudden, dramatic changes in
speed, setting [Accel./decel. tracking] to [+2] may give better results
(p.115).
 If the subject moves even more dramatically up, down, left, or right,
setting [AF pt auto switching] to [+2] may give better results (p.116).
113
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Parameters
 Tracking sensitivity
Sets the subject-tracking sensitivity
during AI Servo AF when an obstacle
enters the AF points or when the AF
points stray from the subject.
0
Default setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general.
Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1
The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an
obstacle enters the AF points or if the subject strays from the AF
points. The -2 setting makes the camera track the target subject
longer than with the -1 setting.
However, if the camera focuses on a wrong subject, it may take
slightly longer to switch and focus on the target subject.
Responsive: +2 / Responsive: +1
The camera can focus consecutively on subjects at different
distances that are covered by the AF points. Also effective when you
want to always focus on the closest subject. The +2 setting is more
responsive when focusing on the next subject than +1.
However, the camera will be more prone to focus on the wrong
subject.
[Tracking sensitivity] is the feature named [AI Servo tracking sensitivity]
in the EOS-1D Mark III/IV, EOS-1Ds Mark III, and EOS 7D.
114
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
 Acceleration/deceleration tracking
This sets the tracking sensitivity for
moving subjects whose speed can
suddenly change dramatically by starting
or stopping suddenly, etc.
0
Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minimal change in
moving speed).
+2 / +1
Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden
acceleration/deceleration, or sudden stops. Even if the moving
subject’s speed suddenly changes dramatically, the camera
continues to focus on the target subject. For example, for an
approaching subject, the camera becomes less prone to focus
behind it to avoid subject blur. For a subject stopping suddenly, the
camera becomes less prone to focus in front of it. Setting +2 can
track dramatic changes in the moving subject’s speed better than
with +1.
However, since the camera will be sensitive even to the slight
movements of the subject, the focusing may momentarily become
unstable.
115
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
 AF point auto switching
This sets the switching sensitivity of the
AF points as they track the subject
moving dramatically up, down, left, or
right.
This setting takes effect when the AF
area selection mode is set to AF point
expansion (manual selection
), AF
point expansion (manual selection,
surrounding points), Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), or 61-point automatic
selection AF.
0
Standard setting for gradual AF point switching.
+2 / +1
Even if the target subject moves dramatically up, down, left, or right
and moves away from the AF point, the camera switches its focus to
neighboring AF points to continue focusing on the subject. The
camera switches to the AF point deemed most likely to focus on the
subject based on the subject’s continual movement, contrast, etc.
Setting +2 makes the camera more prone to switch the AF point
than with +1.
However, with a wide-angle lens having a wide depth of field or if the
subject is too small in the frame, the camera may focus with the
wrong AF point.
116
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Changing Cases’ Parameter Settings
You can manually adjust each case’s three parameters: 1. Tracking
sensitivity, 2. Acceleration/deceleration tracking, and 3. AF point auto
switching.
1
Select a case.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the icon
of the case you want to adjust.
the <c> button.
2 Press
 The selected parameter will have a
purple frame.
the parameter to adjust.
3 Select
 Select the parameter to adjust, then
press <0>.
 When Tracking sensitivity is selected,
the setting screen will appear.
the adjustment.
4 Make
 Adjust the setting, then press <0>.
 The adjustment is saved.
 The default setting is indicated by the
light gray [C] mark.
 To return to the screen in step 1,
press the <c> button.
 In step 2, if you press the <c> button and then press the <L>
button, you can revert the 1, 2 and 3 parameter settings above for each
case.
 You can also register the 1, 2, and 3 parameter settings to My Menu
(p.432). Doing so will change the selected case’s settings.
 When shooting with a case whose parameters you adjusted, select the
adjusted case and then take the picture.
117
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
With the [22] to [25] menu tabs, you
can set the AF functions to suit your
shooting style or subject.
22: AI Servo
AI Servo 1st image priority
You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing
for the first shot with AI Servo AF.
: Equal priority
Equal priority is given to focusing and
shutter release.
: Release priority
Pressing the shutter button takes the
picture immediately even if focus has
not been achieved. It is effective when
you want to give priority to capturing
the image rather than achieving focus.
: Focus priority
Pressing the shutter button does not take the picture until focus is
achieved. Effective when you want to achieve focus before capturing
the image.
118
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AI Servo 2nd image priority
You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing
during continuous shooting after the first shot with AI Servo AF.
: Equal priority
Equal priority is given to focusing and
continuous shooting speed. In low
light or with low-contrast subjects,
shooting speed may slow down.
: Shooting speed priority
Priority is given to the continuous shooting speed instead of
achieving focus.
: Focus priority
Priority is given to achieving focus instead of the continuous
shooting speed. The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved.
Under shooting conditions which activate anti-flicker shooting (p.191), even
if [Shooting speed priority] is set, the continuous shooting speed may
become slightly slower or the shooting interval may become irregular.
119
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
23: One Shot
Lens electronic MF
With the following USM and STM lenses equipped with an electronic
manual focusing function, you can set whether to use electronic manual
focusing.
EF50mm f/1.0L USM
EF85mm f/1.2L USM
EF85mm f/1.2L II USM
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
EF600mm f/4L USM
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS II USM
EF40mm f/2.8 STM
EF50mm f/1.8 STM
EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
: Enable after One-Shot AF
After AF operates, if you keep
pressing the shutter button halfway,
you can adjust the focus manually.
: Disable after One-Shot AF
After AF operates, manual focusing
adjustment is disabled.
OFF: Disable in AF mode
When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>, manual focusing
is disabled.
120
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AF-assist beam firing
Enables or disables the AF-assist beam from the EOS-dedicated
external Speedlite.
ON: Enable
The external Speedlite emits the AFassist beam when necessary.
OFF: Disable
The external Speedlite will not emit
the AF-assist beam. Prevents the AFassist beam from disturbing others.
IR: IR AF assist beam only
When an external Speedlite is attached, only the infrared AF-assist
beam will be emitted. This prevents the AF-assist light from firing as
a burst of small flashes.
With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED
light will not automatically turn on for AF-assist.
If an external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set to
[Disabled], the Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam regardless of this
setting.
121
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
One-Shot AF release priority
You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing
for One-Shot AF.
: Focus priority
The picture will not be taken until
focus is achieved. Effective when you
want to achieve focus before
capturing the shot.
: Release priority
Priority is given to the timing of
shutter release instead of achieving
focus. This gives priority to capturing
the image rather than achieving
correct focus.
Note that the picture will be taken
even if focus has not been
achieved.
122
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
24
Lens drive when AF impossible
If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, you can have the camera
keep searching for the correct focus or have it stop searching.
ON: Continue focus search
If focus cannot be achieved with
autofocus, the lens is driven to search
for the correct focus.
OFF: Stop focus search
If autofocus starts and the focus is far
off or if focus cannot be achieved, the
lens drive will not be performed. This
prevents the lens from becoming
grossly out of focus due to focus
searching.
Super telephoto lenses, etc., with a wide focusing drive range can become
grossly out of focus during focus search, taking more time to achieve focus
next time. Setting [Stop focus search] is recommended.
123
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
Selectable AF point
You can change the number of manually selectable AF points. If 61point automatic selection AF is set, the Area AF frame (entire AF area)
will be used for AF regardless of the setting below.
: 61 points
All AF points will be manually
selectable.
: Only cross-type AF points
Only cross-type AF points will be
manually selectable. The number of
selectable cross-type AF points will
differ depending on the lens.
: 15 points
Fifteen major AF points will be
manually selectable.
: 9 points
Nine major AF points will be manually
selectable.
With a lens from Groups F to H (p.103-104), the number of manually
selectable AF points will be fewer.
 Even with settings other than [61 points], AF point expansion (manual
selection ), AF point expansion (manual selection, surrounding points)
and Zone AF (manual selection of zone) are still possible.
 When you press the <S> button, the AF points which are not manually
selectable will not be displayed in the viewfinder.
124
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
Select AF area selection mode
You can limit the selectable AF area selection modes to suit your
shooting preferences. Select the desired selection mode and press
<0> to append a checkmark <X>. Then select [OK] to register the
setting.
: Manual select.:Spot AF
For pinpoint focusing with a narrower
area than single-point AF (manual
selection).
: Manual selection:1 pt AF
One of the AF points set by
[Selectable AF point] setting can be
selected.
: Expand AF area:
The camera will focus with the manually-selected AF point and the
adjacent AF points (above, below, on the left, and on the right).
: Expand AF area:Surround
The camera will focus with the manually-selected AF point and the
surrounding AF points.
: Manual select.:Zone AF
The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing.
: Auto selection:61 pt AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used for focusing.
 The <X> mark cannot be removed from [Manual selection:1 pt AF].
 If the attached lens belongs to group H (p.104), you can only select
[Manual select.:Spot AF], [Manual selection:1 pt AF], and [Expand
AF area: ].
125
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AF area selection method
You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode.
9 M-Fn button
After you press the <S> button,
pressing the <B> button, the AF
area selection mode changes.
9 Main Dial
After you press the <S> button,
turning the <6> dial changes the
AF area selection mode.
When [S 9 Main Dial] is set, use the <9> to move the AF point
horizontally.
Orientation linked AF point
You can set the AF point or the AF area selection mode + AF point
separately for vertical shooting and horizontal shooting.
: Same for both vert/horiz
The same AF area selection mode
and manually-selected AF point (or
zone) are used for both vertical
shooting and horizontal shooting.
126
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
: Separate AF pts: Area+pt
The AF area selection mode and AF point (or zone) can be set
separately for each camera orientation (1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with
the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical with the camera grip at the
bottom).
When you manually select the AF area selection mode and AF point (or
zone) for each of the three camera orientations, they will be set for the
respective orientation. Whenever you change the camera orientation
during shooting, the camera will switch to the AF area selection mode
and manually-selected AF point (or zone) set for that orientation.
: Separate AF pts: Pt only
The AF point can be set separately for each camera orientation
(1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical
with the camera grip at the bottom). While using the same AF area
selection mode, the AF point will switch automatically for the
respective camera orientation.
When you manually select the AF point for each of the three camera
orientations, it will be recorded for the respective orientation. During
shooting, the manually-selected AF point will switch to match the
respective camera orientation. Even if you change the AF area
selection mode to Manual select.:Spot AF, Manual selection:1 pt AF,
Expand AF area: , or Expand AF area:Surround, the AF point set
for the respective orientation will be retained.
If you change the AF area selection mode to Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), the zone will switch to match the respective
camera orientation.
 If you clear the camera settings to their defaults (p.70), the setting will be
[Same for both vert/horiz]. Also, your settings for the three camera
orientations (1, 2 and 3) will be cleared and all three will revert to Singlepoint AF (Manual selection) with the center AF point selected.
 If you set this and later attach a lens from a different AF group (p.100104, particularly Group H), the setting may be cleared.
127
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
Initial AF Point,
AI Servo AF
You can set the AI Servo AF’s starting AF point for when the AF area
selection mode is set to Auto selection: 61 pt AF.
: Initial
AF pt selected
AI Servo AF will start with the
manually-selected AF point when the
AF operation is set to AI Servo AF
and the AF area selection mode is set
to Auto selection: 61 pt AF.
: Manual
AF pt
If you switch from Manual select.:Spot AF, Manual selection:1 pt AF,
Expand AF area: , or Expand AF area:Surround to Auto selection:
61 pt AF, AI Servo AF will start with the AF point that was manually
selected before the switch. Convenient if you want AI Servo AF to
start with the AF point which was selected before the AF area
selection mode was switched to Auto selection: 61 pt AF.
After you set the AF area selection mode to Auto selection: 61 pt AF
with the [83: Custom Controls] menu’s [Metering and AF start]
(p.418), [Switch to registered AF func.] (p.420), or [Register/
recall shooting func] (p.425), you can press the assigned button
during Manual select: Spot AF, Manual selection: 1 pt AF, Expand
AF area: , or Expand AF area: Surround to switch to AI Servo AF
using Auto selection: 61 pt AF instead of the AF point used
immediately before.
AUTO: Auto
The AF point which AI Servo AF starts with is set automatically to
suit the shooting conditions.
When [Manual
AF pt] is set, AI Servo AF will start with the zone
that corresponds to the manually selected AF point, even if you switch AF
area selection mode to Zone AF (manual selection of zone).
128
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
Auto AF point selection: EOS iTR AF
EOS iTR* AF executes autofocus by recognizing faces and subject
colors. EOS iTR AF works when the AF area selection mode is set to
61-point automatic selection AF or Zone AF (manual selection of zone).
* intelligent Tracking and Recognition: The function that the metering sensor
identifies the subject to make the AF points tracking it.
ON: Enable
The AF point is automatically
selected based not only on AF
information, but also faces and other
details.
In AI Servo AF mode, the camera remembers the color at the position
it focused on first, then continues to track and focus on the subject by
switching AF points to track that color. This makes it easier to keep
track of the subject than when only AF information is available.
In One-Shot AF mode, EOS iTR AF makes focusing on people
easier, so you can perform shooting with priority on composition.
OFF: Disable
AF points are automatically selected based only on AF information.
(The AF will not use information about faces, subject colors and
other details.)
 If [Enable] is set, the camera may take longer to focus than when
[Disable] is set.
 Even if you set [Enable], expected result may not be obtained depending
on the shooting conditions and subject.
 Under light so low that the EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite emits the
AF-assist beam automatically, AF points are selected automatically
based only on AF information.
 Face detection may not work if the face is small or under low-light
conditions.
129
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
25
Manual AF point selection pattern
During manual AF point selection, the selection can either stop at the
outer edge or it can cycle around to the opposite side. This function
works in AF area selection modes other than Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), and 61-point automatic selection AF (works with AI
Servo AF).
: Stops at AF area edges
Convenient if you often use an AF
point at the periphery.
: Continuous
Instead of stopping at the outer edge,
the selection of AF point continues to
the opposite side.
130
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AF point display during focus
You can set whether or not to display the AF point(s) in the following
cases: 1. When selecting the AF point(s), 2. When the camera is ready
to shoot (before AF operation), 3. During AF operation, and 4. When
focus is achieved.
: Selected (constant)
The selected AF point(s) is always
displayed.
: All (constant)
All AF points are always displayed.
: Selected (pre-AF, focused)
The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1, 2, and 4.
: Selected (focused)
The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1 and 4 and for when AF
starts.
OFF: Disable display
For 2, 3, and 4, the selected AF point(s) will not be displayed.
131
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
VF display illumination
You can set whether the AF points in the viewfinder are to light up in red
when focus is achieved.
AUTO: Auto
The AF points automatically light up
in red under low light.
ON: Enable
The AF points light up in red
regardless of the ambient light level.
OFF: Disable
The AF points do not light up in red.
With [Auto] or [Enable] set, you can set whether the AF point lights up
in red (blink) when you press the <Q> button during AI Servo AF.
OFF: Non illuminated
The AF point will not light up during AI
Servo AF.
ON: Illuminated
AF points used for focusing light up in
red during AI Servo AF. This will not
work if [VF display illumination] is
set to [Disable].
 When you press the <S> button, the AF points will light up in red
regardless of this setting.
 The electronic level and grid in the viewfinder and the information set
with [Show/hide in viewfinder] (p.77) will also light up in red.
132
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AF Microadjustment
You can make fine adjustments for the AF’s point of focus. For details,
see “Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus” on the next page.
133
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Fine adjustment of the AF’s point of focus is possible for viewfinder
shooting. This is called “AF Microadjustment”. Before making the
adjustment, read “General Cautions for AF Microadjustment” on page
139.
Cautions for AF Microadjustment
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Perform this adjustment
only if necessary. Note that performing this adjustment may prevent
accurate focusing from being achieved.
Adjust All by Same Amount
Set the adjustment manually by adjusting, shooting, and checking the
result. Repeat this until appropriate adjustment is made. During AF,
regardless of the lens used, the point of focus will always be shifted by
the adjustment amount.
1
Select [AF Microadjustment].
 Under the [25] tab, select [AF
Microadjustment], then press <0>.
2 Select [All by same amount].
the <B> button.
3 Press
 The [All by same amount] screen
will appear.
134
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
the adjustment.
4 Make
 Set the adjustment amount. The
adjustable range is ±20 steps.
 Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the
point of focus in front of the standard
point of focus.
 Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the
point of focus to the rear of the
standard point of focus.
 After making the adjustment, press
<0>.
 Select [All by same amount], then
press <0>.
the result of the
5 Check
adjustment.
 Take a picture and play back the
image (p.320) to check the
adjustment result.
 If the shooting result comes out with
focus in front of the targeted point,
adjust toward the “+: ” side. If it
comes out with focus behind the
targeted point, adjust toward the
“-: ” side.
 If necessary, repeat the adjustment.
If [All by same amount] is selected, separate AF adjustment will not be
possible for the wide-angle and telephoto ends of zoom lenses.
135
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Adjust by Lens
You can make the adjustment for each lens and register the adjustment
in the camera. You can register the adjustment for up to 40 lenses.
When you autofocus with a lens whose adjustment is registered, the
point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.
Set the adjustment manually by adjusting, shooting, and checking the
result. Repeat this until the desired adjustment is made. If you use a zoom
lens, make the adjustment for the wide-angle (W) and telephoto (T) ends.
1
Select [Adjust by lens].
the <B> button.
2 Press
 The [Adjust by lens] screen will
appear.
and change the lens
3 Check
information.
Registered number
136
Checking the Lens Information
 Press the <B> button.
 The screen will show the lens name
and a 10-digit serial number. When
the serial number is displayed, select
[OK] and go to step 4.
 If the lens’s serial number cannot be
confirmed, “0000000000” will be
displayed. In this case, enter the
number by following the instructions
on the next page.
 Regarding the asterisk “ * ” displayed
in front of some lens serial numbers,
see the next page.
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Entering the Serial Number
 Select the digit to be entered, then
press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Enter the number, then press <0>.
 After entering all the digits, select
[OK].
Lens Serial Number
 In step 3, if “ * ” appears in front of the 10-digit lens serial
number, you can register only one unit of the same lens model.
Even if you enter the serial number, “ * ” will remain displayed.
 The serial number on the lens may differ from the serial number
displayed on the screen in step 3. This is not a malfunction.
 If the lens serial number includes letters, enter only the numbers.
 If the lens serial number is eleven digits or longer, enter only the last
ten digits.
 The location of the serial number varies depending on the lens.
 Some lenses may not have a serial number inscribed. To register a
lens that has no serial number inscribed, enter any serial number.
 If [Adjust by lens] is selected and an Extender is used, the adjustment
will be registered for the lens and Extender combination.
 If 40 lenses have already been registered, a message will appear. After
you select a lens whose registration is to be erased (overwritten), you
can register another lens.
137
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Single focal length lens
the adjustment.
4 Make
 For a zoom lens, select the wide-angle

Zoom lens





(W) or telephoto (T) end. Pressing
<0> will turn off the purple frame and
make the adjustment possible.
Set the adjustment amount, then
press <0>. The adjustable range is
±20 steps.
Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the
point of focus in front of the standard
point of focus.
Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the
point of focus to the rear of the
standard point of focus.
For a zoom lens, repeat this
procedure and adjust it for the wideangle (W) and telephoto (T) ends.
After completing the adjustment,
press the <M> button to return to
the screen in step 1.
Select [Adjust by lens], then press
<0>.
the result of the adjustment.
5 Check
 Take a picture and play back the
image (p.320) to check the
adjustment result.
 If the shooting result comes out with
focus in front of the targeted point,
adjust toward the “+: ” side. If it
comes out with focus behind the
targeted point, adjust toward the
“-: ” side.
 If necessary, repeat the adjustment.
138
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
When shooting with the intermediate range (focal length) of a zoom lens, the
AF’s point of focus is corrected automatically relative to the adjustments
made for the wide-angle and telephoto ends. Even if only the wide-angle or
telephoto end is adjusted, a correction will be made automatically for the
intermediate range.
Clearing All AF Microadjustments
When [ Clear all] appears at the bottom of the screen, pressing the
<L> button will clear all the adjustments made for [All by same
amount] and [Adjust by lens].
General Cautions for AF Microadjustment
 The AF’s point of focus will vary slightly depending on the subject
conditions, brightness, zoom position, and other shooting conditions.
Therefore, even if you perform AF Microadjustment, focus may still not
be achieved at the suitable position.
 The adjustment amount of one stop varies depending on the maximum
aperture of the lens. Keep adjusting, shooting, and checking the focus
repeatedly to adjust the AF’s point of focus.
 The adjustment will not be applied to AF during Live View shooting or
movie shooting.
 The adjustments will be retained even if you clear all the camera settings
(p.70). However, the setting itself will be [Disable].
Notes for AF Microadjustment
 It is best to make the adjustment at the actual location where you will
shoot. This will make the adjustment more precise.
 Using a tripod when making the adjustment is recommended.
 For making adjustments, shooting at the 73 image-recording quality is
recommended.
139
When Autofocus Fails
Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (viewfinder’s focus indicator <o>
blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:
Subjects Difficult to Focus
 Subjects with very low contrast
(Example: Blue skies, solid-color flat surfaces, etc.)
 Subjects in very low light
 Strongly backlit or reflective subjects
(Example: Cars with highly reflective bodies, etc.)
 Near and distant subjects framed close to an AF point
(Example: Animals in cages, etc.)
 Subjects such as dots of light framed close to an AF point
(Example: Night scenes, etc.)
 Repetitive patterns
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)
In such cases, focus by doing either of the following:
(1) With One-Shot AF, focus on an object at the same distance as the
subject and lock the focus, then recompose the shot (p.83).
(2) Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually
(p.141).
 Depending on the subject, focus may be achieved by slightly
recomposing the shot and performing AF operation again.
 For conditions where AF can fail to achieve focus with [u+Tracking]/
[FlexiZone - Single] during Live View shooting or movie shooting, see
page 273.
140
When Autofocus Fails
MF: Manual Focus
1
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <MF>.
 <4 L> will be displayed on the
LCD panel.
Focusing ring
on the subject.
2 Focus
 Focus by turning the lens’s focusing
ring until the subject looks sharp in
the viewfinder.
 If you press the shutter button halfway while focusing manually, the focus
indicator <o> will light up when focus is achieved.
 With 61-point automatic selection AF, when the center AF point achieves
focus, the focus indicator <o> will light up.
141
o Selecting the Drive Mode
Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the
drive mode suiting the scene or subject.
1
Press the <o> button. (9)
the drive mode.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <5> dial.
u : Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will
be taken.
o: High-speed continuous shooting
While you hold down the shutter button completely, the camera
will shoot continuously at a maximum of approx. 5.0 shots/sec.
i : Low-speed continuous shooting
While you hold down the shutter button completely, the camera
will shoot continuously at a maximum of approx. 3.0 shots/sec.
B : Silent single shooting
Single shooting with less shooting sound than <u> during
viewfinder shooting.
M : Silent continuous shooting
Continuous shooting with less shooting sound than <i> during
viewfinder shooting. The camera will shoot continuously at a
maximum of approx. 3.0 shots/sec.
During Live View shooting and movie shooting, shooting will not be silent
even if <B> or <M> is set.
142
o Selecting the Drive Mode
Q : 10-sec. self-timer/remote control
k: 2-sec. self-timer/remote control
For self-timer shooting, see page 144. For remote control
shooting, see page 237.
 o: The maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 5.0 shots/sec.
is attained under the following conditions*: 1/500 sec. or faster shutter
speed, maximum aperture (varies depending on the lens), Anti-flicker
shooting set to Disable, with a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, and at
room temperature (23°C/73°F). The continuous shooting speed may
become slower depending on the shutter speed, aperture, subject
conditions, brightness, lens, flash use, temperature, battery type,
remaining battery level, etc.
* With the AF mode set to One-Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off
when using the following lenses: EF300mm f/4L IS USM, EF28-135mm f/3.55.6 IS USM, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM.
 In AI Servo AF operation, the continuous shooting speed may become
slower depending on the subject and the lens used.
 If you use Battery Pack LP-E6 and shoot in low temperatures (battery
temperature is low), the high-speed continuous shooting speed may
become slower.
 The continuous shooting speed may become slower if the remaining
battery level is low or if you shoot under low-light conditions.
 If you use Battery Grip BG-E11 (sold separately) with AA/R6 batteries,
the maximum continuous shooting speed will be approx. 3.0 fps for highspeed continuous shooting.
 If you set [z4: Anti-flicker shoot.] to [Enable] (p.191) and shoot under
a flickering light source, the continuous shooting speed may decrease
slightly, the shooting interval may become irregular, or the release
timelag may become longer.
 If <B> or <M> is set, the time lag from when you press the shutter
button completely until the picture is shot will be longer than standard.
 If the [51: Record func+card/folder sel.] menu’s [Record func.] is set
to [Rec. separately] (p.146) and the recording quality setting for the CF
card [f] and SD card [g] is different, the maximum burst (p.151) will
decrease.
 When internal memory becomes full during continuous shooting, the
continuous shooting speed may drop during shooting since shooting will
be temporally disabled (p.153).
143
j Using the Self-timer
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture.
1 Press the <o> button. (9)
the self-timer.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <5> dial.
Q : 10-sec. self-timer
k : 2-sec. self-timer
the picture.
3 Take
 Look through the viewfinder, focus on
the subject, then press the shutter
button completely.
 You can check the self-timer
operation with the self-timer lamp,
beeper, and countdown display (in
seconds) on the LCD panel.
 2 sec. before the picture is taken, the
self-timer lamp will light up and the
beeper will sound faster.
If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button,
attach the eyepiece cover (p.236). If stray light enters the viewfinder when
the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.
 The <k> enables you to shoot while not touching the camera
mounted on a tripod. This prevents camera shake when you shoot still
lifes or long exposures.
 After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.320) to check
focus and exposure is recommended.
 When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (p.83) on an
object at the same distance as where you will stand.
 To cancel the self-timer, press the <o> button.
144
4
Image Settings
This chapter explains image-related function settings:
Image-recording quality, Crop/aspect, ISO speed,
Picture Style, white balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer,
noise reduction, highlight tone priority, lens aberration
correction, anti-flicker shooting, and other functions.
 A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a
function that can be used only in the following modes: <d>
<s> <f> <a> <F>.
145
3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback
If either a CF card or SD card is already inserted in the camera, you
can start recording captured images. When only one card is
inserted, you do not have to follow the procedures described on
pages 146-148.
If you insert both a CF card and SD card, you can select the recording
method and select which card to use for recording and playing back
images.
[f] indicates the CF card, and [g] the SD card.
Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted
1
Select [Record func+card/folder
sel.].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Record
func+card/folder sel.], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Record func.].
the recording method.
3 Select
 Select the recording method, then
press <0>.
146
3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback
 Standard
Images will be recorded to the card selected with [Record/play].
 Auto switch card
Same as with the [Standard] setting, but if the card becomes full,
the camera will automatically switch to the other card to record
images. When the card is automatically switched, a new folder will
be created.
 Rec. separately
You can set the image-recording quality for each card (p.149). Each
image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards at the imagerecording quality you set. You can freely set the image-recording
quality, such as to 73 and 1, or c and 41.
 Rec. to multiple
Each image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards simultaneously
at the same image size. You can also select RAW+JPEG.
 If [Rec. separately] is set and different recording qualities are set for the
CF card and SD card, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
decrease (p.151).
 Even if [Record func.] is set to [Rec. to multiple], movies cannot be
recorded to both the CF card and SD card at the same time. If [Rec.
separately] or [Rec. to multiple] is set, the movie will be recorded to the
card which is set for [Playback].
[Rec. separately] and [Rec. to multiple]
 The same file number is used for recording to both the CF card and SD
card.
 The LCD panel will display the number of possible shots of the card
having the lower number.
 If one of the cards becomes full, [Card* full] will be displayed and
shooting will be disabled. If this happens, either replace the card or set
[Record func.] to [Standard] or [Auto switch card], and select the card
with remaining capacity to continue shooting.
147
3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback
Selecting the CF or SD Card for Recording and Playback
If [Record func.] is set to [Standard] or [Auto switch card], select the
card for recording and playing back images.
If [Record func.] is set to [Rec. separately] or [Rec. to multiple],
select the card for playing back images.
Standard / Auto switch card
Select [Record/play].
 Select [Record/play], then press
<0>.
f : Record images to and play
images back from the CF
card.
g : Record images to and play
images back from the SD
card.
 Select the card, then press <0>.
Rec. separately / Rec. to multiple
Select [Playback].
 Select [Playback], then press <0>.
f : Play back the CF card’s
images.
g : Play back the SD card’s
images.
 Select the card, then press <0>.
For [Folder], see page 194.
148
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
You can select the pixel count and the image quality. There are ten
JPEG image-recording quality settings: 73, 83, 7K, 8K, 75,
85, 7a, 8a, b, c. There are three RAW image quality settings:
1, 41, 61 (p.152).
1
Standard / Auto switch
card / Rec. to multiple
Select [Image quality].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
quality], then press <0>.
the image-recording quality.
2 Select
 To select a RAW quality, turn the
<6> dial. To select a JPEG quality,
turn the <5> dial.
 On the upper right, the “**M
(megapixels) ****x****” number
indicates the recorded pixel count,
and [***] is the number of possible
shots (displayed up to 9999).
 Press <0> to set it.
Rec. separately
 Under [51: Record func+card/
folder sel.], if [Record func.] is set to
[Rec. separately], select CF card
[f] or SD card [g], then press
<0>.
 Select the desired image-recording
quality, then press <0>.
149
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Image-recording Quality Setting Examples
73 only
1 only
1+73
61+7K
The image size [****x****] and number of possible shots [****] displayed on
the Image-recording quality setting screen always apply to the [Full-frame]
setting regardless of the [z4: Crop/aspect ratio] setting (p.154). The
number of possible shots displayed on the LCD panel and Live View
shooting screen during shooting is based on the [z4: Crop/aspect ratio]
setting.
 If [–] is set for both RAW and JPEG, 73 will be set.
 The number of possible shots will be displayed up to 1999 on the LCD
panel.
150
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Guide to Image-Recording Quality Settings (Approx.)
Image
Quality
73
83
7K
8K
JPEG
75
Pixels
Recorded
Print
Size
50M
A1
39M
14.1
510
31 (510)
7.0
1030
1030 (1030)
10.9
660
45 (660)
5.5
1310
1310 (1310)
1010
1010 (1010)
2030
2030 (2030)
4.5
1590
1590 (1590)
2.3
3120
3120 (3120)
9x13 cm
1.2
5600
5600 (5600)
-
0.3
20380
20380 (20380)
12M
A3
b*1
2.5M
c*2
0.3M
1
8a
Maximum
Burst
7.1
A2
7a
Possible
Shots
3.5
22M
85
File Size
(MB)
50M
A1
60.5
100
12 (14)
RAW 41
28M
A2
44.0
140
12 (14)
61
12M
A3
29.8
190
14 (15)
1
73
50M
50M
A1
A1
60.5+14.1
87
12 (12)
28M
50M
A2
A1
44.0+14.1
110
11 (12)
12M
50M
A3
A1
29.8+14.1
140
14 (14)
RAW
41
+
73
JPEG
61
73
*1: b is suitable for playing back the images on a digital photo frame.
*2: c is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a website.
 b and c will be in 7 (Fine) quality.
 The file size, possible shots, and maximum burst during continuous shooting
are based on Canon’s testing standards (Crop/aspect ratio: Full-frame, ISO
100 and Standard Picture Style) using an 8 GB CF card. These figures will
vary by the subject, card brand, crop/aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture
Style, Custom Functions, and other settings.
 The maximum burst applies to <o> high-speed continuous shooting.
Figures in parentheses apply to an Ultra DMA (UDMA) 7 CF card, based on
Canon’s testing standards.
151
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
 Even if you use a UDMA card, the maximum burst indicator remains the
same. However, the maximum burst in parentheses on the preceding
page will be applied during continuous shooting.
 If you select both RAW and JPEG, the same image will be recorded
simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the imagerecording qualities that were set. The two images will be recorded with
the same file numbers (file extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for RAW).
 The image-recording quality icons are as follows: 1 (RAW), 41
(Medium RAW), 61 (Small RAW), JPEG (JPEG), 7 (Fine), 8
(Normal), 3 (Large), 4 (Medium), and 6 (Small).
RAW Images
A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to
digital data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the
quality as follows: 1, 41, or 61.
A 1 image can be processed with [31: RAW image processing]
(p.364) and saved as a JPEG image. (41 and 61 images cannot
be processed with the camera.) As the RAW image itself does not
change, you can process the RAW image according to different
processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.504) to
process RAW images. You can make various adjustments as desired
and generate a JPEG, TIFF, etc., image incorporating those
adjustments.
RAW Image Processing Software
 To display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional
(DPP, EOS software) is recommended.
 Previous DPP Ver.4.x cannot process RAW images taken with this
camera. If your computer has the previous DPP Ver.4.x, update it with
the EOS Solution Disk (p.504). (The previous version will be
overwritten.) Note that DPP Ver.3.x or earlier cannot process RAW
images taken with this camera.
 Commercially-available software may not be able to display RAW
images taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the
software manufacturer.
152
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
One-touch Image Quality Setting
With Custom Controls, you can assign the image-recording quality to
the <B> button or depth-of-field preview button so you can switch
to it momentarily. If you assign [One-touch image quality setting] or
[One-touch image quality (hold)] to the <B> button or depth-offield preview button, you can quickly switch to the desired imagerecording quality and shoot.
For details, see Custom Controls (p.413).
Under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.], if [Record func.] is set to [Rec.
separately], you cannot switch to the One-touch image quality setting.
Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting
The approximate maximum burst is
displayed in the viewfinder, Quick
Control screen, and on the bottom right
of the Custom Quick Control screen.
If the maximum burst for continuous
shooting is 99 or higher, “99” will be
displayed.
The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the
camera. Make sure that a card is inserted before taking a picture.
If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99
or more shots continuously. If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or lower
and the internal buffer memory becomes full, “buSY” will be displayed in the
viewfinder and on the LCD panel. Shooting will then be disabled temporarily.
If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will increase. After all
the captured images are written to the card, you can resume continuous
shooting and shoot up to the maximum burst listed on page 151.
153
Setting Crop/Aspect RatioN
Normally, images are recorded at the sensor size of approx. 36.0 mm x
24.0 mm (full-frame shooting). You can record only the center of the
image magnified approx. 1.3x (equivalent to APS-H size) or approx.
1.6x (equivalent to APS-C size) as if you were using a telephoto lens
(crop shooting) or set the desired aspect ratio before you shoot.
1
Select [Crop/aspect ratio].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Crop/
aspect ratio], then press <0>.
the desired setting.
2 Select
Viewfinder shooting
 Select any of the following: [Fullframe], [1.3x (crop)], [1.6x (crop)], or
[1:1 (aspect ratio)].
 If you set [4:3 (aspect ratio)] or [16:9
(aspect ratio)] and use the
viewfinder to shoot, the shooting
result will be the same as with [Fullframe].
Live View shooting (p.256)
 You can select any setting.
 If you will not change the shooting
area display, press <0> and go to
step 4.
the shooting area display.
3 Select
 With the screen in step 2 displayed,
press the <B> button.
 Select either [Masked] or [Outlined],
then press <0>.
154
Setting Crop/Aspect RatioN
Example settings
With e•b
the picture.
4 Take
Viewfinder shooting
 The shooting area in the viewfinder
will be masked or have frame lines.
 The area surrounded by the semitransparent masking or frame lines
will be recorded as an image.
With f•c
With d
Live View shooting
 When [1.3x (crop)] or [1.6x (crop)] is
set, the displayed image will be
magnified by approx. 1.3x or 1.6x
respectively.
 Regardless of the [Shooting area]
setting, the area shown by the
displayed image will be recorded.
With g•b
 If you select [1:1 (aspect ratio)], [4:3
(aspect ratio)], or [16:9 (aspect
ratio)], the area surrounded by the
masking or frame lines will be
recorded as an image.
155
Setting Crop/Aspect RatioN
 The [z4: Crop/aspect ratio] setting does not work with movie shooting
and multiple exposures.
 The 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratios cannot be used with viewfinder shooting.
 [83: Add cropping information] can be set only when [Full-frame]
has been set for Crop/aspect ratio.
 An external Speedlite’s flash zoom (automatic flash coverage) will not
work in tandem with the [z4: Crop/aspect ratio] setting.
 The image coverage with viewfinder shooting will be as follows:
• With [1.3x (crop)]: Approx. 99% vertical/horizontal coverage.
• With [1.6x (crop)]: Approx. 98% vertical/horizontal coverage.
• With [1:1 (aspect ratio)]: Approx. 100% vertical and approx. 99%
horizontal coverage.
 When the image-recording quality is RAW, the image will be recorded in
full-frame and the Crop/aspect ratio setting will be appended. During
RAW image playback, the shooting area will be indicated by frame lines
on the full-frame display. However, in a slide show (p.348), only the
shooting area will appear.
 If you use [83: Custom Controls] to assign [Switch between crop/
aspect] to the <B> button (p.413), you can press the <B>
button during viewfinder shooting or Live View shooting to switch the
Crop/aspect ratio shooting area (p.423).
 During Live View shooting, you can use the Quick Control screen to set
[Crop/aspect ratio] (p.263).
156
Setting Crop/Aspect RatioN
Pixels Recorded in Crop/Aspect Ratio Settings
(Approx.)
Image Quality
Full-frame (3:2)
1.3x (crop)
1.6x (crop)
3
8688x5792
(50.3 megapixels)
6768x4512
(30.5 megapixels)
5424x3616
(19.6 megapixels)
K
7680x5120
(39.3 megapixels)
6016x4000*
(24.1 megapixels)
4800x3200
(15.4 megapixels)
5
5760x3840
(22.1 megapixels)
4512x3008
(13.6 megapixels)
3616x2408*
(8.7 megapixels)
a
4320x2880
(12.4 megapixels)
3376x2256*
(7.6 megapixels)
2704x1808*
(4.9 megapixels)
b
1920x1280
(2.5 megapixels)
1920x1280
(2.5 megapixels)
1920x1280
(2.5 megapixels)
c
720x480
(350,000 pixels)
720x480
(350,000 pixels)
720x480
(350,000 pixels)
Image Quality
1:1 (aspect ratio)
4:3 (aspect ratio)
16:9 (aspect ratio)
3
5792x5792
(33.5 megapixels)
7712x5792*
(44.7 megapixels)
8688x4888*
(42.5 megapixels)
K
5120x5120
(26.2 megapixels)
6816x5120*
(34.9 megapixels)
7680x4320
(33.2 megapixels)
5
3840x3840
(14.7 megapixels)
5120x3840
(19.7 megapixels)
5760x3240
(18.7 megapixels)
a
2880x2880
(8.3 megapixels)
3840x2880
(11.1 megapixels)
4320x2432*
(10.5 megapixels)
b
1280x1280
(1.6 megapixels)
1712x1280*
(2.2 megapixels)
1920x1080
(2.1 megapixels)
c
480x480
(230,000 pixels)
640x480
(310,000 pixels)
720x408*
(290,000 pixels)
(Approx.)
 The items marked with an asterisk do not exactly match the indicated
aspect ratio.
 For JPEG image file sizes, see the figures for full-frame shooting on page
370. The file size of an image taken with the [z4: Crop/aspect ratio]
set will be smaller than an identical image taken with [Full-frame] set.
 The file size and maximum burst of RAW images are the same as those
of full-frame shooting. See page 151.
157
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the
ambient light level. With the <A> mode selected, the ISO speed will
be set automatically (p.160).
Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting, see pages 283 and
287.
1
Press the <m> button. (9)
the ISO speed.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
 ISO speed can be set within ISO 100
- ISO 6400 in 1/3-stop increments.
 “A” indicates Auto ISO. The ISO
speed will be set automatically
(p.160).
ISO Speed Guide
ISO speed
Shooting Situation
(No flash)
L, ISO 100 - ISO 400
Sunny outdoors
ISO 400 - ISO 1600
Overcast skies or
evening time
ISO 1600 - ISO 6400, H
Dark indoors or night
* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.
158
Flash Range
The higher the ISO
speed, the farther the
flash range will be.
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
 As H (equivalent to ISO 12800) is an expanded ISO speed setting, noise
(dots of light, banding, etc.) and irregular colors will be more noticeable,
and the resolution lower than usual.
 As L (equivalent to ISO 50) is an expanded ISO speed setting, the
dynamic range will be somewhat narrower than usual.
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.187), L (equivalent
to ISO 50), ISO 100/125/160, and H (equivalent to ISO 12800) cannot be
selected.
 Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier.
Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.
 When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
 When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise,
such as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long
exposure, images may not be recorded properly.
 If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,
overexposure may result.
Under [z2: ISO speed settings], you can use [ISO speed range] to
expand the settable ISO speed range from L (equivalent to ISO 50) to H
(equivalent to ISO 12800) (p.161).
159
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
Auto ISO
If the ISO speed is set to “A” (Auto), the
actual ISO speed to be set will be
displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway.
As indicated below, the ISO speed will
be set automatically to suit the shooting
mode.
ISO Speed Setting
Shooting Mode
No Flash
A
d/s/f/a
ISO 100 - ISO 3200
F
ISO 400*1
ISO 100 - ISO 6400*1
With Flash
ISO 100 - ISO 1600
ISO 400*1*2*3
*1: The actual ISO speed range depends on the [Minimum] and [Maximum]
settings set in [Auto ISO range].
*2: If fill flash will cause overexposure, ISO speed may be reduced, down to a
possible minimum of ISO 100 (except in the <a> and <F> modes).
*3: In the <d> mode, if the external Speedlite is set for bounce flash, ISO 400 ISO 1600 will be set automatically.
160
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
3 Setting the Manually-Settable ISO Speed Range
You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and
maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within L (equivalent to
ISO 50) to ISO 6400, and the maximum limit within ISO 100 to H
(equivalent to ISO 12800).
1
Select [ISO speed settings].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [ISO
speed settings], then press <0>.
2 Select [ISO speed range].
the minimum limit.
3 Set
 Select the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
the maximum limit.
4 Set
 Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
5 Select [OK].
161
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
3 Setting the ISO Speed Range for Auto ISO
You can set the automatic ISO speed range for Auto ISO within ISO 100
- ISO 6400. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 - ISO 3200,
and the maximum limit within ISO 200 - ISO 6400 in 1-stop increments.
1
Select [Auto ISO range].
the minimum limit.
2 Set
 Select the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
the maximum limit.
3 Set
 Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
4 Select [OK].
The [Minimum] and [Maximum] settings will also be applied to the ISO
speed safety shift’s minimum and maximum ISO speeds (p.405).
162
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
3 Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for Auto ISO
You can set the minimum shutter speed so that the shutter speed set
automatically will not be too slow when Auto ISO is set.
This is convenient in the <d> and <f> modes when you use a wideangle lens to shoot a moving subject or when you use a telephoto lens.
It helps to reduce camera shake and blurred subjects.
1
Automatically set
Manually set
Select [Min. shutter spd.].
the desired minimum shutter
2 Set
speed.
 Select [Auto] or [Manual].
 If you select [Auto], turn the <6>
dial to set the desired speed, slower
or faster, compared to the standard
speed, then press <0>.
 If you select [Manual], turn the <6>
dial to select the shutter speed, then
press <0>.
 If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed
limit set with [Auto ISO range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min.
shutter spd.] will be set to obtain a standard exposure.
 This function will not be applied to flash and movie shooting.
When [Auto: 0] is set, the minimum shutter speed will be the reciprocal of
the lens focal length. A single step from [Slower] to [Faster] is equivalent to
a single shutter speed stop.
163
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics
matching your photographic expression or the subject.
The Picture Style is set automatically to [D] (Auto) in the <A>
mode.
1
Press the <b> button.
[A].
2 Select
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
a Picture Style.
3 Select
 The Picture Style will be set and the
camera will be ready to shoot.
You can also select the Picture Style with [z3: Picture Style].
164
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
Picture Style Characteristics
D Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The
colors will look vivid, especially for blue skies, greenery and sunsets,
and in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes.
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture
Style.
P Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.
Q Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up
portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (p.168), you can adjust the skin tone.
R Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.
Effective for impressive landscapes.
u Fine Detail
Suited for detailed outline and fine texture description of the subject.
The colors will be slightly vivid.
S Neutral
Suited for processing the image with a computer. For natural colors
and subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
165
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
U Faithful
Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a
subject that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K
will be adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. For
subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
V Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
Black-and-white images shot in JPEG cannot be turned into color. If you
want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure the [Monochrome] setting is
canceled.
You can display <z> in the viewfinder when [Monochrome] is set (p.409).
W User Def. 1-3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a
Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.172). Any User
Defined Picture Style that is not set will have the same settings as
the [Standard] Picture Style.
166
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
Symbols
The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness],
or [Threshold] of [Sharpness], [Contrast], and other parameters. The
numerals indicate the set values for these parameters as set by the
respective Picture Style.
Symbols
Sharpness
g
A
Strength
B
Fineness
C
Threshold
h
Contrast
i
Saturation
j
Color tone
k
Filter effect (Monochrome)
l
Toning effect (Monochrome)
[Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness] will not be applied to movies.
167
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
You can customize the Picture Styles. You can change or adjust the
parameter settings of Picture Styles such as [Strength], [Fineness], or
[Threshold] of [Sharpness], and [Contrast], and other parameters
from the default settings. To see the resulting effects, take test shots. To
customize [Monochrome], see page 171.
1 Press the <b> button.
[A].
2 Select
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
a Picture Style.
3 Select
 Select a Picture Style, then press
<B> button.
a parameter.
4 Select
 Select the parameter (such as
[Sharpness] - [Strength]) to be set,
then press <0>.
 The settings and effects are
explained on page 170.
168
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
the parameter.
5 Set
 Adjust the parameter as desired, then
press <0>.
 Press the <M> button to save the
adjusted parameters. The Picture
Style selection screen will reappear.
 Any parameter settings different from
the default will be displayed in blue.
 By selecting [Default set.] in step 4, you can revert the parameter
settings of the respective Picture Style to its default.
 To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted
Picture Style, then shoot.
169
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
Parameter Settings and Effects
Sharpness
g
A
Strength
0: Less sharp outline
7: Sharp outline
B
Fineness*1
1: Fine
5: Coarse
C
Threshold*2 1: Low
5: High
h Contrast
-4: Low contrast
+4: High contrast
i Saturation
-4: Low saturation
+4: High saturation
j Color tone
-4: Reddish skin tone
+4: Yellowish skin tone
*1: Indicates the fineness of the outlines to be emphasized. The smaller the
number, the finer the outlines can be emphasized.
*2: Sets how much the outline is emphasized based on the difference in contrast
between the subject and the surrounding area. The smaller the number, the
more the outline will be emphasized when the contrast difference is low.
However, noise at high ISO speeds tends to be more noticeable when the
number is smaller.
170
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
V Monochrome Adjustment
Besides [Strength], [Fineness], or [Threshold] of [Sharpness] and
[Contrast], you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect].
kFilter effect
With a filter effect applied to a
monochrome image, you can make
white clouds or green trees stand out
more.
Filter
Sample Effects
N: None
Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
Ye: Yellow
The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Or: Orange
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
R: Red
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
G: Green
Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
lToning effect
By applying a toning effect, you can
create a monochrome image in that
color. It can make the image look more
impressive.
The following can be selected: [N:None],
[S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple] or
[G:Green].
171
A Registering a Picture StyleN
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],
[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3]. You can create multiple Picture Styles
with different settings for parameters such as sharpness and contrast.
You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that is registered
to the camera with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.504).
1 Press the <b> button.
[A].
2 Select
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
[User Def. *].
3 Select
 Select [User Def. *], then press
<B> button.
<0>.
4 Press
 With [Picture Style] selected, press
<0>.
the base Picture Style.
5 Select
 Select the base Picture Style, then
press <0>.
 To adjust the parameters of a Picture
Style that is registered to the camera
with EOS Utility (EOS software), select
the Picture Style here.
172
A Registering a Picture StyleN
a parameter.
6 Select
 Select the parameter (such as
[Sharpness] - [Strength]) to be set,
then press <0>.
the parameter.
7 Set
 Adjust the parameter as desired, then
press <0>.
For details, see “Customizing a
Picture Style” (p.168).
 Press the <M> button to register
the modified Picture Style. The
Picture Style selection screen will
then reappear.
 The base Picture Style will be
indicated on the right of [User Def. *].
 If a Picture Style has already been registered under [User Def. *],
changing the base Picture Style in step 5 will nullify the parameter
settings of the registered Picture Style.
 If you perform [Clear all camera settings] (p.70), all the [User Def. *]
styles and settings will revert to their defaults. Any Picture Style
registered via EOS Utility (EOS software) will have only its modified
parameters reverted to the default setting.
 To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, select the registered [User
Def. *], then shoot.
 Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera,
refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
173
B: Setting the White BalanceN
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally,
the Auto [Q] (Ambience priority) or [Qw] (White priority) setting will
obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be
obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light
source or set it manually by shooting a white object.
<A> is automatically set in the [Q] (Ambience priority) mode.
1
Press the <n> button. (9)
a white balance setting.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <5> dial.
(Approx.)
Display
Q
Qw
Mode
Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)
Auto (Ambience priority, p.175)
Auto (White priority, p.175)
3000-7000
W
Daylight
5200
E
Shade
7000
R
Cloudy, twilight, sunset
6000
Y
Tungsten light
3200
U
White fluorescent light
D
Flash use
4000
Automatically set*
O
Custom (p.176)
2000-10000
P
Color temperature (p.178)
2500-10000
* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.
Otherwise, it will be fixed to approx. 6000 K.
You can also set this with [z2: White balance].
174
B: Setting the White BalanceN
White Balance
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of
lighting. With a digital camera, the white for color correction basis is
decided depending on the color temperature of the illumination, and
then the color is adjusted with software to make the white areas look
white. With this function, pictures with natural color shades can be
taken.
Q Auto White Balance
With the standard [Q] (Ambience priority), you can increase the
intensity of the image’s warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light
scene. If you select [Qw] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity
of the image’s warm color cast.
If you want to match the Auto white balance of previous EOS camera
models, select [Q] (Ambience priority).
1
Select [White balance].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
<Q>.
2 Select
 Select <Q>, then press <B>
button.
the desired item.
3 Select
 Select [Auto: Ambience priority] or
[Auto: White priority], then press
<0>.
Q : Auto: Ambience priority
Qw : Auto: White priority
175
B: Setting the White BalanceN
Cautions for Setting [Qw] (White priority)
 The reddish color cast of subjects may fade.
 When multiple light sources are included on the screen, the red color
cast of the picture may not be lessened.
 When using flash, the color tone will be the same as [Q] (Ambience
priority).
O Custom White Balance
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance
for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure
under the actual light source to be used.
1
Shoot a white object.
 Look through the viewfinder and aim
the entire dotted line box (shown in
the illustration) over a plain, white
object.
 Focus manually and shoot with the
standard exposure set for the white
object.
 You can use any white balance
setting.
[Custom White Balance].
2 Select
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Custom
White Balance], then press <0>.
 The custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
176
B: Setting the White BalanceN
the white balance data.
3 Import
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image captured in step 1, then press
<0>.
 On the dialog screen that appears,
select [OK] and the data will be
imported.
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
4 Press the <n> button. (9)
the custom white balance.
5 Select
 Look at the LCD panel and turn the
<5> dial to select <O>.
 If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard
exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.
 In step 3, the following images cannot be selected: Images captured
while the Picture Style was set to [Monochrome], multiple-exposure
images, and images shot with another camera.
 Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reflector
(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white balance.
 The personal white balance registered with the EOS software will be
registered under <O>. If you perform step 3, the data for the registered
personal white balance will be erased.
177
B: Setting the White BalanceN
P Setting the Color Temperature
You can set the white balance’s color temperature numerically. This is
for advanced users.
1
Select [White balance].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
the color temperature.
2 Set
 Select [P].
 Turn the <6> dial to set the color
temperature, then press <0>.
 The color temperature can be set
from approx. 2500 K to 10000 K in
100 K increments.
 When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set white
balance correction (magenta or green) as necessary.
 If you set [P] to the reading taken with a commercially-available color
temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate
for the difference between the color temperature meter’s reading and the
camera’s color temperature reading.
178
u White Balance CorrectionN
You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have
the same effect as using a commercially-available color temperature
conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be
corrected to one of nine levels.
This function is for advanced users who are familiar with using color
temperature conversion or color compensating filters.
White Balance Correction
1
Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [WB
Shift/Bkt.], then press <0>.
the white balance correction.
2 Set
 Use <9> to move the “ ” mark to the
Sample setting: A2, G1
appropriate position.
 B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The image’s
color balance will be adjusted towards
the color in the direction of the move.
 On the right of the screen, “Shift”
indicates the direction and correction
amount, respectively.
 Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
 Press <0> to exit the setting.
 During the white balance correction, <u> will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
 You can display <z> in the viewfinder when white balance correction is
set (p.409).
 One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating
the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)
179
u White Balance CorrectionN
White Balance Auto Bracketing
With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be
recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current
white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber
bias or magenta/green bias. This is called white balance bracketing
(WB-BKT). White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in
single-level increments.
Set the white balance bracketing
amount.
B/A bias ±3 levels
 In step 2 for “White Balance
Correction”, when you turn the <5>
dial, the “ ” mark on the screen will
change to “
” (3 points).
Turning the dial to the right sets the B/
A bracketing, and turning it to the left
sets the M/G bracketing.
 On the right, “Bracket” indicates the
bracketing direction and correction
amount.
 Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
 Press <0> to exit the setting.
Bracketing Sequence
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
180
u White Balance CorrectionN
 During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
be lower.
 Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record
the image to the card.
 You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
 When white balance bracketing is set, the white balance icon will blink.
 You can change the number of shots for white balance bracketing
(p.404).
 “Bkt.” stands for bracketing.
181
3 Auto Correction of Brightness and ContrastN
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and
contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto
Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG
images, the correction is applied when the image is captured.
[Standard] is automatically set in the <A> mode.
1
Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Auto
Lighting Optimizer], then press
<0>.
the setting.
2 Select
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
brightness and contrast corrected if
necessary.
 Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.
 If the Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and the image is too bright,
set [Low] or [Disable].
 If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure,
the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set
this function to [Disable].
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], [Auto Lighting
Optimizer] will be set automatically to [Disable].
In step 2, if you press the <B> button and uncheck <X> the [Disabled
in M or B modes] setting, the [Auto Lighting Optimizer] can also be set in
the <a> and <F> modes.
182
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise
reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high
ISO speeds. At low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the
image (shadow areas) is further reduced.
1
Select [High ISO speed NR].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [High ISO
speed NR], then press <0>.
the level.
2 Set
 Select the desired noise reduction
level, then press <0>.
 M: Multi Shot Noise Reduction
This applies noise reduction with higher image quality than [High].
For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned
and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.
If the image-recording quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, you
cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction].
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
When Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set, you can display <z> in the
viewfinder (p.409).
183
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction
 If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the
noise reduction effect may be minimal.
 If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
 If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave
afterimages.
 The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
 If the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are
taken, irregular exposure in the image may result.
 After shooting, it may take some time to record an image to the card for
noise reduction and merging the images. During the processing of the
images, “buSY” will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel,
and you cannot take another picture until the processing is completed.
 You cannot use AEB and WB bracketing.
 If [z3: Long exp. noise reduction], [z3: Multiple exposure], [z3:
HDR Mode], AEB, or WB bracketing is set, [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction] cannot be set.
 You cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] for bulb exposures and
movie shooting.
 Flash shooting is not possible. The EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite’s
AF-assist beam will be emitted according to the [23: AF-assist beam
firing] setting.
 Doing any of the following will automatically switch the setting to
[Standard]: Set the power switch to <2>, replace the battery, replace
the card, select the <A> or <F> shooting mode, set or switch the
image-recording quality to RAW or RAW+JPEG, or switch to movie
shooting.
184
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
Noise reduction is possible with images exposed for 1 sec. or longer.
1
Select [Long exp. noise
reduction].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Long
exp. noise reduction], then press
<0>.
the desired setting.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
 Auto
For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This
[Auto] setting is effective in most cases.
 Enable
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.
The [Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with
the [Auto] setting.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
185
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
 With [Auto] and [Enable], the noise reduction process after the picture is
taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure. During
noise reduction, shooting is still possible as long as the maximum burst
indicator in the viewfinder shows “1” or higher.
 Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the [Enable]
setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting.
 With [Enable], if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image
displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction process.
The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is
completed. (You cannot take another picture.)
186
3 Highlight Tone PriorityN
You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights.
1
Select [Highlight tone priority].
 Under the [z3] tab, select
[Highlight tone priority], then press
<0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Highlight details are improved. The
dynamic range is expanded from the
standard 18% gray to bright
highlights. The gradation between the
grays and highlights becomes
smoother.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with
highlight tone priority applied.
When [Enable] is set, noise may increase slightly.
With [Enable], the settable range will be ISO 200 - ISO 6400. Also, the
<A> icon will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel when
highlight tone priority is enabled.
187
3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberration
Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners
look darker due to the lens characteristics. Color fringing along subject
outlines is called chromatic aberration. This lens aberration and light
fall-off can be corrected. By default, Peripheral illumination and
Chromatic aberration correction are set to [Enable].
If [Cannot correct - no data] is displayed, see “Lens Correction Data”
on the next page.
Peripheral Illumination Correction
1
Select [Lens aberration
correction].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Lens
aberration correction], then press
<0>.
the setting.
2 Select
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Peripheral illumin.], then
press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
peripheral illumination corrected.
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image
periphery.
 The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum
correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software, p.504).
 The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
188
3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberration
Chromatic Aberration Correction
1
Select the setting.
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Chromatic aberration], then
press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
2 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
chromatic aberration corrected.
Lens Correction Data
The camera already contains data for lens peripheral illumination
correction and chromatic aberration correction for approx. 30 lenses.
If you select [Enable], the peripheral illumination correction and
chromatic aberration correction will be applied automatically for any
lens whose correction data is registered in the camera.
With EOS Utility (EOS software), you can check the lenses of which
correction data is registered in the camera. You can also register the
correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual.
For lenses incorporating the correction data, it is not necessary to
register the correction data to the camera.
189
3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberration
Cautions for Lens Correction
 Peripheral illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction
cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken.
 When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
 If you use magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral
illumination correction and chromatic aberration correction will not be
reflected in the image shown on the screen.
 The correction amount will be less if the lens used does not have
distance information.
Notes for Lens Correction
 If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify the image after
shooting and check it again.
 Corrections can be applied even when an Extender or Life-size
Converter is attached.
190
3 Reducing FlickerN
If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source
such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker
and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous
shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors
across the images may result.
With anti-flicker shooting, the camera detects the frequency of the light
source’s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker causes less
effect on exposure or color.
1
Select [Anti-flicker shoot.].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Antiflicker shoot.], then press <0>.
2 Select [Enable].
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be taken with reduced
unevenness of exposure or color
caused by the flicker.
 When [Enable] is set and you shoot under a flickering light source, the
shutter-release time lag may become longer. Also, the continuous
shooting speed may become slightly slower, and the shooting interval
may become irregular.
 This function does not work with Live View shooting and movie shooting.
 In the <d> or <f> mode, if the shutter speed changes during
continuous shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at
different shutter speeds, the color tone may be inconsistent. To avoid
inconsistent color tones, use the <s> or <a> mode at a fixed shutter
speed.
 The color tone of images shot when [Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to
[Enable] may look different from when [Disable] is set.
 Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected.
Also, if the light’s flicker frequency changes during continuous shooting,
effects of the flicker cannot be reduced.
191
3 Reducing FlickerN
 If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in
the image, flicker may not be detected.
 Under certain special types of lighting, the camera may not be able to
reduce the effects of the flicker even when <G> is displayed.
 Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.
 If you recompose a shot, <G> may appear and disappear
intermittently.
 Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, expected result
may not be obtained even if you use this function.
 Taking test shots is recommended.
 If <G> is not displayed in the viewfinder, checkmark [Flicker
detection] in [Show/hide in viewfinder] (p.77). When the camera
reduces the effects of the flicker when you shoot, <G> will light.
Under a light source which does not flicker, or if no flicker is detected,
<G> will not be displayed.
 If [Flicker detection] is checkmarked and [z4: Anti-flicker shoot.] is
set to [Disable], metering under a flickering light source will cause
<G> to blink in the viewfinder as a warning. Setting [Enable]
before shooting is recommended.
 In the <A> mode, the effects of flickering light will be reduced when you
shoot, but <G> will not be displayed.
 Anti-flicker shooting also works with flash. However, the expected result
may not be obtained during wireless flash shooting.
192
3 Setting the Color SpaceN
The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. With this
camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or
Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.
The color space is set automatically to [sRGB] in the <A> mode.
1
Select [Color space].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Color
space], then press <0>.
the desired color space.
2 Set
 Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then
press <0>.
Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other
industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you are not familiar
with image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in a
sRGB computer environment and with printers not compatible with
Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Postprocessing of the image with computer software will therefore be
required.
 If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the
first character in the file name will be an underscore “_”.
 The ICC profile is not appended. For explanations about the ICC profile,
refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual.
193
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images
are to be saved.
This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for
saving captured images.
Creating a Folder
1
Select [Record func+card/folder
sel.].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Record
func+card/folder sel.], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Folder].
3 Select [Create folder].
[OK].
4 Select
 A new folder with the folder number
increased by one is created.
194
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
Selecting a Folder
Lowest file number
Number of images in folder
 Select a folder on the folder selection
screen, then press <0>.
 The folder where the captured
images will be saved is selected.
 Subsequently captured images will
be recorded into the selected folder.
Folder name
Highest file number
Folders
As with “100EOS5D” for example, the folder name starts with three digits
(the folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can
contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder
becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is
created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.200) is executed, a new
folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can
be created.
Creating Folders with a Computer
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the format
“100ABC_D”. The first three digits are the folder number, from 100 to 999.
The last five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case
letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be
used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit
folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”), even if the
remaining five characters in each name are different.
195
3 Changing the File Name
The file name has four alphanumeric
characters followed by a four-digit image (Example) BE3B0001.JPG
number (p.199) and extension. The first
four alphanumeric characters are set upon factory shipment and unique
to the camera. However, you can change them.
With “User setting1”, you can change and register the four characters
as desired. With “User setting2”, if you register three characters, the
fourth character from the left will be appended automatically to indicate
the image size.
Registering or Changing the File Name
1
Select [File name].
 Under the [51] tab, select [File
name], then press <0>.
2 Select [Change User setting*].
any alphanumeric
3 Enter
characters.
 For User setting1, enter four
characters. For User setting2, enter
three characters.
 Press the <L> button to delete any
unnecessary characters.
 Press the <Q> button. The text
palette will be highlighted with a color
frame, and text can be entered.
196
3 Changing the File Name
 Operate the <5> dial or <9> to
move the and select the desired
character. Then press <0> to enter
it.
the setting.
4 Exit
 After entering the correct number of
characters, press the <M> button,
then select [OK].
 The registered file name will be
saved.
the registered file name.
5 Select
 Select [File name], then press <0>.
Settings
 Select the registered file name, then
press <0>.
 If User setting2 is registered, select
“*** (the 3 characters registered) +
image size”.
197
3 Changing the File Name
The first character cannot be an underscore “_”.
User setting2
When you select the “*** + image size” registered with User setting2 and
take pictures, the image-recording quality character will be automatically
appended as the file name’s fourth character from the left. The meaning of
the image-recording quality characters is as follows:
“***L” = 73 / 83 / 1
“***M” = 7K / 8K / 41
“***N” = 75 / 85
“***S” = 7a / 8a / 61
“***T” = b
“***U” = c
When the image is transferred to a computer, the automatically appended
fourth character will be included. You can then see the image size without
having to open the image. RAW or JPEG images can be distinguished with
the extension.
 The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.CR2” for RAW images,
and “.MOV” for movies.
 When you shoot a movie with User setting2, the file name’s fourth
character will be an underscore “_”.
198
3 File Numbering Methods
The four-digit file number is like the frame
(Example) BE3B0001.JPG
number on a roll of film. The captured
images are assigned a sequential file
number from 0001 to 9999 and saved in one folder. You can change
how the file number is assigned.
1
Select [File numbering].
 Under the [51] tab, select [File
numbering], then press <0>.
the file numbering method.
2 Select
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Continuous
Continues the file numbering sequence even after the card is
replaced or a new folder is created.
Even after you replace the card, create a folder, or switch the target
card (such as f9g), the file numbering continues in sequence up to
9999 for the images saved. This is convenient when you want to save
images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or
in multiple folders into one folder on your computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue
from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the
folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is recommended
that you use a newly-formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
Card A (f)
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card A
Card B (g)
100
0051
0052
0051
101
0052
Next sequential file number
199
3 File Numbering Methods
Auto Reset
Restarts the file numbering from 0001 each time the card is
replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card, create a folder, or switch the target card
(such as f9g), the file numbering continues in sequence from 0001
for the images saved. This is convenient if you want to organize images
according to cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue
from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the
folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from
0001, use a newly formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
Card A (f)
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card A
Card B (g)
100
0051
0001
0051
101
0001
File numbering is reset
Manual Reset
Resets the file numbering to 0001 or to start from file number 0001
in a new folder.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder
starts from 0001.
This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images
taken yesterday and the ones taken today, for example. After the
manual reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset.
(There will be no manual reset confirmation dialog.)
If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible
even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a
message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
200
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image
as Exif information.
1
Select [Copyright information].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Copyright
information], then press <0>.
the option to be set.
2 Select
 Select [Enter author’s name] or
[Enter copyright details], then press
<0>.
text.
3 Enter
 Press the <Q> button. The text




palette will be highlighted with a color
frame, and text can be entered.
Operate the <5> dial or <9> to
move the and select the desired
character. Then press <0> to enter
it.
You can enter up to 63 characters.
To delete a character, press the <L>
button.
To cancel the text entry, press the
<B> button, then select [OK].
the setting.
4 Exit
 After entering the text, press the
<M> button, then select [OK].
 The information is saved.
201
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
Checking the Copyright Information
When you select [Display copyright
info.] in step 2, you can check the
[Author] and [Copyright] information
that you entered.
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2 on the
preceding page, you can delete the [Author] and [Copyright]
information.
If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed
entirely when you select [Display copyright info.].
You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility (EOS
software, p.504).
202
5
Advanced Operations
In the <d> <s> <f> <a>
<F> shooting modes, you can
select the shutter speed,
aperture, and other camera
settings to change the
exposure and obtain the
desired result.
 A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a
function that can be used only in the following modes: <d>
<s> <f> <a> <F>.
 After you press the shutter button halfway and let go, the
exposure values will remain displayed in the viewfinder and
on the LCD panel for 4 sec. (0).
 For the functions settable in each shooting mode, see page
456.
Set the <R> switch to the left.
203
d: Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.
* <d> stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <d>.
on the subject.
2 Focus
 Look through the viewfinder and aim
the AF point over the subject. Then
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the focus
indicator <o> in the viewfinder will
light up (in One-Shot AF mode).
 The shutter speed and aperture will
be set automatically and displayed in
the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
the display.
3 Check
 A standard exposure will be obtained
as long as the shutter speed and
aperture displays do not blink.
the picture.
4 Take
 Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
204
d: Program AE
 If the “30"” shutter speed and the lowest f/number
blink, it indicates underexposure.
Increase the ISO speed or use flash.
 If the “8000” shutter speed and the highest f/number
blink, it indicates overexposure.
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold
separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the
lens.
Differences Between <d> and <A> Modes
In the <A> mode, many functions, such as the AF operation and metering
mode, are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can
set are limited. With <d> mode, only the shutter speed and aperture are set
automatically. You can freely set the AF operation, metering mode, and
other functions (p.456).
Program Shift
 In the Program AE mode, you can freely change the shutter speed and
aperture combination (Program) set automatically by the camera while
maintaining the same exposure. This is called Program shift.
 To shift the program, press the shutter button halfway, then turn the
<6> dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed.
 Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer
(0) ends (exposure setting display turns off).
 Program shift cannot be used with flash.
205
s: Shutter-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically
sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the
brightness of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster
shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower
shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of
motion.
* <s> stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)
1
Frozen action
(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)
Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
the desired shutter speed.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The aperture is set automatically.
the viewfinder display and
4 Check
shoot.
 As long as the aperture is not
blinking, a standard exposure will be
obtained.
206
s: Shutter-Priority AE
 If the lowest f/number blinks, it indicates
underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed until
the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed.
 If the highest f/number blinks, it indicates
overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter speed until
the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO speed.
Shutter Speed Display
The shutter speeds from “8000” to “4” indicate the denominator of the
fractional shutter speed. For example, “125” indicates 1/125 sec., “0"5”
indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"” is 15 sec.
207
f: Aperture-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the
shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure suiting the
subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher
f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower
f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus.
* <f> stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).
Blurred background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)
1
Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
the desired aperture.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The shutter speed is set automatically.
the viewfinder display and
4 Check
shoot.
 As long as the shutter speed is not
blinking, a standard exposure will be
obtained.
208
f: Aperture-Priority AE
 If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a larger aperture
(lower f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops
or set a higher ISO speed.
 If the “8000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a smaller aperture (higher
f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a
lower ISO speed.
Aperture Display
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The
f/number displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to
the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.
Depth-of-Field PreviewN
The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when
the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.
Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the
LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.
Press the depth-of-field preview button
to stop down the lens to the current
aperture setting and check the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).
 A higher f/number will make more of the foreground and background fall
within acceptable focus. However, the viewfinder will look darker.
 While looking at the Live View image (p.256), you can change the
aperture and press the depth-of-field preview button to see how the
depth of field changes.
 The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while the depth-of-field preview
button is pressed.
209
a: Manual Exposure
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To
determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the
viewfinder or use a commercially-available exposure meter. This
method is called manual exposure.
* <a> stands for Manual.
Shutter speed
Aperture
1 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
2 Set the ISO speed (p.158).
the shutter speed and aperture.
3 Set
 To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial.
 To set the aperture, turn the <5> dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch to the left, then turn the <6>
or <5> dial.
Standard exposure index
Exposure level mark
on the subject.
4 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The exposure setting will be displayed
in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
 The exposure level mark <h>
indicates how far the current
exposure level is from the standard
exposure level.
the exposure and take the
5 Set
picture.
 Check the exposure level indicator
and set the desired shutter speed and
aperture.
 If the exposure level exceeds ±3
stops from the standard exposure,
the end of the exposure level
indicator will display <I> or <J>.
210
a: Manual Exposure
Exposure Compensation with Auto ISO
If the ISO speed is set to A (AUTO), you can set exposure
compensation (p.214) as follows:
• [z2: Expo.comp./AEB]
• Under [83: Custom Controls], use [s: Expo comp (hold btn,
turn
)] (p.423).
• Quick Control (p.61)
 If Auto ISO is set, the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter
speed and aperture in order to obtain a standard exposure. Therefore,
you may not obtain the desired exposure effect. In such a case, set the
exposure compensation.
 If flash is used when Auto ISO is set, exposure compensation will not be
applied even if an exposure compensation amount is set.
 Under [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], if the checkmark <X> for
[Disabled in M or B modes] is removed, Auto Lighting Optimizer can be
set even in the <a> mode (p.182).
 When Auto ISO is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed.
 If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to
when you pressed the <A> button.
 If exposure compensation (p.214) was applied in <d>, <s>, or <f>
mode, and then the shooting mode is switched to <a> with Auto ISO
set, the exposure compensation amount already set will be maintained.
 With Auto ISO set and [81: ISO speed setting increments] set to [1/2stop], any 1/2-stop exposure compensation will be implemented with the
ISO speed (1/3 stop) and shutter speed. However, the shutter speed
displayed will not change.
211
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.
In the <A> mode, evaluative metering is set automatically.
1
Press the <n> button. (9)
the metering mode.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
q:Evaluative metering
w:Partial metering
r:Spot metering
e:Center-weighted average
metering
q Evaluative metering
This is a general-purpose metering mode suited
even for backlit subjects. The camera sets the
exposure automatically to suit the scene.
w Partial metering
Effective when the background is much brighter
than the subject due to backlighting, etc. Partial
metering covers approx. 6.1% of the viewfinder
area at the center.
212
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
r Spot metering
This is for metering a specific spot of the subject or
scene. Spot metering covers approx. 1.3% of the
viewfinder area at the center. The spot metering
circle will be displayed in the viewfinder.
e Center-weighted average metering
The metering is weighted at the center and then
averaged for the entire scene.
 With q (Evaluative metering), the exposure setting will be locked when
you press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved (in One-Shot
AF mode). In the w (Partial metering), r (Spot metering), and e
(Center-weighted average metering) modes, the exposure is set at the
moment the picture is taken. (Pressing the shutter button halfway does
not lock the exposure.)
 When <r> (Spot metering) is set, you can display <z> in the
viewfinder (p.409).
213
O Setting Exposure CompensationN
Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken
(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.
Exposure compensation can be set in the <d>, <s>, and <f> shooting
modes. Although you can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops in 1/3stop increments, the exposure compensation indicator in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel can only display the setting up to ±3 stops. If you want to set the
exposure compensation setting beyond ±3 stops, use the Quick Control (p.61) or
follow the instructions for [z2: Expo.comp./AEB] on the next page.
If the <a> mode and the Auto ISO are both set, see page 211 to set
the exposure compensation.
1
Increased exposure for a brighter image
Check the exposure.
 Press the shutter button halfway (0)
and check the exposure level indicator.
the exposure compensation amount.
2 Set
 While looking at the viewfinder or
LCD panel, turn the <5> dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch to the left, then turn the <5> dial.
Decreased exposure for a darker image
the picture.
3 Take
 To cancel exposure compensation,
set the exposure level indicator <h/N>
to the standard exposure index (<a>
or <C>).
If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.182) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
 The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you
set the power switch to <2>.
 After setting the exposure compensation amount, you can prevent the
exposure compensation amount from changing accidentally by setting
the <R> switch to the right.
 If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the
exposure level indicator will display <I> or <J>.
214
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N
By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically, the camera
brackets the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three
successive shots. This is called AEB.
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.
1
Select [Expo.comp./AEB].
 Under the [z2] tab, select
[Expo.comp./AEB], then press
<0>.
the AEB range.
2 Set
 Turn the <6> dial to set the AEB
AEB range
range. If you turn <5>, you can set
the exposure compensation.
 Press <0> to set it.
 When you exit the menu, <h> and
the AEB range will be displayed on
the LCD panel.
the picture.
3 Take
 Three bracketed shots will be taken
Standard exposure
Decreased exposure
according to the drive mode set in this
sequence: Standard exposure,
decreased exposure, and increased
exposure.
 AEB will not be automatically
canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step
2 to turn off the AEB range display.
Increased exposure
215
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N
 During AEB, <A> in the viewfinder and <h> on the LCD panel will
blink.
 If the drive mode is set to <u> or <B>, press the shutter button three
times for each shot. When <o>, <i>, or <M> is set and you hold
down the shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be
taken continuously and the camera will automatically stop shooting.
When <Q> or <k> is set, the three bracketed shots will be taken
continuously after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.
 You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.
 If the AEB range exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the exposure level
indicator will display <I> or <J>.
 AEB cannot be used with flash, bulb exposures, or when [Multi Shot
Noise Reduction] or [HDR Mode] is set.
 AEB will be canceled automatically when you set the power switch to
<2> or when the flash is ready to fire.
216
A AE LockN
Use AE lock when the area of focus is to be different from the exposure
metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same
exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then
recompose and take the picture. This is called AE lock. It is effective for
backlit subjects, etc.
1
Focus on the subject.
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The exposure setting will be displayed.
the <A> button. (0)
2 Press
 The <A> icon lights up in the
viewfinder to indicate that the
exposure setting is locked (AE lock).
 Each time you press the <A> button,
the current exposure setting is locked.
and take the picture.
3 Recompose
 If you want to maintain the AE lock
while taking more shots, hold down
the <A> button and press the shutter
button to take another shot.
AE Lock Effects
Metering Mode
(p.212)
q*
wre
AF Point Selection Method (p.93)
Automatic Selection
Manual Selection
AE lock is applied at the AF
AE lock is applied at the
point that achieved focus.
selected AF point.
AE lock is applied at the center AF point.
* When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is applied at the
center AF point.
AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.
217
F: Bulb Exposures
In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the
shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter
button. This is called bulb exposure. Use bulb exposures for night
scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects requiring long
exposures.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <F>.
the desired aperture.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or the
viewfinder, turn the <6> or <5>
dial.
Elapsed exposure time
the picture.
3 Take
 The exposure will continue for as long
as you keep the shutter button
pressed completely.
 The elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on the LCD panel.
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 Long exposures produce more noise than usual.
 If Auto ISO is set, the ISO speed will be ISO 400 (p.160).
 For a bulb exposure, if you use both the self-timer and mirror lockup
instead of the bulb timer, keep pressing the shutter button completely
(self-timer delay time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter
button during the self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release
sound, but no picture will be taken. If you use the bulb timer under the
same shooting conditions, you need not hold down the shutter button
completely.
218
F: Bulb Exposures
 With [z3: Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise
generated during long exposures (p.185).
 For bulb exposures, using a tripod and bulb timer is recommended.
Using mirror lockup (p.234) with bulb exposures is also possible.
 You can also shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS-80N3 or
Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (both sold separately, p.237).
 You can also use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.237) for
bulb exposures. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button,
the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button
again to stop the bulb exposure.
J Bulb TimerN
You can preset the bulb exposure’s exposure time. With the bulb timer,
you need not hold down the shutter button during the bulb exposure.
This reduces camera shake.
The bulb timer can be set only in the <F> (Bulb) shooting mode. It
cannot be set (or will not function) in any other shooting mode.
1
Select [Bulb timer].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Bulb
timer], then press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Select [Enable], then press <B>
button.
219
F: Bulb Exposures
the desired exposure time.
3 Set
 Select the hour, minute, or second.
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Set the desired number, then press
<0> (Returns to <s>).
[OK].
4 Select
 The set time will be displayed on the
menu screen.
 When you exit the menu, <J> will
be displayed on the LCD panel.
Elapsed exposure time
the picture.
5 Take
 Press the shutter button completely,
and the bulb exposure will start and
continue until the set time elapses.
 To cancel the timer setting, set
[Disable] in step 2.
Bulb timer
 If you press the shutter button completely while the bulb timer is
operating, the bulb exposure will stop.
 Doing any of the following will cancel the bulb timer (reverts to
[Disable]): Set the power switch to <2>, replace the battery, replace
the card, switch to movie shooting, or change the shooting mode to other
than <F>.
220
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
Clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced for a high dynamic
range of tones even with high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is
effective for landscape and still-life shots.
With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures (standard
exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured
continuously for each shot and then merged together
automatically. The HDR image is recorded as a JPEG image.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
1 Press the <b> button.
the HDR mode.
2 Select
 Select [w], then press <0>.
 The HDR mode screen will appear.
[Adjust dyn range].
3 Set
 Select the desired dynamic range
setting, then press <0>.
 Selecting [Auto] will have the
dynamic range set automatically
depending on the image’s overall
tonal range.
 The higher the number, the wider the
dynamic range will be.
 To exit HDR shooting, select [Disable
HDR].
[Effect].
4 Set
 Select the desired effect, then press
<0>.
 You can also set HDR shooting with [z3: HDR Mode].
221
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
Effects
 Natural
For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and
shadow details would otherwise be lost. Clipped highlights and
shadows will be reduced.
 Art standard
While the clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced more than
with [Natural], the contrast will be lower, and the gradation flatter to
have the picture look like a painting. The subject outlines will have
bright (or dark) edges.
 Art vivid
The colors are more saturated than with [Art standard], and the low
contrast and flat gradation create a graphic art effect.
 Art bold
The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and
the picture look like an oil painting.
 Art embossed
The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are
decreased to make the picture look flat. The picture looks faded and
old. The subject outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.
Art standard
Art vivid
Art bold
Saturation
Standard
High
Higher
Low
Bold outline
Standard
Weak
Strong
Stronger
Brightness
Standard
Standard
Standard
Dark
Flat
Flat
Flat
Flatter
Tone
Art embossed
Each effect will be applied based on the characteristics of the Picture Style
currently set (p.164).
222
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
[Continuous HDR].
5 Set
 Select either [1 shot only] or [Every
shot], then press <0>.
 With [1 shot only], HDR shooting will
be canceled automatically after the
shooting ends.
 With [Every shot], HDR shooting
continues until the setting in step 3 is
set to [Disable HDR].
[Auto Image Align].
6 Set
 For handheld shooting, select
[Enable]. When using a tripod, select
[Disable], then press <0>.
the images to be saved.
7 Set
 To save all three images and the
merged HDR image, select [All
images], then press <0>.
 To save only the HDR image, select
[HDR img only], then press <0>.
223
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
the picture.
8 Take
 HDR shooting is possible with
viewfinder shooting and Live View
shooting.
 <w> will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
 When you press the shutter button
completely, three consecutive images
will be captured, and the HDR image
will be recorded to the card.
 If the image-recording quality is set to RAW, the HDR image will be
recorded in 73 quality. If the image-recording quality is set to
RAW+JPEG, the HDR image will be recorded in the JPEG quality set.
 HDR shooting is not possible with ISO expansion (L, H). HDR shooting is
possible within ISO 100 - ISO 6400.
 The flash will not fire during HDR shooting.
 During HDR shooting, the settings of [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer],
[z3: Highlight tone priority], and [z5: Expo. simulation] will be
automatically switched to [Disable].
 AEB cannot be set.
 If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave
afterimages.
 In HDR shooting, three images are captured with different shutter
speeds set automatically. Therefore, even in <s> and <a> shooting
modes, the shutter speed will be shifted based on the shutter speed you
set.
 To prevent camera shake, a high ISO speed may be set.
224
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
 When shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable],
AF point display information (p.325) and Dust Delete Data (p.375) will
not be appended to the image.
 If you perform handheld HDR shooting while [Auto Image Align] is set
to [Enable], image periphery will be slightly cropped and resolution will
be slightly lowered (except when shooting with [1.3x (crop)] or [1.6x
(crop)]). Also, if the images cannot be aligned properly due to camera
shake, etc., auto image alignment may not take effect. Note that when
shooting with excessively bright (or dark) exposure settings, auto image
alignment may not work properly.
 If you perform handheld HDR shooting while [Auto Image Align] is set
to [Disable], the three images may not be properly aligned and the HDR
effect may be minimal. Using a tripod is recommended.
 Auto image alignment may not work properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
 The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced
correctly. Irregular colors, irregular exposure or noise may appear.
 HDR shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural
color reproduction of the illuminated areas.
 With HDR shooting, the images will be merged, then saved to the card,
so it may take some time. Therefore, it will take a longer time to record
the HDR image to the card than with normal shooting. During the
processing of the images, “buSY” will be displayed in the viewfinder and
on the LCD panel, and you cannot take another picture until the
processing is completed.
 If you change the shooting mode or switch to movie shooting after setting
HDR shooting, HDR shooting setting may be cleared ([Adjust dyn
range] setting may be switched to [Disable HDR]).
225
P Multiple ExposuresN
You can shoot two to nine exposures to be merged into one image. If
you shoot multiple-exposure images with Live View shooting (p.255),
you can see how the single exposures are being merged while
shooting.
1 Press the <b> button.
Multiple exposure.
2 Select
 Select [P], then press <0>.
 The multiple exposure setting screen
will appear.
[Multiple exposure].
3 Set
 Select [On:Func/Ctrl] or
[On:ContShtng], then press <0>.
 To exit shooting multiple exposures,
select [Disable].
 On: Func/Ctrl (Function and control priority)
Convenient when you want to shoot multiple exposures while
checking the result as you proceed. During continuous shooting, the
continuous shooting speed will decrease greatly.
 On: ContShtng (Continuous shooting priority)
Geared for continuous multiple-exposure shooting of a moving
subject. Continuous shooting is possible, but the following
operations are disabled during shooting: menu viewing, Live View
display, image review after image capture, image playback, and
undo last image (p.232).
Also, only the multiple-exposure image will be saved. (The single
exposures merged in the multiple-exposure image will not be
saved.)
You can also set multiple exposure with [z3: Multiple exposure].
226
P Multiple ExposuresN
[Multi-expos ctrl].
4 Set
 Select the desired multiple-exposure
control method, then press <0>.
 Additive
The exposure of each single exposure is added cumulatively. Based
on the [No. of exposures], set a negative exposure compensation.
Refer to the basic guide below to set a negative exposure
compensation.
Exposure Compensation Setting Guide for Multiple Exposures
Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures:
-2 stops
 Average
Based on the [No. of exposures], negative exposure compensation
is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot
multiple exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject’s
background will be automatically controlled to obtain a standard
exposure.
 Bright/Dark
The brightness (or darkness) of the base image and the images to
be added are compared at the same position, and then the bright (or
dark) part will be left in the picture. Depending on the overlapping
colors, the colors may be mixed depending on the brightness (or
darkness) ratio of the compared images.
the [No. of exposures].
5 Set
 Select the number of exposures, then
press <0>.
 You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures.
227
P Multiple ExposuresN
the images to be saved.
6 Set
 To save all the single exposures and
the merged multiple-exposure image,
select [All images], then press <0>.
 To save only the merged multipleexposure image, select [Result
only], then press <0>.
[Continue Mult-exp].
7 Set
 Select either [1 shot only] or
[Continuously], then press <0>.
 With [1 shot only], multiple-exposure
shooting will be canceled
automatically after the shooting ends.
 With [Continuously], multipleexposure shooting continues until the
setting in step 3 is set to [Disable].
the first exposure.
8 Take
 When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, the
Remaining number of exposures
228
captured image will be displayed.
 The <P> icon will blink.
 The number of remaining exposures
is displayed in brackets [ ] in the
viewfinder or on the screen.
 Pressing the <x> button enables
you to view the captured image
(p.232).
P Multiple ExposuresN
subsequent exposures.
9 Shoot
 When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, the
merged multiple-exposure image will
be displayed.
 With Live View shooting, the multipleexposure images merged so far will
be displayed. By pressing the
<B> button, you can display only
the Live View image.
 After you shoot the set number of
exposures, multiple-exposure shooting
will exit. With continuous shooting, after
you finish shooting the set number of
exposures while holding down the
shutter button, the shooting will stop.
 The image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed
noise reduction and color space, etc. set for the first single exposure will
also be set for the subsequent exposures.
 You cannot use crop shooting or shoot with a set aspect ratio for multiple
exposures. [Full-frame] will be applied for [z4: Crop/aspect ratio] for
shooting.
 During multiple exposure shooting, the settings of [z1: Lens
aberration correction], [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], and [z3:
Highlight tone priority] will be automatically switched to [Disable].
 If [z3: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for
shooting.
 If [On:Func/Ctrl] and [Additive], [Bright], or [Dark] are both set, the
image displayed during shooting may look noisy. However, when you
finish shooting the set number of exposures, noise reduction will be
applied and the final multiple-exposure image will be less noisy.
 If you perform Live View shooting while [On:ContShtng] is set, the Live
View function will stop automatically after the first shot is taken. From the
second shot onward, shoot while looking through the viewfinder.
When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, you can press the <x> button to view the
multiple exposures taken so far or delete the last single exposure (p.232).
229
P Multiple ExposuresN
 With multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more
noticeable the noise, irregular colors, and banding will be. Also, as noise
increases with higher ISO speeds, shooting at low ISO speeds is
recommended.
 If [Additive], [Bright], or [Dark] is set, the image processing after taking
the multiple exposures will take time. (The access lamp will light up
longer.)
 If you perform Live View shooting while [On:Func/Ctrl] and [Additive],
[Bright], or [Dark] are both set, the Live View function will stop
automatically when the multiple-exposure shooting ends.
 In step 9, the brightness and noise of the multiple-exposure image
displayed during Live View shooting will be different from the final
multiple-exposure image recorded.
 If [On:ContShtng] is set, let go of the shutter button after shooting the
set number of exposures.
 Doing any of the following will cancel the multiple-exposure shooting: Set
the power switch to <2>, replace the battery, replace the card, or
switch to movie shooting.
 If you switch the shooting mode to <A> or <w/x/y> while shooting,
multiple-exposure shooting will end.
 If you connect the camera to a computer or printer, multiple-exposure
shooting will not be possible. If you connect the camera to a computer or
printer during shooting, multiple-exposure shooting will stop.
230
P Multiple ExposuresN
Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded on the Card
You can select a 1 image recorded on the card as the first single
exposure. The image data of the selected 1 image will remain intact.
You can only select 1 images. You cannot select 41/61 or
JPEG images.
1
Select [Select image for multi. expo.].
 The images on the card will be
displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be used as the first single
exposure, then press <0>.
 Select [OK].
 The file number of the selected image
will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
the picture.
3 Take
 When you select the first image, the
number of remaining exposures as set
with [No. of exposures] will decrease
by 1. For example, if [No. of
exposures] is 3, you can shoot two
exposures.
 The following cannot be selected as the first single exposure: Images
shot with [z3: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable], images whose
[z4: Crop/aspect ratio] is set to any setting other than [Full-frame]
(p.154), and images having cropping information (p.411).
 [Disable] will be applied for [z1: Lens aberration correction] and
[z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] regardless of the settings of the 1
image selected as the first single exposure.
 The ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, and color space,
etc. set for the first 1 image will also be applied for the subsequent images.
 If [z3: Picture Style] is Auto for the RAW image selected as the first
1 image, Standard will be applied for shooting.
 You cannot select an image taken with another camera.
231
P Multiple ExposuresN
 You can also select a 1 multiple-exposure image as the first single
exposure.
 If you select [Deselect img], the selected image will be canceled.
Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting
When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set and you
have not finished shooting the set
number of exposures, you can press the
<x> button to view the merged
multiple-exposure image so far. You can
check how it looks and the exposure.
(Not possible when [On:ContShtng] is
set.)
If you press the <L> button, the
operations possible during multipleexposure shooting will be displayed.
Operation
Description
q Undo last image
Deletes the last image you shot (shoot another
image). The number of remaining exposures
will increase by 1.
W Save and exit
If [Save source imgs: All images] is set, all of
the single exposures and the merged multipleexposure image will be saved before exiting.
If [Save source imgs: Result only] is set, only
the multiple-exposure image merged so far will
be saved before exiting.
r Exit without saving
None of the images will be saved before
exiting.
2 Return to previous screen
The screen before you pressed the <L> button
will reappear.
During multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multipleexposure images.
232
P Multiple ExposuresN
FAQ
 Are there any restrictions on the image-recording quality?
All JPEG image-recording quality settings can be selected. If 41
or 61 is set, the merged multiple-exposure will be a 1 image.
Image-Recording
Quality Setting
Single Exposures
Merged MultipleExposure
JPEG
JPEG
JPEG
1
1
1
41/61
41/61
1
1+JPEG
1+JPEG
1+JPEG
41/61+JPEG
41/61+JPEG
1+JPEG
 Can I merge images recorded on the card?
With [Select image for multi. expo.], you can select the first single
exposure from the images recorded on the card (p.231). Note that
you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card.
 Are multiple exposures possible with Live View shooting?
With [On:Func/Ctrl] set, you can shoot multiple exposures with Live
View shooting (p.255). Note that [Full-frame] will be applied for
[z4: Crop/aspect ratio] for shooting.
 What file numbers are used for saving merged multiple-exposures?
If all images are set to be saved, the merged multiple-exposure
image file number will be the serial number coming after the file
number of the final single exposure used to create the merged
multiple-exposure image.
 Will auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure shooting?
As long as [52: Auto power off] is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the power will turn off automatically after 30 min. of nonoperation. If the auto power off takes effect, multiple-exposure
shooting will end, and multiple-exposure settings will be canceled.
Before starting the multiple-exposure shooting, the auto power off
will take effect as set with the camera, and multiple-exposure
settings will be canceled.
233
2 Mirror LockupN
Camera vibrations caused by the mirror’s reflex action when the picture
is taken is called “mirror shock”. Mirror lockup keeps the mirror up
before and while shooting to reduce blur caused by camera vibrations.
Useful when shooting closeups (macro photography), using a super
telephoto lens, and shooting at slow shutter speeds.
1
Select [Mirror lockup].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Mirror
lockup], then press <0>.
the desired setting.
2 Select
 When you exit the menu, <2> will
be displayed on the LCD panel.
the picture.
3 Take
 If you select [Press V twice to
shoot], press the shutter button
completely to lock up the mirror, then
press it completely again to take a
picture.
 If you select [Shoot * sec. after
press], press the shutter button
completely to lock up the mirror. A
picture will be taken after the set time
elapses. You can select 1/8 sec. after,
1/4 sec. after, 1/2 sec. after, 1 sec.
after, or 2 sec. after.
234
2 Mirror LockupN
Minimizing Blurred Photos
 Use a sturdy tripod suited for the camera weight. Mount the camera
securely on the tripod.
 Using a remote switch or a remote controller is recommended
(p.237).
 In addition to mirror lockup, Silent LV shooting (p.266) and Silent
single shooting (p.142) are also effective.
 When using mirror lockup, setting [Shoot * sec. after press] is
recommended. Selecting a longer time, such as [Shoot 2 sec. after
press], will increase time before the shot, reducing mirror shock.
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 In very bright light, such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day,
take the picture promptly after mirror lockup is stabilized.
 When [Press V twice to shoot] is set, single shooting will take effect
even if the drive mode is set to continuous shooting.
 If [z4: Interval timer] or [z4: Bulb timer] is set to [Enable], you
cannot select [Press V twice to shoot].
 If you use [Shoot *sec. after press] for Multi Shot Noise Reduction
shooting or HDR shooting, the [Shoot *sec. after press] setting will be
applied only to the first shot. (Continuous shooting will apply for the
second and subsequent shots.)
 During mirror lockup, shooting function settings and menu are disabled.
 When [Shoot * sec. after press] is set, you can also use the self-timer or
bulb timer with mirror lockup.
 If 30 sec. elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back down
automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely locks up the mirror
again.
 For mirror lockup, using a tripod and Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold
separately) or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold separately) is
recommended (p.237).
 You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.237) with mirror
lockup. Setting the remote controller to a 2-sec. delay is recommended.
235
Using the Eyepiece Cover
When you use the self-timer, bulb, or a remote switch and do not look
through the viewfinder, stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the
picture to look dark. To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.35)
attached to the camera strap.
During Live View shooting and movie shooting, it is not necessary to
attach the eyepiece cover.
1
Detach the eyecup.
 While grasping both sides of the
eyecup, slide it upward to detach it.
the eyepiece cover.
2 Attach
 Slide the eyepiece cover down into
the eyepiece groove to attach it.
 After you finish shooting, detach the
eyepiece cover and attach the
eyecup.
236
F Using a Remote Switch
You can connect the Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold separately) or
Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold separately) or any EOS
accessory equipped with an N3-type terminal to the camera for
shooting (p.454).
To operate the accessory, refer to its instruction manual.
1 Open the terminal cover.
the plug to the remote
2 Connect
control terminal.
 Connect the plug as shown in the
illustration.
 To disconnect the plug, grasp the
silver part and pull.
R Remote Control Shooting
With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately), you
can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet
from the camera. You can either shoot immediately or
use a 2-sec. delay.
You can also use Remote Controller RC-1 and RC-5.
1 Focus on the subject.
the lens’s focus mode switch
2 Set
to <MF>.
 You can also shoot with <f>.
3 Press the <o> button. (9)
237
R Remote Control Shooting
the self-timer.
4 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <5> dial to
select <Q> or <k>.
the remote controller’s
5 Press
transmit button.
Remote
control
sensor
 Point the remote controller toward the
camera’s remote control sensor, and
press the transmit button.
 The self-timer lamp lights up and the
picture is taken.
 Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by
triggering the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the camera away from
such light sources.
 If you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera and
operate it, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter
inadvertently.
 If flash light is emitted from a flash on another camera around this
camera, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter
inadvertently. Do not expose the remote control sensor to flash light from
a flash on another camera.
Remote control shooting is also possible with devices such as an EX-series
Speedlite equipped with a remote-release function (sold separately).
238
H Interval Timer Shooting
With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and the number
of shots. The camera will repeat taking one shot with the set interval
until the set number of shots are taken.
1
Select [Interval timer].
 Under the [z4] tab (the [z2] tab in
<A>), select [Interval timer], then
press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Select [Enable], then press <B>
button.
the interval and number of
3 Set
shots.
 Select the hour, minute, second, or
number of shots.
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Set the desired number, then press
<0> (Returns to <s>).
 Interval
Settable from [00:00:01] to [99:59:59].
 No. of shots
Settable from [01] to [99]. If you set [00], the camera will keep
shooting until you stop the interval timer.
239
H Interval Timer Shooting
No. of shots
Interval
Interval timer
[OK].
4 Select
 The interval timer settings will be
displayed on the menu screen.
 When you exit the menu, <H>
will be displayed on the LCD panel.
the picture.
5 Take
 Shooting will start according to the
interval timer settings.
 During interval timer shooting,
<H> will blink.
 After the set number of shots are
taken, the interval timer shooting will
stop and be automatically canceled.
 Using a tripod is recommended.
 Taking test shots is recommended.
 After the interval timer shooting starts, you can still press the shutter
button completely to take a picture as usual. However, from 5 sec. before
the next interval timer shooting, the shooting function settings, menu
operation, image playback, and other operations will be suspended, and
the camera will be ready to shoot.
 If a picture is taken or an image is being processed as the next interval
timer shooting, that interval timer shooting will be canceled. This will
make the number of interval timer images captured lower than the set
number of shots.
 Auto power off operates with the interval timer. The power will
automatically turn on approx. 1 min. before the next shot.
 Interval timer shooting can be combined with AEB, WB bracketing,
multiple exposures, and HDR mode.
 You can stop the interval timer shooting by selecting [Disable] or turning
the power switch to <2>.
240
H Interval Timer Shooting
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 If the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>, the camera will not shoot
when focus is not achieved. Setting it to <MF> and focusing manually is
recommended.
 Live View shooting, movie shooting, or bulb exposures cannot be
performed with interval timer.
 For prolonged interval timer shooting, using the DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold
separately) and AC Adapter AC-E6N (sold separately) to power the
camera is recommended.
 If a long exposure or shutter speed longer than the shooting interval is
set, the camera cannot shoot at the set interval. The camera will thereby
shoot fewer shots than the number set for interval timer shooting. Also,
the number of shots may decrease when the shutter speed and the
shooting interval are nearly the same.
 If card recording time is longer than the set shooting interval, due to card
performance or shooting settings, etc., the camera may not shoot at the
set shooting interval.
 If you use flash with interval timer shooting, set an interval longer than
the flash’s recycling time. Otherwise, if the interval is too short, the flash
may not fire.
 If the shooting interval is too short, the camera may not take a picture or
may capture an image without autofocusing.
 Interval timer shooting will be canceled and reset to [Disable] if you do
any of the following: Set the power switch to <2>, display the Live
View or movie shooting screen, set the shooting mode to <F> or a
Custom shooting mode, or use EOS Utility (EOS software, p.504).
 After interval timer shooting starts, you cannot use remote control
shooting (p.237) or remote-release shooting with an EOS-dedicated,
external Speedlite.
 During interval timer shooting, if your eye will not remain on the
viewfinder eyepiece, attach the eyepiece cover (p.236). Stray light
entering the viewfinder can throw off the exposure.
241
242
6
Flash Photography
This chapter explains how to shoot with external EXseries Speedlites (sold separately) and how to set
Speedlite settings with the camera’s menu screen.
 Flash cannot be used with movie shooting. It will not fire.
 AEB cannot be used with flash.
243
D Flash Photography
EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites
An EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) makes flash photography as
easy as normal shooting.
For detailed instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s
instruction manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all
the features of EX-series Speedlites.
To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions with the camera’s
menu, see pages 247-253.
 Flash exposure compensation
In the same way as normal exposure compensation, flash exposure
compensation can be set. You can set flash exposure compensation
up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
Press the camera’s <m> button, then turn the <5> dial while
looking in the viewfinder or at the LCD panel.
 FE lock
This enables you to attain a proper flash exposure for a specific part
of the subject. Aim the viewfinder center over the subject, press the
camera’s <B> button, then compose the shot and take the
picture.
If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.182) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
If it is difficult to achieve focus with autofocus, the EOS-dedicated, external
Speedlite will automatically emit the AF-assist beam as necessary.
244
D Flash Photography
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series
 With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> (manual exposure) or
<f> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before
shooting.
 When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the
manual flash mode.
Non-Canon Flash Units
Sync Speed
The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units at
1/200 sec. and slower speeds. With large studio flash units, be sure to
test the flash synchronization before shooting with the sync speed set
within approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec. The flash duration of such units is
longer than that of compact flash units and varies depending on the
model.
PC Terminal
 The camera’s PC terminal can be
used with flash units having a sync
cord. The PC terminal is threaded to
prevent inadvertent disconnection.
 The camera’s PC terminal has no
polarity. You can connect any sync
cord regardless of its polarity.
Cautions for Live View Shooting
If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z6:
Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.266). The flash will not fire if it is set to
[Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
245
D Flash Photography
 If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to
another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and
malfunction may result.
 Do not connect to the camera’s PC terminal any flash unit with an output
voltage of 250 V or more.
 Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It may
not fire.
A flash unit attached to the camera’s hot shoe and a flash unit connected to
the PC terminal can both be used at the same time.
246
3 Setting the FlashN
With an EX-series Speedlite having compatible flash function settings,
you can use the camera’s menu screen to set the Speedlite’s functions
and Custom Functions. Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn
on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions.
For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
instruction manual.
1
Select [External Speedlite
control].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [External
Speedlite control], then press <0>.
 The external Speedlite control screen
will appear.
the desired item.
2 Select
 Select the menu option to be set, then
press <0>.
Flash Firing
To enable flash photography, set
[Enable]. To enable only the AF-assist
beam to be emitted, set [Disable].
E-TTL II Metering
For normal flash exposures, set it to
[Evaluative]. If [Average] is set, the flash
exposure will be averaged for the entire
metered scene. Depending on the scene,
flash exposure compensation may be
necessary. This setting is for advanced
users.
247
3 Setting the FlashN
Flash Sync. Speed in Av Mode
You can set the flash-sync speed for
flash photography in the aperture-priority
AE (f) mode.

: Auto
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/200
sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. High-speed sync is
also possible.

: 1/200-1/60sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.
It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,
the background may come out dark.

: 1/200 sec. (fixed)
The flash-sync speed is fixed at 1/200 sec. This more effectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/200-1/60sec.
auto]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out
darker than with [1/200-1/60sec. auto].
If [1/200-1/60sec. auto] or [1/200 sec. (fixed)] is set, high-speed sync is not
possible in the <f> mode.
248
3 Setting the FlashN
Flash Function Settings
The screen display and setting options will vary depending on the
Speedlite model, current flash mode, Speedlite’s Custom Function
settings, etc.
To see which functions your Speedlite (sold separately) provides, refer
to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.
Sample display
Wireless functions/
Flash ratio control
Flash mode
Shutter
synchronization
Flash zoom
(Flash coverage)
Flash exposure
bracketing
Flash exposure
compensation
 Flash mode
You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.
[E-TTL II flash metering] is the standard
mode of EX-series Speedlites for
automatic flash shooting.
[Manual flash] is for setting the
Speedlite’s [Flash output level]
yourself.
Regarding other flash modes, refer to the
instruction manual of a Speedlite
compatible with the functions.
249
3 Setting the FlashN
 Wireless functions / Flash ratio control
Wireless (multiple) flash shooting is
possible with radio or optical
transmission.
For details on wireless flash, refer to the
instruction manual of a Speedlite
compatible with wireless flash shooting.
With a macro flash (MR-14EX II, etc.)
compatible with flash function settings,
you can set the flash ratio between flash
tubes or flash heads A and B, or use
wireless flash with slave units.
For details on flash ratio control, refer to
the macro flash’s instruction manual.
 Flash zoom (Flash coverage)
With Speedlites having a zooming flash
head, you can set the flash coverage.
Normally, set this to [AUTO] so that the
camera will automatically set the flash
coverage to match the lens focal length.
250
3 Setting the FlashN
 Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [First-curtain
synchronization] so that the flash fires
immediately after the exposure starts.
If [Second-curtain synchronization] is set, the flash will fire right
before the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter
speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night
with a more natural feel. With second-curtain synchronization, two
flashes will be fired: once when you press the shutter button completely,
and once immediately before the exposure ends.
If [High-speed synchronization] is set, the flash can be used at all
shutter speeds. This is convenient when you want to shoot with
background blur (open aperture) in locations such as outdoors in
daylight.
 Flash exposure compensation
You can set flash exposure
compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop
increments.
For details, refer to the Speedlite’s
instruction manual.
 Flash exposure bracketing
While changing the flash output
automatically, three shots will be taken.
For details, refer to the instruction
manual of a Speedlite equipped with
flash exposure bracketing.
251
3 Setting the FlashN
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25
sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain
synchronization will be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain
synchronization] is set.
 With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings,
you can only set the following: [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], and
[Flash exposure compensation] under [Flash function settings].
([Shutter synchronization] can also be set with certain EX-series
Speedlites.)
 If flash exposure compensation is set with the Speedlite, you cannot set
the flash exposure compensation with the camera. If it is set with both
the camera and Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.
252
3 Setting the FlashN
Flash Custom Function Settings
For details on the Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the Speedlite’s
(sold separately) instruction manual.
1
Select [Flash C.Fn settings].
the desired functions.
2 Set
 Select the number, then press <0>.
 Select the setting, then press <0>.
With an EX-series Speedlite, if the [Flash metering mode] Custom
Function is set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash), the Speedlite will always
fire at full output.
Clear Settings
1 Select [Clear settings].
the settings to be cleared.
2 Select
 Select [Clear flash settings] or
[Clear all Speedlite C.Fn’s], then
press <0>.
 On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK]. Then the flash settings or
Custom Function settings will all be
cleared.
The Speedlite’s Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled with the
camera’s [External Speedlite control] screen. Set it with the Speedlite.
253
254
7
Shooting with the LCD Monitor
(Live View Shooting)
You can shoot while viewing the
picture on the camera’s LCD
monitor. This is called “Live View
shooting”.
Live View shooting is enabled by
setting the Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch to <A>.
 If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the
LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.
Using a tripod is recommended.
Remote Live View Shooting
With EOS Utility (EOS software, p.504) installed on your computer,
you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely
while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual.
255
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
1
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image.
2 Display
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
 The Live View image will closely
match the brightness level of the
actual image you capture.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method (p.268).
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely.
 The picture is taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD monitor.
 When the playback display ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
 Press the <0> button to exit the
Live View shooting.
 The image’s field of view is approx. 100% (when the image-recording
quality is set to JPEG 73 with full-frame).
 In the <d> <s> <f> <a> <F> shooting mode, you can check the
depth of field by pressing the depth-of-field preview button.
 During continuous shooting, the exposure set for the first shot will also
be applied to subsequent shots.
 You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.237) for Live
View shooting.
256
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Enabling Live View Shooting
Set [z5: Live View shoot.] (the [z3]
tab in <A>) to [Enable].
Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting
Temperature
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
Possible shots
Approx. 220 shots
Approx. 210 shots
 The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N and
CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, total continuous Live View shooting
time will be as follows: At room temperature (23°C/73°F): Approx. 1 hr. 45 min.,
At low temperatures (0°C/32°F): Approx. 1 hr. 40 min.
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 General Live View Shooting Cautions are on pages 277-278.
 You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.
 When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot
will be taken. Also, the time it takes to take the picture after you press the
shutter button completely will be slightly longer than with viewfinder
shooting.
 If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn
off automatically after the time set in [52: Auto power off] (p.69). If [52:
Auto power off] is set to [Disable], Live View shooting will end
automatically after 30 min. (camera power remains on).
 With the HDMI cable HTC-100 (sold separately), you can display the
Live View image on a TV screen (p.351). Note that no sound will be
output. If the picture does not appear on the TV screen, set the [53:
Video system] correctly to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the
video system of your TV set).
257
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Information Display
 Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
Possible shots/Seconds
remaining on self-timer
Maximum burst
Battery level
Temperature warning
HDR shooting/
Multiple exposures/
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Number of remaining multiple exposures
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Histogram display
Card for recording
Card
Shooting mode/
Scene icon
Image-recording
quality
AF method
Drive mode
White balance/
White balance
correction
Metering mode
Crop/aspect ratio
Picture Style
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
AE lock
Flash ready/
Flash off/Hi-speed sync
Shutter speed
Flash exposure compensation
Aperture
Exposure compensation
Eye-Fi card transmission status
258
Exposure simulation
AEB/FEB
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
GPS connection indicator
Digital compass
Exposure level indicator
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
 The histogram can be displayed when [z5: Expo. simulation: Enable]
(p.265) is set.
 You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button
(p.75). Note that if the AF method is set to [u+Tracking] or the camera
is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level cannot
be displayed.
 When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image
brightness is close to what the captured image will look like.
 If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at
a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of lowor bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect
the exposure setting. Note that the noise may be more noticeable than
the actual image recorded.
 If Multi Shot Noise Reduction, bulb exposure, or flash is used, the
<g> icon and histogram will be displayed in gray (just as reference).
The histogram may not be properly displayed in low- or bright-light
conditions.
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact
burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems
or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.
259
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Scene Icons
In the <A> shooting mode, the camera detects the scene type and
sets everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene
type is indicated on the upper left of the screen. For certain scenes or
shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
Subject
Portrait*1
Movement
Background
Non-portrait
Nature and
Outdoor
Scene
Close*2
Movement
Background
Color
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky
Included
Light blue
Backlit
*3
Sunset
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark
With
Tripod
Dark blue
*4*5
*3
*4*5
*3
*1:Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2:Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension
Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3:The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.
*4:Displayed when all the following conditions apply: The shooting scene is dark, it
is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on a tripod.
260
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
*5:Displayed with any of the lenses below:
• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
• EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
• Image Stabilizer lenses marketed in 2012 or later.
*4+*5:If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow down.
Final Image Simulation
The final image simulation shows the results of the current settings for
Picture Style, white balance and other functions in the Live View image,
so you can see what the captured image will look like.
The Live View image will automatically show the effects of the settings
listed below.
Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting
 Picture Style
* Sharpness (Strength), contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be
reflected.










White balance
White balance correction
Metering mode
Exposure (with [z5: Expo. simulation: Enable] set)
Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Highlight tone priority
Crop/aspect ratio (shooting area confirmation)
261
Shooting Function Settings
Crop/Aspect
You can perform crop shooting, or shoot with the set aspect ratio for
Live View shooting. To set them with the menu, see page 154. To set
them with the Quick Control screen, see the next page.
If you use [83: Custom Controls] to
assign [Switch between crop/aspect]
to the <B> button, you can just
press the <B> button while
displaying Live View image to switch the
Crop/aspect setting. For details, see
page 423.
If Crop/aspect is set for Live View shooting, the image’s field of view will be
approx. 100% (when the image-recording quality is set to JPEG 73).
B/q/R/f/y/i/A Settings
When the Live View image is displayed, if you press the <n>,
<o>, <m>, or <b> button, the setting screen will appear on
the LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the
respective shooting function.
 By pressing the <n> button and then the <B> button, you
can set WB shift and WB bracketing.
When you set w (Partial metering) or r (Spot metering), a metering circle
will be displayed in the center.
262
Shooting Function Settings
Q Quick Control
In the <d> <s> <f> <a> <F> modes, the AF method, Drive
mode, Metering mode, Crop/aspect ratio, Recording/playing back
card and image quality, White balance, Picture Style, and Auto
Lighting Optimizer can be set.
In the <A> mode, only the functions in bold above can be set.
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The settable functions will be
displayed.
1
a function and set it.
2 Select
 Use <9> to select a function.
 The setting of the selected function is
displayed on the screen.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it.
 To set the RAW image-recording
quality, press <0>.
 To select the card for recording/
playing back, WB shift/bracketing, or
Picture Style parameters, press the
<B> button.
 To set Auto white balance, select
[Q], then press <0>.
 Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to Live View shooting.
If [Crop/aspect ratio] is set, [Shooting area] (p.154) cannot be set.
263
3 Menu Function Settings
z5
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <A>, the Live
View shooting menu options will appear
under the [z5] and [z6] tabs (the
[z3] tab in <A>).
The settable functions on this menu screen apply only to Live View
shooting. They do not work with viewfinder shooting (settings
become invalid).
 Live View shooting
You can set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable].
 AF method
You can select [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Single]. See pages
268-272 for the AF method.
 Continuous AF
The default setting is [Disable].
When [Enable] is set, the camera attains rough focus on the subject
continuously. This makes it quicker to achieve focus when you press
the shutter button halfway. If [Enable] is set, the lens will operate
constantly and consume more battery power. This will reduce the
number of possible shots due to shorter battery life.
If you want to set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> during
Continuous AF, first stop Live View shooting.
264
3 Menu Function Settings
 Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you
compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the
subject.
 Exposure simulationN
Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness of
the actual image (exposure) will look.
• Enable (g)
The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual
brightness (exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure
compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly.
• During e (E/g)
Normally, the image is displayed at the standard brightness to
make the Live View image easy to see. The image will be
displayed close to the actual brightness (exposure) of the resulting
image only while you hold down the depth-of-field preview button.
• Disable (E)
The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live
View image easy to see. Even if you set exposure compensation,
the image is displayed at the standard brightness.
265
3 Menu Function Settings
z6 N
 Silent LV shootingN
• Mode 1
You can suppress the camera noise when shooting. Continuous
shooting is also possible. If <o> is set, you can shoot at a
maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 5.0 fps.
• Mode 2
When the shutter button is pressed completely, only one shot will
be taken. While you keep holding down the shutter button, the
camera operation will be suspended. Then when you return to the
shutter button’s halfway position, the camera operation will
resume. The shooting noise is thereby minimized. Even if
continuous shooting is set, only a single shot will be taken.
• Disable
Be sure to set it to [Disable] if you use a TS-E lens for shifting
or tilting the lens or if you use an Extension Tube. If [Mode 1] or
[Mode 2] is set, the standard exposure may not be obtained, or an
irregular exposure may result.
 If you use [Mode 1] with continuous shooting, the [Disable] setting will
be applied to the second and subsequent shots.
 When shooting with flash, the [Disable] setting will be applied regardless
of the [Silent LV shoot.] setting. (Silent shooting cannot be performed.)
 When using a non-Canon flash unit, set it to [Disable]. The flash will not
fire if it is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
 If [Mode 2] is set and you use a Remote Controller (p.237), the operation
will be the same as with [Mode 1].
266
3 Menu Function Settings
 Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
Performing any of the following operations will stop Live View shooting.
To start Live View shooting again, press the <0> button.
• Selecting [z3: Dust Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning], [54: Clear
all camera settings], or [54: zfirmware ver.].
267
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Selecting the AF Method
You can set the AF method to [u(face)+Tracking] (p.269) or
[FlexiZone - Single] (p.271) to suit the shooting conditions or subject.
If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens’s focus mode switch to
<MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.275).
Select the AF method.
 Under the [z5] tab (the [z3] tab in
<A>), select [AF method].
 Select the desired AF method, then
press <0>.
 When the Live View image is
displayed, you can press the
<o> button to select the AF
method.
268
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
u(face)+Tracking: c
The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the
AF point <p> also moves to track the face.
1
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
an AF point.
2 Select
 When a face is detected, the <p>
frame will appear over the face to be
focused on.
 If multiple faces are detected, <q>
will be displayed. Use <9> to move
the <q> frame over the face you
want to focus on.
 If no faces are detected, the camera
will switch to FlexiZone - Single
(p.271).
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.256).
269
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
 Focusing on a subject other than a human face
Press <9> or <0> and the AF frame < > will appear in the
center. Then use <9> to move the AF frame over the desired
subject. Once the AF frame < > achieves focus, it will track the
subject even if the subject moves or if you change the composition.
 If the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be
possible. Adjust the focus manually (p.275) so that the face can be
detected, then perform AF.
 An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
 Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the
picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
 The <p> may cover only part of the face.
 Since AF is not possible with a face or a subject detected near the edge
of the picture, the <p> or < > will be grayed out. If you press the
shutter button halfway in this situation, the subject will be focused on with
the FlexiZone - Single method.
 The size of the AF frame varies depending on the subject or the setting
of [z4: Crop/aspect ratio].
270
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
FlexiZone - Single: d
The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you
want to focus on a particular subject.
the Live View image.
1 Display
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
 The AF point < > will appear.
AF point
the AF point.
2 Move
 Use <9> to move the AF point to
where you want to focus. (It cannot
be moved to the edge of the screen.)
 Pressing <9>, <0>, or <L> button
will return the AF point to the screen’s
center.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.256).
271
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
 The size of the AF point varies depending on the setting of [z4: Crop/
aspect ratio].
 During movie shooting, if [Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable], the AF
point will be displayed in a larger size.
Notes for AF
AF Operation
 Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway
will focus again.
 The image brightness may change during and after the AF
operation.
 If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,
the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens,
exit Live View shooting and execute AF under the actual light
source.
 If you cannot achieve focus with AF, set the lens’s focus mode switch to
<MF> and focus manually (p.275).
 If you shoot the subject at the periphery and it is slightly out of focus, aim
the center AF point over the subject you want to focus on, focus again,
and then take the picture.
 The external Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam. However, if an
EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used,
the LED light will turn on for AF-assist when necessary.
272
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
 Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color flat
surfaces or when highlight or shadow details are clipped.
 Subjects in low light.
 Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the
horizontal direction.
 Subjects with repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows,
computer keyboards, etc.).
 Fine lines and subject outlines.
 Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps
changing.
 Night scenes or dots of light.
 Under fluorescent or LED lighting when the image flickers.
 Extremely small subjects.
 Subjects at the edge of the picture.
 Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Car with a highly
reflective body, etc.)
 Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal
in a cage, etc.)
 Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and will not stay still
due to camera shake or subject blur.
 A subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
 Performing AF while the subject is very far out of focus.
 Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
 A special effect filter is used.
 Noise (spots, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
Using AF with any of the following lenses may take longer to achieve focus,
or the correct focus may not be achieved.
EF50mm f/1.4 USM, EF50mm f/1.8 II, EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro,
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM
For information on discontinued lenses, refer to the Canon website.
273
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Magnified View for FlexiZone - Single
With [FlexiZone - Single], pressing the
<u> button will magnify the image to
check the focus in the following
sequence: approx. 6x, then approx. 16x.
 The image will be magnified at the AF point.
 If you press the shutter button halfway, AF will be performed in the
magnified view.
 If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view
and perform AF.
 Magnified view is not possible with [u +Tracking].
 If AF is performed in the normal view and then magnify the view,
accurate focus may not be achieved.
 AF speed differs between normal view and magnified view.
 Continuous AF (p.264) or Movie Servo AF (p.313) does not work during
the magnified view.
 The [x6] and [x16] views are always displayed in magnification of the
view with [Full-frame] setting, regardless of the [z4: Crop/aspect
ratio] setting.
 During magnified view, achieving focus becomes more difficult due to
camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
 If [z4: Crop/aspect ratio] is set to [1.3x (crop)] or [1.6x (crop)], [X1.3]
or [X1.6] will be displayed when starting the magnified view.
 In magnified view, the exposure is locked. (Shutter speed and aperture
will be displayed in red.)
274
MF: Focusing Manually
You can magnify the image and focus precisely with MF (manual focus).
1
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <MF>.
 Turn the lens’s focusing ring to focus
roughly.
the magnifying frame.
2 Display
 Press the <u> button.
 The magnifying frame will appear.
Magnifying frame
the magnifying frame.
3 Move
 Use <9> to move the magnifying
frame to the position where you want
to focus.
 Pressing <9>, <0>, or <L> button
will return the magnifying frame to the
screen’s center.
the image.
4 Magnify
 Each time you press the <u> button,
the magnification within the frame will
change in the following sequence:
Normal view 9 1x 9 6x 9 16x
AE lock
Magnified area position
Magnification (Approx.)
 While in magnified view, you can use
<9> to scroll around the magnified
image.
275
MF: Focusing Manually
manually.
5 Focus
 While looking at the magnified image,
turn the lens’s focusing ring to focus.
 After achieving focus, press the <u>
button to return to the normal view.
the picture.
6 Take
 Check the exposure, then press the
shutter button completely to take the
picture (p.256).
 If [z4: Crop/aspect ratio] is set to [1.3x (crop)] or [1.6x (crop)], [X1.3]
or [X1.6] will be displayed when starting the magnified view.
 When [1.3x (crop)] or [1.6x (crop)] is set, the magnifying frame will be
displayed larger than usual.
 In magnified view, the exposure is locked. (Shutter speed and aperture
will be displayed in red.)
276
General Live View Shooting Cautions
Image Quality
 When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
 Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in
the image.
 If Live View shooting is used continuously for a prolonged period, the
camera’s internal temperature may rise, and image quality may
deteriorate. Always exit Live View shooting when you are not shooting.
 If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is
high, image quality may deteriorate. Exit Live View shooting and wait a
few minutes before shooting again.
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
 If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live
View shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red
<E> icon will appear.
 The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. It is recommended that you temporarily exit Live View
shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again.
 The red <E> icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Exit the Live View shooting or
turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.
 Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period
will cause the <s> or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not
shooting, always turn off the camera.
 If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot
with high ISO speed or long exposure may deteriorate even before the
white <s> icon is displayed.
Shooting Results
 In magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in
red. If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come
out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.
 Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be captured
in the normal view range.
277
General Live View Shooting Cautions
Live View Image
 Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect
the brightness of the captured image.
 Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed
Live View image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image
recorded will have less noise. (The image quality of the Live View image
is different from that of the recorded image.)
 If the light source (illumination) within the image changes, the screen
may flicker. If this happens, exit Live View shooting and resume Live
View shooting under the actual light source.
 If you point the camera in a different direction, it may throw off the Live
View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness
level stabilizes before shooting.
 If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image
will correctly show the bright area.
 In low light, if you set the [52: LCD brightness] to a bright setting, noise
or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image. However, the
noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image.
 When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more
pronounced than in the actual image.
Custom Functions
 During Live View shooting, some Custom Functions will not work
(settings become invalid). For details, see p.400-401.
Lens and Flash
 If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may decrease the number of
possible shots. If you use a tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not
necessary, it is recommended that you set the IS switch to <2>.
 The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when
using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode,
available since the second half of 2011.
 FE lock and modeling flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used.
278
8
Shooting Movies
Movie shooting is enabled by
setting the Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch to <k>.
 For cards that can record movies, see page 5.
 If you handhold the camera and shoot movies, camera
shake can cause blurred movies. Using a tripod is
recommended.
Full HD 1080
Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with HighDefinition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning
lines).
279
k Shooting Movies
/
Autoexposure Shooting
When the shooting mode is set to <A>, <d>, or <F>, autoexposure
control will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness. Exposure
control will be the same for all the shooting modes.
the Mode Dial to <A>, <d>,
1 Set
or <F>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
 The reflex mirror will make a sound,
then the image will appear on the
LCD monitor.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Before shooting a movie, focus with
AF or manual focus (p.268-276).
 When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method.
the movie.
4 Shoot
 Press the <0> button to start
Recording movies
Built-in microphone
280
shooting a movie.
 While the movie is being shot, the
“o” mark will be displayed on the
upper right of the screen.
 Sound will be recorded by the built-in
microphone.
 To stop shooting the movie, press the
<0> button again.
k Shooting Movies
Shutter-priority AE
When the shooting mode is <s>, you can manually set the shutter
speed for movie shooting. The ISO speed and aperture will be set
automatically to suit the brightness and obtain a standard exposure.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
the desired shutter speed.
3 Set
 While looking at the LCD monitor,
Shutter speed
turn the <6> dial. The settable
shutter speeds depend on the frame
rate.
• 6 5 4:
1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.
• 8 7: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.
and shoot the movie.
4 Focus
 The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.280).
 Changing the shutter speed during movie shooting is not recommended
since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.
 When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less
smooth the subject’s movement will look.
 If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
281
k Shooting Movies
Aperture-priority AE
When the shooting mode is <f>, you can manually set the aperture
for movie shooting. The ISO speed and shutter speed will be set
automatically to suit the brightness and obtain a standard exposure.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
the desired aperture.
3 Set
 While looking at the LCD monitor,
turn the <6> dial.
Aperture
and shoot the movie.
4 Focus
 The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.280).
Changing the aperture during movie shooting is not recommended since
variations in the exposure, due to the drive of the lens aperture, will be
recorded.
282
k Shooting Movies
ISO Speed in the <A> Mode
 The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 6400.
ISO Speed in the <d>, <s>, <f>, and <F> Modes
 The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 6400.
 Under [z2: ISO speed settings], if you set the [ISO speed
range]’s [Maximum] setting to [H (12800)] in the <d>, <f>, or
<F> mode (p.161), the automatic ISO range will be expanded to H
(equivalent to ISO 12800). Even if you set the [Maximum] and
[Minimum] to a narrower range than the default ISO range (ISO 100
- ISO 6400), it will not take effect.
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.187), the
automatic ISO range will be ISO 200 - ISO 6400.
 Under [z2: ISO speed settings], [Auto ISO range] and [Min.
shutter spd.] cannot be set (p.162-163) for movie shooting. [z2:
ISO speed settings] cannot be selected in the <s> mode.
If [Minimum] is set to [L(50)] in [ISO speed range], and you switch from still
photo shooting to movie shooting, the minimum setting for automatic ISO
range for movie shooting will be ISO 100. It cannot be expanded to ISO 50.
283
k Shooting Movies
Notes for <A>, < d>, <s>, <f>, and <F> Modes
 In the <A> mode, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera
is displayed on the upper left of the screen (p.285).
 You can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the <A> button
(except in the <A> mode, p.217). The exposure setting will be
displayed for the time length set with [z6: Metering timer]. After
applying AE lock during movie shooting, you can cancel it by pressing
the <S> button. (AE lock setting is retained until you press the <S>
button.)
 You can set exposure compensation up to ±3 stops by setting the
<R> switch to the left and turning the <5> dial (except in the
<A> mode).
 Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the ISO speed and shutter
speed at the screen bottom. This is the exposure setting for taking a still
photo (p.289). The exposure setting for movie shooting is not displayed.
Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting may differ from that for
still photo shooting.
 In the <A>, <d>, and <F> modes, the shutter speed and aperture will
not be recorded in the movie’s Exif information.
Using an EX-series Speedlite (Sold Separately)
Equipped with an LED Light
During movie shooting in the <A>, <d>, <s>, <f>, and <F>
modes, this camera supports the function that turns on the Speedlite’s
LED light automatically in low-light conditions. For detailed
instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s instruction manual.
284
k Shooting Movies
Scene Icons
During movie shooting in the <A> mode, an icon representing the
scene detected by the camera will be displayed, and the shooting will
be adapted to that scene. For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the
icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
Subject
Non-Portrait
Portrait*1
Background
Nature and
Outdoor Scene
Close*2
Background
Color
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky Included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset
*3
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark blue
Dark
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension
Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.
285
k Shooting Movies
Manual Exposure Shooting
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for
movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for
advanced users.
1 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
the ISO speed.
3 Set
 Press the <m> button.
 The ISO speed setting screen will
appear on the LCD monitor.
 Turn the <6> dial to set the ISO
speed.
 For details on the ISO speed, see the
next page.
the shutter speed and
4 Set
aperture.
Shutter speed
Aperture
286
 Press the shutter button halfway and
check the exposure level indicator.
 To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial. The settable shutter
speeds vary depending on the frame
rate.
• 6 5 4:
1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.
• 8 7: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.
 To set the aperture, turn the <5>
dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch to the left, then turn the <6>
or <5> dial.
k Shooting Movies
and shoot the movie.
5 Focus
 The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.280).
ISO Speed in the <a> Mode
 With [Auto] (A), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO
100 - ISO 6400. Under [z2: ISO speed settings], if you set [ISO
speed range]’s [Maximum] setting to [H (12800)] (p.161), the
automatic ISO range will not expand to the H maximum. Even if you
set the [Maximum] and [Minimum] to a narrower range than the
default ISO range (ISO 100 - ISO 6400), it will not take effect.
 You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 6400 in
1/3-stop increments. Under [z2: ISO speed settings], if you set
[ISO speed range]’s [Maximum] setting to [H (12800)], the manual
ISO speed setting range’s maximum will be expanded to H
(equivalent to ISO 12800). You can also set the [Maximum] and
[Minimum] to a range narrower than the default range (ISO 100 ISO 6400).
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.187), the auto
or manual ISO setting range will be ISO 200 or higher.
 Under [z2: ISO speed settings], [Auto ISO range] and [Min.
shutter spd.] cannot be set (p.162-163) for movie shooting.
287
k Shooting Movies
 If [Minimum] is set to [L(50)] in [ISO speed range], and you switch from
still photo shooting to movie shooting, the minimum setting for manual
ISO range for movie shooting will be ISO 100. It cannot be expanded to
ISO 50.
 Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not
recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.
 When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less
smooth the subject’s movement will look.
 If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
 Under [83: Custom Controls], if [s: Expo comp (hold btn, turn
)] is set (p.423), you can set exposure compensation while Auto ISO
is set.
 When Auto ISO is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed.
 If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (p.289)
compared to when the <A> button was pressed.
 By pressing the <B> button, you can display the histogram.
288
k Shooting Movies
Information Display
 Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
Maximum burst
Possible shots/Seconds
remaining on self-timer
Movie shooting mode/
Scene icon
:Autoexposure (A)
:Autoexposure (d/F)
:Shutter-priority
:Aperture-priority
:Manual exposure
a :Time-lapse movie
AF method
Movie shooting remaining time*/Elapsed time
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Battery level
Temperature warning
Histogram (a mode)
Time code
Writing indicator
Card for recording
Card
Recording movie
Image-recording
quality
Drive mode
Movie recording size
White balance
Frame rate
Picture Style
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Compression
method
Exposure mode
L: Autoexposure
:Shutterpriority AE
: Aperturepriority AE
K: Manual
exposure
Movie Servo AF
Recording level: Manual
LED light
AE lock
Eye-Fi card transmission status
Shutter speed
Digital compass
Recording level meter
Aperture
Attenuator
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
Wind filter
Exposure level indicator
GPS connection indicator
Exposure compensation
* Applies to a single movie clip.
289
k Shooting Movies
 You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button (p.75).
 Note that if the AF method is set to [u +Tracking] or the camera is
connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable (p.351), the electronic level
cannot be displayed.
 The electronic level, grid lines, or histogram cannot be displayed during
movie shooting. (The display will disappear when you start shooting a
movie.)
 When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will
change to the elapsed time.
Cautions for Movie Shooting
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image
sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 If you shoot something that has fine detail, moire or false colors may result.
 Under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.], even if [Record func.] is set
to [Rec. to multiple] (p.147), the movie cannot be recorded to both the
CF card [f] and SD card [g]. If [Rec. separately] or [Rec. to multiple]
is set, the movie will be recorded to the card which is set for [Playback].
 If <Q> or <Qw> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during
movie shooting, the white balance may also change.
 If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie may flicker.
 Shooting a few test movies is recommended where you will perform
zooming during movie shooting. Zooming during movie shooting may
result in recording of changes in exposure or mechanical sound of the
lens, or images may be out of focus.
 When an SD card is selected as a card to record images and you cannot
shoot movies even if the card still has storage capacity, transfer the
images recorded on the card to a computer, etc. then format the card.
 During movie shooting, you cannot magnify the image even if you press
the <u> button.
 Be careful not to cover the built-in microphone (p.280) with your finger, etc.
 [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] (p.183) cannot be set.
 If you connect or disconnect the HDMI cable during movie shooting, the
movie shooting will end.
 General Movie Shooting Cautions are on pages 317-318.
 If necessary, also read General Live View Shooting Cautions on
pages 277-278.
290
k Shooting Movies
Notes for Movie Shooting
 Movie-related settings are under the [z4] and [z5] tabs (p.313). In the
<A> mode, they are under the [z2] and [z3] tabs.
 A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie. If the file size exceeds
4 GB, a new file will be created for every subsequent approx. 4 GB.
 The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (when the movie
recording size is set to L).
 You can also focus on the image by pressing the <p> button.
 Under [z5: V button function], if [
/k] [q/k] is selected, you
can press the shutter button completely to start or stop the movie
shooting (p.316).
 Monaural sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphone (p.280).
 Stereo sound recording is also possible by connecting the Directional
Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) to the camera’s external
microphone IN terminal (p.27) as the external microphone is given the
priority.
 You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.237) to start
and stop the movie shooting if the drive mode is <Q> or <k>. Set
the shooting timing switch to <2> (2-sec. delay), then press the transmit
button. If the switch is set to <o> (immediate shooting), still photo
shooting will take effect.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the total movie recording time
will be as follows: At room temperature (23°C/73°F): Approx. 1 hr. 30
min., At low temperatures (0°C/32°F): Approx. 1 hr. 25 min. (with [z4:
Movie Servo AF: Disable] set).
 The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting when using a
(super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode, available
since the second half of 2011.
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact
burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or
very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.
291
k Shooting Movies
Final Image Simulation
The final image simulation shows the results of the current settings for
Picture Style, white balance and other functions in the image so you can
see what the captured image will look like.
During movie shooting, the image displayed will automatically show the
effects of the settings listed below.
Final Image Simulation for Movie Shooting
 Picture Style
* Sharpness (Strength), contrast, color saturation, and color tone will be
reflected.








White balance
White balance correction
Exposure
Depth of field (except during time-lapse movie shooting)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Highlight tone priority
292
k Shooting Movies
Shooting Still Photos
While shooting a movie, you can also
take a still photo by pressing the shutter
button completely.
Taking Still Photos During Movie Shooting
 If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the movie will record
a still moment lasting approx. 1 sec.
 The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie
shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is
displayed.
 The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the card.
 Under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.], if [Record func.]
(p.146) is set to [Standard] or [Auto switch card], the movies and
still photos will be recorded to the same card. If [Rec. separately] or
[Rec. to multiple] is set, the movies will be recorded to the card set
for [Playback] (p.148). The still photos will be recorded at the
image-recording quality set for the respective card.
 Functions particular to still photo shooting are shown below.
Function
Settings
Imagerecording
Quality
As set in [z1: Image quality].
When the movie recording size is [1920x1080] or [1280x720], the
aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the size is [640x480], the aspect
ratio will be 4:3.
ISO Speed*
•
•
•
•
Exposure
Setting
• <A>, <d>, and <F>: Automatically-set shutter speed and
aperture.
• <s>: Manually-set shutter speed and automatically-set aperture.
• <f>: Manually-set aperture and automatically-set shutter speed.
• <a>: Manually-set shutter speed and aperture.
<A>: ISO 100 - ISO 3200
<d>, <f>, and <F>: ISO 100 - ISO 3200
<s>: ISO 100 - ISO 6400
<a>: See “ISO Speed in the <a> mode” on page 287.
* If highlight tone priority is set, the ISO speed range will start from ISO 200.
293
k Shooting Movies
 If [z5: V button function] is set to [
/k] or [q/k] (p.316), you
cannot take still photos.
 Still photo shooting during movie shooting will have approx. 100%
coverage with L, w, and x (when the image-recording quality is
set to JPEG 73).
 AEB cannot be used.
 Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.
 Continuous still photo shooting is possible during movie shooting.
However, the captured images will not be displayed on the screen.
Depending on the still photo’s image-recording quality, number of shots
during continuous shooting, card performance, etc., movie shooting may
stop automatically.
 AF is possible during movie shooting. However, the following may occur:
• Focus may become far off momentarily.
• The brightness of the recorded movie may change.
• The recorded movie may be momentarily still.
• The movie may record the lens operation noise.
• If focus cannot be achieved, you cannot shoot still photos.
 Exposure compensation up to ±3 stops can be applied for still photo
shooting during movie shooting.
 If you want to shoot still photos continuously during movie shooting,
using a high-speed card is recommended. Setting a smaller imagerecording quality for still photos and shooting fewer continuous still
photos are also recommended.
 You can shoot still photos in all drive modes.
 The self-timer can be set before you start shooting a movie. During
movie shooting, the camera will switch to single-image shooting.
294
Shooting Function Settings
B/R/f/i/A Settings
If you press the <n>, <o>, <m>, or <b> button while
the image is displayed on the LCD monitor, the setting screen will
appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to
set the respective function.
 During manual-exposure shooting (p.286), you can press the
<m> button to set the ISO speed.
 By pressing the <n> button and then the <B> button, you
can set WB shift and WB bracketing.
 Note that the following cannot be set: <q> Metering mode, <y>
Flash exposure compensation, <w> HDR mode, and <P>
Multiple exposures.
295
Shooting Function Settings
Q Quick Control
In the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, and <F> modes, the AF method,
Drive mode, Movie recording size, Recording level (set manually
only), Recording/playing back card and image quality (still photos),
White balance, Picture Style, and Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set.
In the <A> mode, only the functions in bold above can be set.
1
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The settable functions will be
displayed.
a function and set it.
2 Select
 Use <9> to select a function.
 The setting of the selected function is
displayed on the screen.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it.
 To set the image quality to RAW,
press <0>.
 To select the card for recording/
playing back, WB shift/bracketing, or
Picture Style parameters, press the
<B> button.
 To set Auto white balance, select
[Q], then press <0>.
 Pressing <0> will return the camera
to movie shooting.
If you press the <Q> button before starting the time-lapse movie shooting
(p.306), recording-level will not be displayed.
296
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
With [z4: Movie rec. size] (the [z2]
tab in <A>), you can set the movie’s
image size, frame rate (frames per sec.),
and compression method.
The frame rate displayed on the [Movie
rec. size] screen switches automatically
depending on the [53: Video system]
setting (p.467).
 Image Size
L 1920x1080
Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality. The aspect ratio is
16:9.
w 1280x720
High-Definition (HD) recording quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.
x 640x480
Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect ratio is 4:3.
 Frame Rate (fps: frames per second)
6 29.97 fps/8 59.94 fps
For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North America, Japan,
South Korea, Mexico, etc.).
5 25.00 fps/7 50.00 fps
For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,
Australia, etc.).
4 23.98 fps
Mainly for motion pictures.
If you change the [53: Video system] setting, set the movie recording size
again.
297
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
 Compression Method
W ALL-I (For editing/I-only)
Compresses one frame at a time for recording. Although the file size
is larger than with IPB (Standard), the movie is more suited for
editing.
X IPB (Standard)
Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording. Since
the file size is smaller than with ALL-I (For editing), you can shoot
longer (with a card of the same capacity).
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
(Approx.)
Movie Recording
Quality
Total Recording Time on Card
File Size
4 GB
8 GB
16 GB
65
W
4
5 min.
11 min.
23 min.
654MB/min.
65
X
4
16 min.
33 min.
67 min.
225MB/min.
87 W
6 min.
13 min.
26 min.
583MB/min.
87 X
19 min.
38 min.
1 hr. 17 min.
196MB/min.
x 65 X
48 min.
1 hr. 37 min.
3 hr. 14 min.
78MB/min.
L
w
An increase of the camera’s internal temperature (p.317) may cause movie
shooting to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table.
298
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
 Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting
without interruption.
During movie shooting, approx. 30 sec. before the movie reaches
the 4 GB file size, the elapsed shooting time or time code displayed
in the movie-shooting screen will start blinking. If you keep shooting
until the movie file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be
created automatically and the elapsed shooting time or time code
will stop blinking.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file
individually. Movie files cannot be played back automatically in
consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next
movie and play it back.
 Movie Shooting Time Limit
The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. If
the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie again by
pressing the <0> button. (A new movie file starts being recorded.)
When shooting movies, if the file size exceeds 4 GB, “buSY” may be
displayed on the LCD panel for a while. Still photo shooting is not possible
while “buSY” is displayed on the screen.
299
3 Setting the Sound Recording
You can shoot movies while recording
sound with the built-in monaural
microphone or the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately).
You can also freely adjust the soundrecording level.
Sound-recording settings are under
[z4: Sound recording] (the [z2] tab
in <A>).
Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level
Auto
Manual
Disable
300
: The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto
level control will operate automatically in response to the
sound level.
: For advanced users. You can adjust the sound-recording
level to one of 64 levels.
Select [Rec. level] and look at the level meter while
turning the <5> dial to adjust the sound-recording level.
Look at the peak hold indicator, and adjust so that the
level meter sometimes lights up on the right of the “12” (12 dB) mark for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the
sound will be distorted.
: Sound will not be recorded.
3 Setting the Sound Recording
Wind Filter/Attenuator
Wind filter
Attenuator
: When [Enable] is set, it reduces the wind noise when
recording outdoors. This feature takes effect only with
the built-in microphone. Note that [Enable] reduces
low bass sounds, so set it to [Disable] when there is
no wind. It will record a more natural sound than with
[Enable].
: Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by
loud noises. Even if [Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or
[Manual] before shooting, sound distortion may still
result if there is a very loud sound. In such a case,
setting it to [Enable] is recommended.
 Using a microphone
Normally, the built-in microphone will record monaural sound.
Stereo sound recording is also possible by connecting the
Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) to the
camera’s external microphone IN terminal (p.27) as the external
microphone is given the priority.
 In the <A> mode, [Sound recording] can be set to [On] or [Off]. If [On]
is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted automatically (same as
with [Auto]), but the wind filter function will not take effect.
 The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be
adjusted.
 Audio is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
 If [z5: Silent Control] is set to [Enable h] (p.302), you can adjust the
sound-recording level with the <h> touch pad with less operation noise
during movie shooting.
301
3 Silent ControlN
You can change the settings of the ISO speed, sound-recording level,
etc. without making too much noise while shooting a movie.
When [z5: Silent Control] is set to
[Enable h], you can use the touch pad
<h> on the inner ring of the Quick
Control Dial.
You can just touch the top, bottom, left,
or right of <h> for silent operation.
During movie shooting, you can press
the <Q> button to display the Quick
Control screen and change the functions
below with <h>.
Shooting Mode
d/F s f a
Shutter speed
k k
Aperture
- k k
Exposure compensation k
k k k*1
ISO speed
k
Recording level*2
k
k k k
*1: With Auto ISO set.
*2: With [Sound recording: Manual] set.
Settable Functions
 If [z5: Silent Control] is set to [Enable h], you cannot change Quick
Control settings with the <5> Quick Control dial during movie shooting.
 Even if you change the aperture silently with <h>, the movie will still
record the lens aperture-driving sound.
 If there is water or dirt on the <h>, the touch operation may not work. In
such a case, use a clean cloth to clean the <h>. If it still does not work,
wait a while and try again.
Before shooting a movie, you can use <h> with the [Rec. level] setting to
adjust the sound-recording level.
302
3 Setting the Time Code
The time code is a time reference
recorded automatically to synchronize
the movie during movie shooting. It is
recorded at all times in the following
units: hours, minutes, seconds, and
frames. It is mainly used during movie
editing.
Use [z5: Time code] (the [z3] tab in
<A>) to set the time code.
Count Up
Rec run
Free run
: The time code counts up only while you are shooting a
movie. The time code will continue in the sequence of the
movie files captured.
: The time code counts up whether you are shooting a
movie or not.
Start Time Setting
You can set the time code’s start time.
Manual input setting : You can freely set the hour, minute, second,
and frames.
Reset
: The time set with [Manual input setting] and
[Set to camera time] is reset to “00:00:00.” or
“00:00:00:” (p.305).
Set to camera time : Sets hours, minutes, and seconds to match the
camera’s internal clock. “Frames” will be set to
00.
 Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy
between the actual time and time code.
 If [Free run] is set and you change the time, zone, or daylight saving
time (p.49), the time code will be affected.
303
3 Setting the Time Code
Movie Recording Count
You can select what to display on the movie shooting screen.
Rec time
Time code
: Indicates the elapsed time from the start of the movie
shooting.
: Indicates the time code during movie shooting.
Movie Playback Count
You can select what to display on the movie playback screen.
Rec time
Time code
: Displays the recording time and playback time during
movie playback.
: Displays the time code during movie playback.
With [Time code] set:
During movie shooting
During movie playback
 Regardless of the [Movie rec count] setting, the time code will always
be recorded to the movie file (except during time-lapse movie shooting).
 The [Movie play count] setting under [z5: Time code] switches in
tandem with the [x3: Movie play count] setting. Changing either
setting will automatically change the other.
 “Frames” are not displayed for movie shooting or during movie playback.
304
3 Setting the Time Code
Drop Frame
If the frame rate setting is 6 (29.97 fps) or 8 (59.94 fps), the time
code’s frame count causes a discrepancy between the actual time and
time code. This discrepancy can be corrected automatically. This
correction function is called “drop frame.”
Enable : The discrepancy is corrected automatically by skipping time
code numbers (DF: Drop frame).
Disable : The discrepancy is not corrected (NDF: Non-drop frame).
The time code will be displayed as follows:
Enable (DF)
Disable (NDF)
: 00:00:00. (Playback time: 00:00:00.00)
: 00:00:00: (Playback time: 00:00:00:00)
If the frame rate is 4(23.98 fps), 5(25.00 fps), or 7(50.00 fps), drop
frame is not used. (If 4 is set or if [53: Video system] is set to [For PAL],
[Drop frame] will not be displayed.)
305
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
Still photos shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically
to create a time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows how a subject
changes in a much shorter period of time than the actual time it took. It
is effective for a fixed-point observation of changing scenery, growing
plants, celestial motion, etc.
Time-lapse movies are recorded in L 6 W (NTSC) or L 5
W (PAL). The frame rate will be switched automatically according to
the [53: Video system] setting (p.467).
1 Select the shooting mode.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
 The image will appear on the LCD
monitor.
[Time-lapse movie].
3 Select
 Under the [z5] tab, select [Timelapse movie] (the [z3] tab in
<A>), then press <0>.
 If [Time-lapse movie] is grayed out,
press the <0> button to enable
movie shooting. Then perform step 3
again.
[Enable].
4 Select
 Select [Enable], then press <B>.
Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or
an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or
the camera’s internal components.
306
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
the shooting interval and
5 Set
number of shots.
Time required
Playback time
 Check the [k: Time required] and
[3: Playback time] displayed at the
bottom of the screen to set the
shooting interval and number of shots.
 Select the number to be set (hours:
minutes: seconds / Number of shots).
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Set the desired number, then press
<0>. (Returns to <s>).
 Shooting interval
Settable from [00:00:01] to [99:59:59].
 Number of shots
Settable from [0002] to [3600]. Set one digit at a time. If 3600 is set,
the time-lapse movie will be approx. 2 min. for NTSC and approx. 2
min. 24 sec. for PAL.
[OK].
6 Select
 The screen in step 3 will reappear.
the settings.
7 Check
 With [Time-lapse movie] selected on
the screen in step 3, press <0>.
 The current settings will be displayed.
 Time required
Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots at the
set interval. If it exceeds 24 hours, “*** days” will be displayed.
 Playback time
Indicates the playback time (time required to play back the movie) of
the time-lapse movie that will be created from the still photos taken
at the set interval and recorded in L 6 W (NTSC) or L
5 W (PAL).
307
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
 Card- time left
The total length of a time-lapse movie that can be recorded on the
card based on its remaining capacity.
the menu.
8 Exit
 Press the <M> button to turn off
the menu screen.
the message.
9 Read
 Read the message and select [OK].
test shots.
10 Take
 Set the exposure and shooting
functions, and press the shutter
button halfway to focus as you do
with Live View shooting.
 Press the shutter button completely to
start taking test shots. The test
images will be recorded to the card.
 If there are no problems with the test
shots, go to the next step.
 To take test shots again, repeat this
step.
the <0> button.
11 Press
 The camera will be ready to start
shooting a time-lapse movie.
 To return to step 9, press the <0>
button again.
308
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
the time-lapse movie.
12 Shoot
 Press the shutter button halfway to
Shots remaining
Time-lapse movie
check the focus and exposure.
 Press the shutter button completely to
start shooting the time-lapse movie.
 AF will not work during time-lapse movie
shooting. The exposure setting for the first
shot will be applied to subsequent shots.
 During time-lapse movie shooting,
nothing will be displayed on the LCD
monitor. <a> will blink on the LCD
panel.
 Since the electronic shutter is used
for shooting, the reflex mirror and
shutter make no operation noise
during time-lapse movie shooting.
 When the set number of shots are
taken, the time-lapse movie shooting
will stop and be automatically canceled.
 Using a tripod is recommended.
 Taking test shots is recommended.
 Regardless of the [z1: Image quality] setting, the time-lapse movie will
be recorded in L 6 W (NTSC) or L 5 W (PAL).
 To cancel the time-lapse movie shooting before it is completed, either
press the shutter button completely or press the <0> button ([Disable]
is set). The time-lapse movie shot so far will be recorded on the card.
 You can play back the shot time-lapse movie with this camera the same
way that you play back normal movies.
 If the time required for shooting is 24 hours to 48 hours, “2 days” will be
indicated. If three or more days are required, the number of days will be
indicated in 24-hour increments.
 Even if the time-lapse movie’s playback time is less than 1 sec., a movie
file will still be created. For [Playback time], “00:00:00” will be displayed.
 If the shooting time is long, using the DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold
separately) and AC Adapter AC-E6N (sold separately) to power the
camera is recommended.
309
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
 With time-lapse movie set to [Enable], you cannot set [z4: Movie rec.
size] and [53: Video system].
 If the camera is connected to a computer or printer with the interface
cable, or if an HDMI cable is connected to the camera, you cannot select
[Enable].
 The maximum ISO speed will be ISO 3200 in the <d>, <s>, <f>,
and <F> modes, and <a> mode with Auto ISO set.
 Bulb exposure cannot be performed. If the shooting mode is <F>, the
operation will be the same as the <d> mode.
 Movie Servo AF will not function.
 If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or slower, the exposure of the movie
displayed may not reflect the exposure of the resulting movie.
 Do not zoom the lens during time-lapse movie shooting. Zooming the
lens may cause the image to be out of focus, the exposure to change,
and the lens aberration correction not to function properly.
 When shooting a time-lapse movie under a flickering light, noticeable
image flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures may be
recorded.
 The image displayed during time-lapse movie shooting and the resulting
movie may look different (in terms of flicker, depth of field, etc.).
 If you move the camera from left to right (panning) or shoot a moving
subject while shooting a time-lapse movie, the image may look extremely
distorted.
 During time-lapse movie shooting, auto power off will not operate. Also,
you cannot adjust the shooting function and menu function settings, or
play back images.
 Sound and time code are not recorded for time-lapse movies.
 Single shooting setting is applied to time-lapse movie shooting
regardless of the drive mode setting.
 The shooting function settings for the first shot will be applied to
subsequent shots.
 If a long exposure or shutter speed longer than the shooting interval is
set, the camera cannot shoot with the set interval. Also, shooting may
not be performed when the shutter speed and the shooting interval are
nearly the same.
 If the next scheduled shot is not possible, it will be skipped. This may
make the time-lapse movie’s recording time shorter.
310
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
 If the time it takes to record to the card exceeds the interval between
shots due to the shooting functions set or card performance, some of the
shots may not be taken with the set intervals.
 The captured images are not recorded as still photos. Even if you cancel
the time-lapse movie shooting after only one shot is taken, it will be
recorded as a movie file.
 If the card does not have enough free space to record the set number of
shots, [Playback time] will be displayed in red. Although the camera can
continue shooting, the shooting will stop when the card becomes full.
 If you connect the camera to a computer with the interface cable
provided with the camera and use EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z5:
Time-lapse movie] to [Disable]. If it is set to [Enable], the camera
cannot communicate with the computer.
 During time-lapse movie shooting, the lens’s Image Stabilizer will not operate.
 If the power switch is set to <2> or the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is operated, time-lapse movie shooting will be terminated
and the setting is switched to [Disable].
 Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.
 Shooting-ready state of the time-lapse movie is canceled and the setting
is switched to [Disable] with any of the following operations:
• Selecting [z3: Dust Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning], [54: Clear
all camera settings], or [54: zfirmware ver.].
• Selecting <w>, <x>, or <y> shooting modes.
 When time-lapse movie shooting ends, the settings are cleared
automatically, and you return to normal movie shooting. Note that if you
have set the shutter speed slower than 1/60 sec. or faster than 1/4000
sec. for time-lapse movie shooting and the settings are automatically
cleared, the shutter speed may be automatically changed to a speed
within the settable range for normal movie shooting.
 If you start time-lapse movie shooting while the white <s> (p.317) is
displayed, the image quality of the time-lapse movie may deteriorate.
311
a Shooting Time-lapse Movies
You can perform time-lapse movie shooting with a fully-charged Battery
Pack LP-E6N for the durations (from start of shooting until the battery is
exhausted) listed in the table below.
Total Possilbe Time for Time-lapse Movie Shooting
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
Shooting interval: 1sec.
2 hr. 15 min.
2 hr. 10 min.
Shooting interval: 10sec.
4 hr. 5 min.
3 hr. 55 min.
If you use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.237), you can start or stop
the time-lapse movie shooting with the drive mode set to <Q> or <k>.
When Using Remote Controller RC-6
Camera Status/Remote
Control Setting
Test-shooting screen
Shooting-ready
During time-lapse movie
shooting
312
<2> (2-sec. delay)
<o> (Immediate
shooting)
To shooting-ready
Shoots still photo
To test-shooting screen
Starts shooting
Ends shooting
Ends shooting
3 Menu Function Settings
z4
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <k>, the
movie shooting menu options will appear
under the [z4] and [z5] tabs (the
[z2] and [z3] tabs in <A>).
 Movie Servo AF
During movie shooting, the camera focuses on the subject
continuously. The default setting is [Disable].
When [Enable] is set:
 The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you
are not pressing the shutter button halfway.
 Since this drives the lens continuously, it will consume battery
power and shorten the total possible movie shooting time (p.291).
 With certain lenses, the lens mechanical sound during focusing
may be recorded. If this happens, use the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) to reduce the lens
mechanical sound in the movie.
 If you want to set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> during
Movie Servo AF, first set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting
switch to <A>.
313
3 Menu Function Settings


If you want to keep the focus at a specific point or you do not
want the lens operation noise to be recorded, you can
temporarily stop Movie Servo AF by pressing the button assigned
to [Pause Movie Servo AF] or [AF stop] under [83: Custom
controls]. When you stop Movie Servo AF, the AF point will turn
gray.
• Under [83: Custom controls], if a button is assigned to
[Pause Movie Servo AF] (p.421), Movie Servo AF will stop
while holding down that button. When you press the button
again, Movie Servo AF will resume.
• If a button is assigned to [AF stop] (p.419), Movie Servo AF
will stop while holding down that button. When you let go of
the button, Movie Servo AF will resume.
When Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie shooting
after pressing the <M> or <x> button or performing other
operations such as changing the AF method, Movie Servo AF will
resume automatically.
When [Disable] is set:
 Press the shutter button halfway or press the <p> button to
focus.
Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]
 Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
• A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera.
• Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page
273.
 Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnified view.
 During movie shooting, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the
camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie
image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image
magnification).
314
3 Menu Function Settings
 AF method
You can select [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Single] (p.269-272).
 Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you
compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the
subject.
Note that the grid is not displayed during movie shooting.
 Movie recording size
You can set the movie recording size (image size, frame rate, and
compression method). For details, see page 297.
 Sound recording
You can set sound-recording settings. For details, see page 300.
z5
 Silent LV shootingN
This function applies to still photo shooting. For details, see page
266.
315
3 Menu Function Settings
 Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
 Time code
You can set the time code. For details, see pages 303-305.
 Silent ControlN
When [Enable h] is set, you can use the touch pad <h> and
Quick Control screen to change settings silently during movie
shooting. For details, see page 302.
 V button functionN
You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button
halfway or completely during movie shooting.
Setting
Pressed Halfway
/z
Metering and AF
Still photo shooting
Metering only
Still photo shooting
q/z
/k
q/k
Pressed Completely
Metering and AF
Starts/stops movie shooting
Metering only
Starts/stops movie shooting
If [
/k] or [q/k] is set, besides pressing the <0> button,
you can start/stop the movie shooting by pressing the shutter button
completely or by using Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote
Controller TC-80N3 (both sold separately, p.237). However, with
[
/k] or [q/k] set, still photo shooting (p.293) is not possible.
During movie shooting, the [V button function] setting overrides any
function assigned to the shutter button with [83: Custom Controls].
316
General Movie Shooting Cautions
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
 If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie shooting
or under a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red <E> icon will appear.
 The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. It is recommended that you stop still photo shooting for a
while and allow the camera to cool down. Since movie image quality will
hardly be affected, you can still shoot movies.
 The red <E> icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
 Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the <s> or
<E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, always turn off the camera.
Recording and Image Quality
 If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image
Stabilizer (IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all
times even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image
Stabilizer consumes battery power and may shorten the total movie
shooting time or decrease the number of possible shots. If you use a
tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, it is recommended that
you set the IS switch to <2>.
 The camera’s built-in microphone will also pick up the operation sound and
mechanical sound of the camera during shooting. Use the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) to reduce these sounds in the movie.
 Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the
camera’s external microphone IN terminal.
 With autoexposure shooting or shutter-priority AE, if the brightness
changes during movie shooting, the movie may freeze temporarily. In
such cases, shoot movies with aperture-priority AE or manual exposure.
 If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. The movie will be recorded almost
exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.
 In low light, noise or irregular colors may appear in the image. The movie
will be recorded almost exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.
 If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may
deteriorate or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support
MOV format).
317
General Movie Shooting Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
 If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-level
indicator may appear on the right of the screen during
movie shooting. It indicates how much data has not
yet been written to the card (remaining capacity of the
internal buffer memory). The slower the card, the
faster the indicator will climb upward. If the indicator
Indicator
becomes full, movie shooting will stop automatically.
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will
either not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward. First,
shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.
 If the indicator indicates that the card is full and movie shooting stops
automatically, the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded
properly.
 If the card’s writing speed decreases (due to fragmentation) and the
indicator appears, formatting the CF card (p.67) or low-level formatting of
the SD card (p.67-68) may resolve the problem.
Still Photo Shooting during Movie Shooting
 Regarding the image quality of still photos, see “Image Quality” on page
277.
318
9
Image Playback
This chapter explains how to play back or erase photos
and movies, how to display them on a TV screen, and
other playback-related functions.
Images shot and saved with another device
The camera may not be able to properly display images captured
with a different camera, edited with a computer, or that have had their
file names changed.
319
x Image Playback
Single-Image Display
1
Play back the image.
 Press the <x> button.
 The last image captured or played
back will appear.
an image.
2 Select
 To play back images starting with the
last image captured, turn the <5>
dial counterclockwise. To play back
images starting with the first captured
image, turn the dial clockwise.
 Each time you press the <B>
button, the information display will
change.
No information
Basic information display
Shooting information display
When you play back RAW images shot with the [z4: Crop/aspect ratio]
(p.154) set, lines indicating the shooting area will be displayed.
320
x Image Playback
the image playback.
3 Exit
 Press the <x> button to exit the
image playback and return to
shooting-ready state.
Shooting Information Display
With the shooting information screen displayed (p.320), you can tilt
<9> up or down to change the shooting information displayed at the
screen’s bottom as follows. For details, see pages 323-324.
Detailed information
Lens aberration correction information
Lens / Histogram information
Color space / Noise reduction information
White balance information
Picture Style information 2
Picture Style information 1
3 Grid Display
In single-image display and two-image
display (p.332), you can overlay the grid
on the image playback.
With [33: Playback grid], you can
select [3x3 l], [6x4 m], or [3x3+diag
n].
This function is convenient for checking
the image’s vertical or horizontal tilt as
well as composition.
The grid is not displayed during movie playback.
321
B: Shooting Information Display
Sample Information for Still Photos
 Basic information display
Eye-Fi transfer completed
Eye-Fi card transmission status
Battery level
Rating
Protect images
Card
Folder number File number
Playback number/
Total images
recorded
Shutter speed
Image-recording
quality/Edited
images/Cropping
Aperture
Highlight tone priority
Exposure compensation
amount
ISO speed
 If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information
may not be displayed.
 It may not be possible to play back images taken with the EOS 5DS/EOS
5DS R on other cameras.
322
B: Shooting Information Display
 Shooting information display
• Detailed information
Exposure compensation amount
Aperture
Histogram (Brightness/RGB)
Shooting date
and time
Shutter speed
ISO speed
Shooting mode/
Multiple exposure
Scroll bar
Highlight tone priority
White balance
Metering mode
File size
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
White balance correction/
Correction amount
AF Microadjustment
Flash exposure compensation
amount/HDR shooting/
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Crop
Image-recording quality/
Edited images/Cropping
Picture Style/Settings
* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image file size will be
displayed.
* Lines indicating the shooting area will be displayed for images taken with the
crop/aspect ratio set and with RAW or RAW+JPEG set for image quality.
* Lines indicating the shooting area will be displayed for images with cropping
information appended (p.411).
* During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, <0> will be
displayed.
* <w> and the dynamic range adjustment amount will be displayed for images
shot with HDR shooting.
* <P> will be displayed for multiple-exposure photos.
* <M> will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.
* For still photos taken during movie shooting, <G> will be displayed.
* For images that are processed (RAW processing function, resized, or cropped)
and then saved, <u> will be displayed.
* For images cropped and then saved, <N> will be displayed.
323
B: Shooting Information Display
• Lens/Histogram information
Histogram display
(Brightness)
Lens name
Histogram display
(RGB)
Focal length
• White balance information
• Picture Style information 1
• Picture Style information 2
• Color space / Noise
reduction information
• Lens aberration correction information
If you used GPS Receiver GP-E2 to record GPS information for the image,
tilt <9> up or down to view the “GPS information” screen.
324
B: Shooting Information Display
Sample Movie Information Display
Movie playback
Aperture
Shutter speed
ISO speed
Movie shooting mode/
Time-lapse movie
File size
Movie recording size
Frame rate
Recording time/Time code
Compression method
• < > and < > modes: Shutter speed, aperture and ISO speed are not
displayed.
• < > mode: Aperture and ISO speed are not displayed.
• < > mode: Shutter speed and ISO speed are not displayed.
• < > mode + Auto ISO: ISO speed is not displayed.
 Highlight Alert
When [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable], overexposed,
clipped highlights will blink. To obtain more image detail in the
overexposed, blinking areas, set the exposure compensation to a
negative amount and shoot again.
 AF Point Display
When [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable], the AF point that
achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF point
selection is set, multiple AF points may be displayed.
325
B: Shooting Information Display
 Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and
overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color
saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [33:
Histogram disp.].
[Brightness] Display
Sample Histograms
This histogram is a graph showing the
distribution of the image’s brightness level. The
horizontal axis indicates the brightness level
Dark image
(darker on the left and brighter on the right),
while the vertical axis indicates how many
pixels exist for each brightness level. The more
pixels there are toward the left, the darker the
Normal brightness
image. The more pixels there are toward the
right, the brighter the image. If there are too
many pixels on the left, the shadow detail will be
Bright image
lost. If there are too many pixels on the right, the
highlight detail will be lost. The gradation inbetween will be reproduced. By checking the image and its
brightness histogram, you can see the exposure level inclination and
the overall gradation.
[RGB] Display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary
color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue).
The horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on
the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates
how many pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more
pixels there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the
color. The more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and
denser the color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the
respective color information will be lacking. If there are too many
pixels on the right, the color will be too saturated with no gradation.
By checking the image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s
saturation and gradation condition, as well as white balance
inclination.
326
x Searching for Images Quickly
H Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)
You can search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9,
36, or 100 images on one screen.
1
Press the <u> button.
 During image playback or when the
camera is ready to shoot, press the
<u> button.
 [6u] will be displayed on the lower
right of the screen.
to the index display.
2 Switch
 Turn the <6> dial counterclockwise.
 The 4-image index display will
appear. The selected image is
highlighted with an orange frame.
 Turning the <6> dial further
counterclockwise will switch the
display from 9 images, 36 images
and to 100 images. If you turn the dial
clockwise, it will rotate through 100,
36, 9, 4, and single-image display.
B
B
B
B
an image.
3 Select
 Operate <9> or the <5> dial to move
the orange frame and select the image.
 Press the <u> button to turn off the
[6u] icon, then turn the <6> dial to
go to the next screen or previous image.
 Press <0> in the index display to
display the selected image in the
single-image display.
327
x Searching for Images Quickly
I
Jump through Images (Jump Display)
In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through
the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.
1
Select [Image jump w/6].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Image
jump w/6], then press <0>.
the jump method.
2 Select
 Select the jump method, then press
<0>.
d: Display images one by one
e: Jump 10 images
f: Jump 100 images
g: Display by date
h: Display by folder
i: Display movies only
j: Display stills only
P: Display protected images only
k: Display by image rating (p.337)
Turn the <6> dial to select.
328
x Searching for Images Quickly
by jumping.
3 Browse
 Press the <x> button to play back
Jump method
images.
 In the single-image display, turn the
<6> dial.
 You can browse by the method that
was set.
Playback position
 To search images by shooting date, select [Date].
 To search images by folder, select [Folder].
 If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [Movies] or
[Stills] to display one or the other.
 If no images match the [Protect] or [Rating] setting, you cannot browse
through images with the <6> dial.
329
u Magnifying Images
You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 16x on the LCD
monitor.
1
Magnified area position
Magnify the image.
 The image can be magnified as
follows: 1. During image playback
(single-image display), 2. During the
image review after image capture,
and 3. From the shooting-ready state.
 Press the <u> button.
 The magnified view will appear. The
magnified area and [6u] will be
displayed on the lower right of the
screen.
 The image magnification increases
as you turn the <6> dial clockwise.
You can magnify the image up to
approx. 16x.
 The image magnification decreases
as you turn the <6> dial
counterclockwise. In the case of 1
and 3 only, turning the dial further will
display the index display (p.327).
around the image.
2 Scroll
 Use <9> to scroll around the
magnified image.
 To exit the magnified view, press the
<u> button or <x> button and the
single-image display will return.
 In the case of 1 and 3 only, you can turn the <5> dial to view another
image while the magnification is maintained.
 A movie cannot be magnified.
330
u Magnifying Images
3 Magnification Settings
Under the [33] tab, when you select
[Magnificatn (apx)], you can set the
starting magnification and initial position
for the magnified view.
 1x (no magnification)
The image is not magnified. The magnified view will start with the
single-image display.
 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x (magnify from center)
The magnified view starts at the image center at the selected
magnification.
 Actual size (from selected point)
The recorded image’s pixels will be displayed at approx. 100%. The
magnified view starts at the AF point that achieved focus. If the
photo is taken with manual focus, the magnified view starts at the
image center.
 Same as last magnification (from center)
The magnification will be the same as the last time you exited the
magnified view with the <x> or <u> button. The magnified view
starts at the image center.
For images taken with [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Single] (p.268), the
magnified view will start at the image center even if [Actual size (from
selected pt)] is set.
331
X Comparing Images (Two-Image Display)
You can compare two images side by side on the LCD monitor. In the
two-image display, you can use magnified view or jump display as well
as protection, rating and erasure of images.
1
Set the two-image display.
 During image playback, press the
<X> button.
 The two-image index display will
appear. The currently-selected image
will be highlighted with an orange
frame.
the images to be
2 Select
compared.
 Pressing <0> switches the orange
frame between the two images.
 Turn the <5> dial to select an image.
 Repeat this procedure to select the
other image to be compared.
 If the left and right images are the
same, the [
] icon will appear on
the upper left of both images.
 By pressing the <Q> button, you can
set the same magnification and
magnified area for both images. (The
magnification settings will match
those of the image not highlighted
with an orange frame.)
 By holding the <x> button, you can
display the image highlighted with the
orange frame as a single image.
 To return to the previous display,
press the <X> button.
 By pressing the <B> button, you can change the information display.
 You cannot play back movies in the two-image display.
332
b Rotating the Image
You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.
1
Select [Rotate image].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Rotate
image], then press <0>.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be rotated.
 You can also select an image in the
index display (p.327).
the image.
3 Rotate
 Each time you press <0>, the
image will rotate clockwise as follows:
90° 9 270° 9 0°.
 To rotate another image, repeat steps
2 and 3.
 If you set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.362) before taking vertical
shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.
 If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during
image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].
 A movie cannot be rotated.
333
K Protecting Images
You can protect important images from being accidentally erased by the
camera’s erase function.
3 Protecting a Single Image
1
Select [Protect images].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Protect
images], then press <0>.
[Select images].
2 Select
 An image will be displayed.
Image protection icon
an image.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be protected.
 You can also select an image or
movie on the index display (p.327).
the image.
4 Protect
 Press <0> to protect the selected
image. The <K> icon will appear at
the top of the screen.
 To cancel the image protection, press
<0> again. The <K> icon will
disappear.
 To protect another image, repeat
steps 3 and 4.
334
K Protecting Images
3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [31:
Protect images], all the images in the
folder or on the card will be protected.
To cancel the image protection, select
[Unprotect all images in folder] or
[Unprotect all images on card].
If you format the card (p.67), the protected images will also be erased.
 Movies can also be protected.
 Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the
protection.
 If you erase all the images (p.360), only the protected images will
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images
all at once.
 When [All images on card] or [Unprotect all images on card] is
selected, the images will be protected or unprotected on the card
selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] under [51: Record
func+card/folder sel.].
335
K Protecting Images
Protecting Images with the <c> Button
During image playback, you can use the <c> button to protect an
image.
1
Select [m btn function].
 Under the [53] tab, select [m
button function], then press <0>.
2 Select [Protect].
an image.
3 Select
 Press the <x> button to play back
images.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be protected.
 You can also select an image or
movie on the index display (p.327).
the image.
4 Protect
 When you press the <c> button,
the image will be protected and the
<K> icon will appear.
 To cancel the image protection, press
the <c> button again. The <K>
icon will disappear.
336
Setting Ratings
You can rate images (still photos and movies) with one of the five rating
marks: l/m/n/o/p. This function is called rating.
Rating Images with the <c> Button
1
Select an image.
 During image playback, turn the
<5> dial to select an image or movie
to be rated.
 You can also select an image or
movie on the index display (p.327).
the image.
2 Rate
 Each time you press the <c>
button, the rating mark will change:
l/m/n/o/p/None.
 To rate another image, repeat steps 1
and 2.
 If [53: m btn function] is set to [Protect], change it to [Rating].
 If you press the <Q> button when [Rating] is selected in [53: m btn
function], you can set the rating marks that can be selected when you
press the <c> button.
337
Setting Ratings
3 Setting Ratings with the Menu
1
Select [Rating].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Rating],
then press <0>.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select an image
or movie to be rated.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
the image.
3 Rate
 Press <0> and a blue highlight
frame will appear as shown in the
screenshot.
 Turn the <5> dial to select a rating,
then press <0>.
 When you set a rating mark to the
image, the total number of the images
displayed beside the rating mark will
be counted up.
 To rate another image, repeat steps 2
and 3.
338
Setting Ratings
A total of up to 999 images of a given rating can be displayed. If there are
more than 999 images with a given rating, [###] will be displayed.
Taking Advantage of Ratings
 With [32: Image jump w/6], you can display only images having the
specified rating.
 With [32: Slide show], you can play back only images with a specific
rating.
 With Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.504), you can select
only the image with a specific rating (still photos only).
 With Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, etc., you can see each file’s
rating as part of the file information display or in the provided image
viewer (JPEG images only).
339
Q Quick Control for Playback
During playback, you can press the <Q> button to set the following:
[J: Protect images], [b: Rotate image], [9: Rating], [R: RAW
image processing] (RAW images only), [S: Resize] (JPEG image
only), [N: Cropping] (JPEG images only), [ : Highlight alert],
[ : AF point display], and [e: Image jump w/6].
For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.
1
Press the <Q> button.
 During image playback, press the
<Q> button.
 The Quick Control options will
appear.
an item and set it.
2 Select
 Tilt <9> up or down to select a
function.
 The setting of the selected function is
displayed at the bottom.
 Turn the <5> dial to set it.
 For RAW image processing, Resize,
and Cropping, press <0> and set
the function. For details, see page
364 for RAW image processing, page
369 for Resize, and page 371 for
Cropping. To cancel, press the
<M> button.
the setting.
3 Exit
 Press the <Q> button to exit the
Quick Control screen.
340
Q Quick Control for Playback
To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD]. If [OnD] or [Off] is
set, the [b Rotate image] setting will be recorded to the image, but the
camera will not rotate the image for display.
 Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the
single-image display and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing
the <Q> button again will return to the index display.
 For images taken with another camera, the options you can select may
be restricted.
341
k Enjoying Movies
You can play back movies in the following three ways:
Playback on a TV Set
(p.351)
By connecting the camera to a TV set
with HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately), you can play back the
camera’s still photos and movies on the
TV set.
 Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN port, the camera
cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.
 Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB
cable, movies and still photos cannot be played back or saved.
Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor
(p.344-345)
You can play back movies on the
camera’s LCD monitor. You can also edit
out the movie’s first and last scenes, and
play back the still photos and movies on
the card in an automatic slide show.
A movie edited with a computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played
back with the camera.
342
k Enjoying Movies
Playback and Editing with a Computer
To play back or edit a movie, use preinstalled or general-purpose software,
compatible with the movie’s recording
format.
If you play back or edit a movie with commercially-available software, use
software compatible with MOV-format movies. For details on commerciallyavailable software, contact the software manufacturer.
343
k Playing Back Movies
1
Play back the image.
 Press the <x> button to display an
image.
a movie.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
movie to be played.
 With the single-image display, the
<s1> icon displayed on the
upper left indicates a movie.
 In the index display, perforations at the
left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. As movies cannot be played
from the index display, press <0>
to switch to the single-image display.
the single-image display, press
3 In<0>.
 The movie playback panel will appear
at the bottom of the screen.
back the movie.
4 Play
 Select [7] (Play), then press <0>.
Speaker
 The movie will start playing back.
 You can pause the movie playback by
pressing <0>.
 You can adjust the sound volume
during movie playback by turning the
<6> dial.
 For more details on the playback
procedure, see the next page.
The camera may not be able to play back movies shot with another camera.
344
k Playing Back Movies
Movie Playback Panel
Operation
Playback Description
7 Play
Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.
8 Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed by turning the <5> dial.
The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of
the screen.
5 First frame
Displays the movie’s first frame.
3 Previous frame
Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is
displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-byframe. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the
movie.
4 Last frame
Displays the movie’s last frame.
X Edit
Displays the editing screen (p.346).
Playback position
mm’ ss”
Playback time (minutes:seconds with [Movie play count:
Rec time] set)
hh:mm:ss.ff (DF)
Time code (hours:minutes:seconds:frames with [Movie
hh:mm:ss:ff (NDF) play count: Time code] set)
9 Volume
Turn the <6> dial to adjust the volume of the built-in
speaker (p.344).
32
To return to the single-image display, press the <M>
button.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the continuous playback time
at room temperature (23°C/73°F) will be approx. 3 hr. 20 min.
 If you connect the camera to a TV set to play back a movie (p.351),
adjust the sound volume with the TV set. (Turning the <6> dial will not
change the sound volume.) If there is audio feedback, place the camera
farther away from the TV set or turn down the TV sound volume.
 If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the still photo will be
displayed for approx. 1 sec. during the movie playback.
345
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.
increments. You can also edit time-lapse movies.
1
On the movie playback screen,
select [X].
 The movie editing panel will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
the part to be edited out.
2 Specify
 Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or
[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.
 Tilt <9> to the left or right to see the
previous or next frames. Holding
down the key will fast forward or fast
rewind the frames. Turn the <5> dial
for frame-by-frame playback.
 After deciding which part to edit out,
press <0>. The portion highlighted
in white on the top of the screen is
what will remain.
the edited movie.
3 Check
 Select [7] and press <0> to play
back the edited movie.
 To change the editing, go back to step
2.
 To cancel the editing, press the
<M> button, then select [OK] on
the confirmation dialog.
346
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
the edited movie.
4 Save
 Select [W], then press <0>.
 The save screen will appear.
 To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite], then press <0>.
 On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK] to save the edited movie and
return to the movie playback screen.
 Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position
indicated by [ ] on the top of the screen), the actual position where the
movie is edited may differ from the position you specified.
 If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
 When the battery level is low, movie editing is not possible. Use a fullycharged battery.
 Movies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.
347
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.
1
Number of images to be played
back
Select [Slide show].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Slide
show], then press <0>.
the images to be played
2 Select
back.
 Select the desired option on the
screen, then press <0>.
All images/Movies/Stills/Protect
 Select one of the following: [jAll
images] [kMovies] [zStills]
[JProtect]. Then press <0>.
Date/Folder/Rating
 Select one of the following: [iDate]
[nFolder] [9Rating].
 When <zH> is highlighted,
press the <B> button.
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Date
348
Folder
Rating
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Item
Playback Description
jAll images
All the still photos and movies on the card will be played
back.
iDate
Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date
will be played back.
nFolder
Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played
back.
kMovies
Only the movies on the card will be played back.
zStills
Only the still photos on the card will be played back.
JProtected
Only the protected still photos and movies on the card will be
played back.
9Rating
Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will
be played back.
[Set up] as desired.
3 Configure
 Select [Set up], then press <0>.
 Set the [Display time] and [Repeat]
settings for still photos.
 After completing the settings, press
the <M> button.
Display time
Repeat
The images on the card selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] under
[51: Record func+card/folder sel.] will be played back.
349
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
the slide show.
4 Start
 Select [Start], then press <0>.
 After [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
the slide show.
5 Exit
 To exit the slide show and return to
the setting screen, press the <M>
button.
 To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be
displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume
the slide show.
 During auto playback, you can press the <B> button to change the
still photo display format (p.320).
 During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the
<6> dial.
 During auto playback or pause, you can turn the <5> dial to view
another image.
 During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.
 The display time may vary depending on the image.
 To view the slide show on a TV set, see page 351.
350
Viewing Images on a TV Set
By connecting the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable (sold
separately), you can play the camera’s still photos and movies on the
TV set. For the HDMI cable, HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is
recommended.
If the picture does not appear on the TV screen, set the [53: Video
system] correctly to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the video
system of your TV set).
1
Connect the HDMI cable to the
camera.
 With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo
facing the front of the camera, insert it
into the <D> terminal.
the HDMI cable to the TV
2 Connect
set.
 Connect the HDMI cable to the TV
set’s HDMI IN port.
on the TV set and switch the
3 Turn
TV set’s video input to select the
4
5
connected port.
Set the camera’s power switch to
<1>.
Press the <x> button.
 The image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
 The images will automatically be
displayed at the optimum resolution
matching the connected TV set.
 By pressing the <B> button, you
can change the information display.
 To play back movies, see page 344.
351
Viewing Images on a TV Set
 Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot
be adjusted with the camera.
 Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
TV set, turn off the camera and TV set.
 Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
 Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
 Certain TV sets may not be able to display the captured movies.
Using HDMI CEC TV Sets
If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible
with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback
operations.
* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that
you can control them with one remote control unit.
1
Set [Ctrl over HDMI] to [Enable].
 Under the [33] tab, select [Ctrl over
HDMI], then press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the camera to a TV set.
2 Connect
 Use an HDMI cable to connect the
camera to the TV set.
 The TV set’s input will switch
automatically to the HDMI port
connected to the camera. If it does
not switch automatically, use the TV
set’s remote control to select the
HDMI IN port the cable is connected
to.
352
Viewing Images on a TV Set
the camera’s <x> button.
3 Press
 An image will appear on the TV
screen and you can use the TV set’s
remote control to play back images.
an image.
4 Select
 Point the remote control toward the
TV set and press the / button to
select an image.
Still photo playback menu
the remote control’s Enter
5 Press
button.
 The menu appears and you can
perform the playback operations
shown on the left.
 Press the remote control’s /
: Return
button to select the desired option,
: 9-image index
then press the Enter button. For a
: Play movie
slide show, press the / button to
: Slide show
select an option, then press the Enter
: Display shooting info
button.
: Rotate
 If you select [Return] and press the
Enter button, the menu will disappear
and you can use the / button to
select an image.
Movie playback menu
During the two-image display (p.332), playback with the TV’s remote control
is not possible. To use the TV’s remote control for playback, first press the
<X> button to return to the single-image display.
 Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For
details, refer to the TV set’s instruction manual.
 Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not
operate properly. In such a case, set [33: Ctrl over HDMI] to [Disable],
and use the camera to control the playback operation.
353
a Copying Images
The images recorded on one card can be copied to another card.
3 Copying a Single Image
1
Select [Image copy].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Image
copy], then press <0>.
[Sel.Image].
2 Select
 Check the copy source and target
cards’ number, and remaining
capacity.
 Select [Sel.Image], then press <0>.
Lowest file number
Number of images in folder
the folder.
3 Select
 Select the folder containing the image
you want to copy, then press <0>.
 Check the images displayed on the
right to select the desired folder.
 The images in the selected folder will
be displayed.
Folder name
Highest file number
The copy source is the card selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] under
[51: Record func+card/folder sel.].
354
a Copying Images
Total images selected
the images to be copied.
4 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select an image
to be copied, then press <0>.
 The [X] icon will appear on the upper
left of the screen.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
 To select other images to be copied,
repeat step 4.
the <c> button.
5 Press
 After selecting all the images to be
copied, press the <c> button.
Select [OK].
6  Check the card where the images will
be copied to, then select [OK].
the target folder.
7 Select
 Select the target folder to which you
want to copy the images, then press
<0>.
 To create a new folder, select [Create
folder].
355
a Copying Images
[OK].
8 Select
 Check the information of the source
card and target card, then select
[OK].
 The copying will start and the
progress will be displayed.
 When the copying is completed, the
result will be displayed. Select [OK] to
return to the screen in step 2.
3 Copying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can copy all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
Under [x1: Image copy], when you
select [Sel.n] or [All image], you can
copy all the images in the folder or on a
card.
356
a Copying Images
 The file name of the copied image will be the same as the source
image’s file name.
 If [Sel.Image] is set, you cannot copy images in multiple folders at once.
Select images in each folder to copy them folder by folder.
 If an image is being copied to a target folder/card which has an image
with the same file number, the following will be displayed: [Skip image
and continue] [Replace existing image] [Cancel copy]. Select the
copying method, then press <0>.
• [Skip image and continue]: Any images in the source folder having
the same file number as images in the target folder will be skipped and
not copied.
• [Replace existing image]: Any images in the target folder having the
same file number as the source images (including protected images)
will be overwritten.
If an image with a print order (p.389) is overwritten, you will have to set
the print order again.
 The image’s print order information, image transfer information, and
photo book order information will not be retained when the image is
copied.
 Shooting is not possible during the copying operation. Select [Cancel]
before shooting.
357
L Erasing Images
You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or
erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.334) will not be erased.
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you
no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important
images from being erased accidentally, protect them. Erasing a
RAW+JPEG image will erase both the RAW and JPEG images.
Erasing a Single Image
1 Play back the image to be erased.
the <L> button.
2 Press
 The Erase menu will appear.
the image.
3 Erase
 Select [Erase], then press <0>. The
image displayed will be erased.
Setting [83: Default Erase option] to [[Erase] selected] makes it faster to
erase images (p.412).
358
L Erasing Images
3 Checkmarking [X] Images to Be Erased in a Batch
By appending checkmarks <X> to the images to be erased, you can
erase multiple images at once.
1
Select [Erase images].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Erase
images], then press <0>.
[Select and erase images].
2 Select
 An image will be displayed.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
the images to be erased.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the image
to be erased, then press <0>.
 A checkmark [X] will be displayed on
the upper left of the screen.
 To select other images to be erased,
repeat step 3.
the image.
4 Erase
 Press the <L> button, then press
[OK].
 The selected images will be erased in
one batch.
359
L Erasing Images
3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When
[31: Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on
card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.
 To erase all images, including protected images, format the card (p.67).
 The images on the card selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] under
[51: Record func+card/folder sel.] will be erased.
360
Changing Image Playback Settings
3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness
The LCD monitor’s brightness is adjusted automatically for optimum
viewing depending on the ambient light level. You can also set the
automatic adjustment’s brightness level (brighter or darker), or adjust
the brightness manually.
1
Select [LCD brightness].
 Under the [52] tab, select [LCD
brightness], then press <0>.
[Auto] or [Manual].
2 Select
 Turn the <6> dial to make the
selection.
the brightness.
3 Adjust
 While referring to the gray chart, turn
the <5> dial, then press <0>.
 You can adjust [Auto] to one of three
levels, and [Manual] to one of seven
levels.
Automatic adjustment
Manual adjustment
While [Auto] is set, be careful not to obstruct the round, ambient light sensor
(p.28) under the LCD monitor with your finger, etc.
 To check the image’s exposure, looking at the histogram is
recommended (p.326).
 During playback, pressing the <U> button will display the screen in step 2.
361
Changing Image Playback Settings
3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images
Vertical images are rotated automatically so they
are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD
monitor and on the computer instead of
horizontally. You can change the setting for this
feature.
1
Select [Auto rotate].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Auto
rotate], then press <0>.
the auto rotation.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
 OnzD
The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both
the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.
 OnD
The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the computer.
 Off
The vertical image is not automatically rotated.
Auto rotation will not work with vertical images captured while auto rotation
was [Off]. They will not rotate even if you later switch it to [On] for playback.
 The vertical image will not be automatically rotated for the image review
just after shooting.
 If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the
image may not be rotated automatically for playback.
 If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the computer screen,
it means the software you are using is unable to rotate the image. Using
the EOS software is recommended.
362
10
Post-Processing
Images
You can process RAW images and resize or crop JPEG
images.
 A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a
function that can be used only in the following modes: <d>
<s> <f> <a> <F>.
 The camera may not be able to process images taken with
another camera.
 Post-processing images as described in this chapter cannot be
performed while the camera is connected to a computer via an
interface cable.
363
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
You can process 1 images with the camera and save them as JPEG
images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can apply
different processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images
from it.
Note that 41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the
camera. Use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.504) to
process those images.
1
Select [RAW image processing].
 Under the [31] tab, select [RAW
image processing], then press
<0>.
 1 images will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to process.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from the index
display.
the image.
3 Process
 Press <0> to make the RAWprocessing options appear (p.366).
 Use <9> to select an option, then
turn the <5> dial to switch the
setting.
 The displayed image will reflect such
settings as “Brightness adjustment”,
“White balance”, etc.
 To return to the image settings at the
time of shooting, press the <B>
button.
364
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
Displaying the setting screen
 Press <0> to display the setting
screen. Turn the <5> or <6> dial
to change the setting. Press <0> to
finalize the setting and return to the
previous screen.
the image.
4 Save
 Select [W] (Save), then press <0>.
 Select [OK] to save the image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To process another image, repeat
steps 2 to 4.
Magnified View
You can magnify the image by pressing the <u> button in step 3. The
magnification will differ depending on the pixel count of [Image quality]
set in [RAW image processing]. With <9>, you can scroll around the
magnified image.
To cancel magnified view, press the <u> button again.
Crop/Aspect Ratio
Frame lines indicating the shooting area will be displayed on images
shot when [z4: Crop/aspect ratio] (p.154) is set to an option other
than [Full-frame]. JPEG images generated from RAW images will be
saved with the cropping area or aspect ratio that was set.
365
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
RAW Image Processing Options

Brightness adjustment
You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop
increments. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.

White balance (p.174)
You can select the white balance. If you select [Q] and press the
<B> button, you can select [Auto: Ambience priority] or [Auto:
White priority]. If you select [P] and press the <B> button,
you can set the color temperature. The displayed image will reflect
the setting’s effect.

Picture Style (p.164)
You can select the Picture Style. By pressing the <B> button,
you can adjust the sharpness and other parameters. The displayed
image will reflect the setting’s effect.

Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.182)
You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer. The displayed image will
reflect the setting’s effect.

High ISO speed noise reduction (p.183)
You can set the noise reduction for high ISO speeds. The displayed
image will reflect the setting’s effect. If the effect is difficult to discern,
magnify the image (p.365).

Image quality (p.149)
You can set the image quality when generating an image in JPEG
format.
366
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN

Color space (p.193)
You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera’s LCD
monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the image will not look
very different when either color space is set.

Peripheral illumination correction (p.188)
If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect
is difficult to discern, magnify the image (p.365) and check the four
corners. The peripheral illumination correction applied with the
camera will be less pronounced than with Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software) and may be less apparent. In such a case, use
Digital Photo Professional to apply the peripheral illumination
correction.

Distortion correction
Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected. If
[Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. The image
periphery will be trimmed in the corrected image.
Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, adjust the
sharpness with the Picture Style’s [Sharpness] parameter setting as
necessary.

Chromatic aberration correction (p.189)
Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject’s outline) due
to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the
corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern,
magnify the image (p.365).
367
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
Peripheral Illumination Correction, Distortion Correction, and
Chromatic Aberration Correction
To execute peripheral illumination correction, distortion correction, and
chromatic aberration correction, the correction data of the lens used is
necessary. If you cannot apply correction when processing RAW images in
the camera, use EOS Utility (EOS software, p.504) to register the correction
data to the camera.
 Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce the same results
as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional.
 When processing images with [Distortion] set to [Enable], AF point
display information (p.325) and Dust Delete Data (p.375) will not be
appended to the image.
368
S Resizing JPEG Images
You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it
as a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3/K/
5/a/b images. JPEG c and RAW images cannot be resized.
1
Select [Resize].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Resize],
then press <0>.
 An image will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to resize.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from the index
display.
the desired image size.
3 Select
 Press <0> to display the image
sizes.
 Select the desired image size, then
press <0>.
Target sizes
the image.
4 Save
 Select [OK] to save the resized
image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To resize another image, repeat steps
2 to 4.
369
S Resizing JPEG Images
Resize Options by Original Image Size
Original Image Size
3
K
5
a
b
K
k
Available Resize Settings
5
a
b
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
c
k
k
k
k
k
Image Sizes
Sizes for resized images are shown below.
(Approx.)
Image Quality
K
5
a
b
c
Image Quality
K
5
a
b
c
Full-frame (3:2)
7680x5120
(39.3 megapixels)
5760x3840
(22.1 megapixels)
4320x2880
(12.4 megapixels)
1920x1280
(2.5 megapixels)
720x480
(350,000 pixels)
1.3x (crop)
6016x4000*
(24.1 megapixels)
4512x3008
(13.6 megapixels)
3376x2256*
(7.6 megapixels)
1920x1280
(2.5 megapixels)
720x480
(350,000 pixels)
1.6x (crop)
4800x3200
(15.4 megapixels)
3616x2408*
(8.7 megapixels)
2704x1808*
(4.9 megapixels)
1920x1280
(2.5 megapixels)
720x480
(350,000 pixels)
1:1 (aspect ratio)
5120x5120
(26.2 megapixels)
3840x3840
(14.7 megapixels)
2880x2880
(8.3 megapixels)
1280x1280
(1.6 megapixels)
480x480
(230,000 pixels)
4:3 (aspect ratio)
6816x5120*
(34.9 megapixels)
5120x3840
(19.7 megapixels)
3840x2880
(11.1 megapixels)
1712x1280*
(2.2 megapixels)
640x480
(310,000 pixels)
16:9 (aspect ratio)
7680x4320
(33.2 megapixels)
5760x3240
(18.7 megapixels)
4320x2432*
(10.5 megapixels)
1920x1080
(2.1 megapixels)
720x408*
(290,000 pixels)
The items marked with an asterisk do not exactly match the indicated aspect
ratio. The image will be cropped slightly.
370
N Cropping JPEG Images
You can crop a JPEG image and save it as another image. You can
crop 3, K, 5, a and b JPEG images. JPEG c and RAW images
cannot be cropped.
1
Select [Cropping].
 Under the [x2] tab, select
[Cropping], then press <0>.
 An image is displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to crop.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from the index
display.
the cropping frame size,
3 Set
aspect ratio, position, and
orientation.
 Press <0> to display the cropping
frame.
 The image area within the cropping
frame will be cropped.
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
Turn the <6> dial to change the cropping frame size. The smaller
the cropping frame, the more magnified the cropped image will look.
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Turn the <5> dial to change the cropping frame’s aspect ratio. You
can select the aspect ratio as follows: [3:2], [16:9], [4:3], or [1:1].
371
N Cropping JPEG Images
Moving the Cropping Frame
Use <9> to move the frame over the image vertically or
horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired
image area.
Switching the Cropping Frame Orientation
Pressing the <B> button will toggle the cropping frame between
the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you to create a
vertically oriented image from a horizontal image.
the image area to be
4 Check
cropped.
 Press the <Q> button.
 The image area to be cropped will be
displayed.
 Press the <Q> button again to return
to the original image.
the cropped image.
5 Save
 Press <0> and select [OK] to save
the cropped image.
 Check the destination folder and
image number, then select [OK].
 To crop another image, repeat steps 2
to 4.
 Once a cropped image is saved, it cannot be cropped again or resized.
 AF point display information (p.325) and Dust Delete Data (p.375) will
not be appended to the cropped images.
372
11
Sensor Cleaning
The camera has a Self Cleaning Sensor Unit to
automatically shake off dust adhered to the image
sensor’s front layer (low pass filter).
The Dust Delete Data can also be appended to the
image so that the dust spots remaining can be deleted
automatically by Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software, p.504).
Smudges adhering to the front of the sensor
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases,
lubricant from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of
the sensor. If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor
cleaning, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
Even while the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit is operating, you can
press the shutter button halfway to interrupt the cleaning and start
shooting immediately.
373
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self
Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on
the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this
operation. However, you can choose to perform sensor cleaning
manually, or disable it.
Cleaning the Sensor Now
1
Select [Sensor cleaning].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
[Clean nowf].
2 Select
 Select [Clean nowf], then press
<0>.
 Select [OK].
 The screen will indicate that the
sensor is being cleaned. (A small
sound may be heard.) Although there
will be a shutter sound, no picture is
taken.
 For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed
upright and stable on a table or other flat surface.
 Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.
Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]
option remains disabled temporarily.
Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning
 In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].
 The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the
power switch to <1> or <2>.
374
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust
that may be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust
still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for
erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital
Photo Professional (EOS software, p.504) to erase the dust spots
automatically.
Preparation
 Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
 Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
 Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to
infinity (∞). If the lens has no distance scale, rotate the camera to
face towards you and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.
Obtaining the Dust Delete Data
1
Select [Dust Delete Data].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Dust
Delete Data], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
 After the automatic self-cleaning of
the sensor is performed, a message
will appear. Although there will be a
shutter sound during the cleaning, no
picture is taken.
375
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
a solid-white object.
3 Shoot
 At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.




- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a
patternless, solid-white object and
take a picture.
The picture will be taken in aperturepriority AE mode at an aperture of f/22.
Since the image will not be saved, the
data can still be obtained even if there
is no card in the camera.
When the picture is taken, the camera
will start collecting the Dust Delete
Data. When the Dust Delete Data is
obtained, a message will appear.
If the data is not obtained successfully,
an error message will appear. Follow
the “Preparation” procedure on the
preceding page, then select [OK]. Take
the picture again.
Dust Delete Data
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG and
RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is
recommended that you update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software,
p.504) to erase dust spots, refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual.
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly
affects the image file size.
Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the
object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the EOS software.
376
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can
be removed manually with a commercially-available blower, etc. Before
cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.
The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be
cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
1
Select [Sensor cleaning].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
2 Select [Clean manually].
[OK].
3 Select
 In a moment, the reflex mirror will lock
up and the shutter will open.
 “CLn” will blink on the LCD panel.
4 Clean the sensor.
the cleaning.
5 End
 Set the power switch to <2>.
 If you use a battery, make sure it is fully charged.
 If you use Battery Grip BG-E11 (sold separately) with AA/R6 batteries,
manual sensor cleaning will not be possible.
For the power source, using the DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately) and
AC Adapter AC-E6N (sold separately) is recommended.
377
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
 While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the
power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and
image sensor may get damaged.
• Setting the power switch to <2>.
• Removing or inserting the battery.
 The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor
with care.
 Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the
sensor.
 Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If
the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or
reflex mirror may get damaged.
 Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing force
can damage the sensor, or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor and
scratch it.
 If the battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor, the beeper
will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.
 If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
378
12
Printing Images and Transferring
Images to a Computer
 Printing (p.382)
You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print
out the images on the card. The camera is compliant with
“wPictBridge”, which is the standard for direct printing.
 Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.389)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print
images recorded on the card according to your printing
instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,
etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or create a
print order for a photofinisher.
 Transferring Images to a Computer (p.393)
You can connect the camera to a computer and operate the
camera to transfer images recorded on the card to the
computer.
 Specifying Images for a Photobook (p.397)
You can specify images on the card for printing in a
photobook.
379
Preparing to Print
The direct printing procedure can be performed entirely with the
camera while you look at the camera’s LCD monitor.
Connecting the Camera to a Printer
the camera’s power switch to
1 Set
<2>.
up the printer.
2 Set
 For details, refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
the camera to a printer.
3 Connect
 Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
 When connecting the cable to the
camera, use the cable protector
(p.36). Connect the cable to the
digital terminal with the plug’s
<
> icon facing the back of the
camera.
 To connect to the printer, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
4 Turn on the printer.
the camera’s power switch to
5 Set
<1>.
 Some printers may make a beeping
sound.
380
Preparing to Print
back the image.
6 Play
 Press the <x> button.
 The image will appear with the <w>
icon on the upper left of the screen to
indicate that the camera is connected
to a printer.
 Make sure the printer has a PictBridge connection port.
 Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon (p.454). When
connecting the interface cable, use the provided cable protector (p.36).
 Movies cannot be printed.
 The camera cannot be used with printers conforming only to CP Direct or
Bubble Jet Direct.
 If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates a problem with the
printer. Resolve the problem displayed in the error message (p.388).
 Printing is not possible if Multi Shot Noise Reduction or the HDR Mode is
set.
 You can also print RAW images taken with this camera.
 You can also print JPEG/RAW images shot when [z4: Crop/aspect
ratio] (p.154) is set.
 If you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
With a fully-charged battery, printing up to approx. 3 hr. is possible.
 Before disconnecting the cable, first turn off the camera and printer. Hold
the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable.
 For direct printing, using the DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately) and
AC Adapter AC-E6N (sold separately) to power the camera is
recommended.
381
w Printing
The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the
printer. Some settings may not be available. For details, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
Printer-connected icon
1
Select the image to be printed.
 Check that the <w> icon is
displayed on the upper left of the LCD
monitor.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be printed.
<0>.
2 Press
 The print setting screen will appear.
Print setting screen
Sets printing effects (p.384).
Sets date or file number imprinting to on or off
(p.385).
Sets quantity to be printed (p.385).
Sets print area (p.387).
Sets paper size, type, and layout (p.383).
Returns to the screen in step 1.
Starts printing.
The paper size, type, and layout you set are displayed.
* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file
number imprinting and cropping may not be selectable.
[Paper settings].
3 Select
 The paper settings screen will
appear.
382
w Printing
Q Setting the Paper Size
 Select the size of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
 The paper type screen will appear.
Y Setting the Paper Type
 Select the type of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
 The page layout screen will appear.
U Setting the Page Layout
 Select the page layout, then press
<0>.
 The print setting screen will reappear.
Borderless
Prints with no borders. If your printer cannot print borderless
prints, the print will have borders.
Bordered
Prints with white borders along the edges.
Borderedc
Imprints the shooting information*1 on the border on 9x13 cm or
larger prints.
xx-up
Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.
20-upc
35-upp
Prints 20 or 35 images as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size
paper*2.
• Imprints the shooting information*1 with [20-upc].
Default
The page layout varies depending on the printer model or its
settings.
*1:From the Exif data, the camera name, lens name, shooting mode, shutter speed,
aperture, exposure compensation amount, ISO speed, white balance, etc., will be
imprinted.
*2:After ordering the prints with “Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)” (p.389), printing by
following “Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images” (p.392) is recommended.
383
w Printing
the printing effects.
4 Set
 Set them if necessary. If you do not need
to set any printing effects, go to step 5.
 Contents displayed on the screen
differ depending on the printer.
 Select the setting, then press <0>.
 Select the desired printing effect, then
press <0>.
 If the <ze> icons are displayed
brightly, you can also adjust the
printing effects (p.386).
Printing Effect
Description
EOff
No automatic correction is applied.
EOn
Print with the printer’s standard colors. The image’s Exif data is
used to make automatic corrections.
EVIVID
Print with higher saturation to produce more vivid blues and
greens.
ENR
Image noise is reduced before printing.
0 B/W
Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.
0 Cool tone Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.
0 Warm tone Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.
zNatural
Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast. No automatic
color adjustments are applied.
zNatural M
Printing characteristics are the same as the “Natural” setting.
However, this setting enables finer printing adjustments than
with “Natural.”
EDefault
Printing differs depending on the printer. For details, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
* When you change the printing effects, changes are reflected in the image
displayed on the upper left of the screen. Note that the printed image may look
slightly different from the displayed image, which is only an approximation. This
also applies to [Brightness] and [Adjust levels] on page 386.
384
w Printing
the date and file number
5 Set
imprinting.
 Set them if necessary.
 Select <I>, then press <0>.
 Set the print settings as desired, then
press <0>.
the number of copies.
6 Set
 Set it if necessary.
 Select <R>, then press <0>.
 Select the number of copies, then
press <0>.
printing.
7 Start
 Select [Print], then press <0>.
 The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the
printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer
to the printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings
are.
 Depending on the image’s file size and image-recording quality, it may
take some time for the printing to start after you select [Print].
 If image tilt correction (p.387) is applied, it may take longer to print the
image.
 To stop the printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select
[OK].
 If you execute [54: Clear all camera settings] (p.70), all the settings
will revert to their defaults.
385
w Printing
e Adjusting Printing Effects
In step 4 on page 384, select the printing
effect. When the <ze> icons are
displayed brightly, you can press the
<B> button. You can then adjust the
printing effects. What can be adjusted or
what is displayed will depend on the
selection made in step 4.
 Brightness
The image brightness can be adjusted.
 Adjust levels
When you select [Manual], you can change
the histogram’s distribution and adjust the
image’s brightness and contrast.
With the Adjust levels screen displayed, press
the <B> button to change the position of
the <h>. Turn the <5> dial to freely adjust
the shadow level (0 - 127) or highlight level (128 - 255).
 kBrightener
Effective in backlit conditions where the subject’s face looks dark.
When [On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.
 Red-eye corr.
Effective in flash images where the subject has red eyes. When [On]
is set, the red eye will be corrected for printing.
 The [kBrightener] and [Red-eye corr.] effects will not be reflected on
the screen.
 When [Detail set.] is selected, you can adjust the [Contrast],
[Saturation], [Color tone], and [Color balance]. To adjust the [Color
balance], use <9>. B is for blue, A for amber, M for magenta, and G for
green. The image’s color balance will be adjusted towards the color in
the direction of the move.
 If you select [Clear all], all the printing effect settings will be reverted to
their defaults.
386
w Printing
Cropping the Image
Tilt correction
You can crop the image and print only an
enlarged version of the cropped portion,
as if the image is recomposed.
Set the cropping right before printing.
If you change the print settings after
setting the cropping, you may have to set
the cropping again before printing.
1 On the print setting screen, select [Cropping].
2 Set the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.
The image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The
cropping frame’s aspect ratio can be changed with [Paper settings].
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
Turn the <6> dial to change the cropping frame size. The
smaller the cropping frame, the larger the image magnification will
be for printing.
Moving the Cropping Frame
Use <9> to move the frame over the image vertically or
horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired
image area.
Switching the Orientations of the Cropping Frame
Pressing the <B> button will toggle the cropping frame
between the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you
to create a vertically oriented print from a horizontal image.
Image Tilt Correction
By turning the <5> dial, you can tilt the image between -10 and
+10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the
image tilt, the <O> icon on the screen will turn blue.
3 Press <0> to exit the cropping.
 The print setting screen will reappear.
You can check the cropped image area on the print setting screen.
387
w Printing
 Depending on the printer, you may not be able to print an image with a
large image size. In such a case, resize the image (p.369), then print.
 If the image’s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper’s aspect
ratio, the image may be cropped significantly when you print it as a
borderless print. If the image is cropped, the print may look grainier due
to the fewer number of pixels.
 If you imprint shooting information on an image shot at an expanded ISO
speed (H), the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted.
 Depending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as
you specified.
 The smaller you make the cropping frame, the grainier the picture will
look in the print.
 Check the camera’s LCD monitor while cropping the image. If you look at
the image on a TV screen, the cropping frame may not be displayed
accurately.
Handling Printer Errors
If printing does not resume after you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper,
etc.) and select [Continue], operate the buttons on the printer to resume
printing. For details on resuming the printing, refer to the printer’s instruction
manual.
Error Messages
If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the
camera’s LCD monitor. Press <0> to stop printing. After fixing the
problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing problem, refer
to the printer’s instruction manual.
Paper Error
Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer.
Ink Error
Check the printer’s ink level and the waste ink tank.
Hardware Error
Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.
File Error
The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge. Images taken with a
different camera or images edited with a computer may not be printable.
388
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
You can set the print settings such as print type, date imprinting, file
number imprinting, etc. The print settings will be applied to all printordered images. (They cannot be set individually for each image.)
Setting the Printing Options
1
Select [Print order].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Print
order], then press <0>.
2 Select [Set up].
the options as desired.
3 Set
 Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File
No.].
 Select the option to be set, then press
<0>. Select the desired setting,
then press <0>.
Print type
Date
File No.
389
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Print type
Date
File number
K
Standard
Prints one image on one sheet.
L
Index
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on
one sheet.
K
L
Both
Prints both the standard and index prints.
On
Off
On
Off
[On] imprints the recorded date on the print.
[On] imprints the file number on the print.
the setting.
4 ExitPress
the <M> button.
 The print order screen will reappear.
 Next, select [Sel.Image], [Byn], or
[All image] to order the images to be
printed.
 RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered. You can print RAW
images with PictBridge (p.379).
 If you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both]
setting (p.392), the index print may not be printed with some printers. In
such a case, resize the image (p.369), then print the index print.
 Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may
not be imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer model.
 With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]
at the same time.
 When printing with DPOF, use the card whose print order specifications
are set. It cannot be printed with the specified print order if you just
extract images from the card and try to print them.
 Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers may not be able to
print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction
manual before printing, or check with your photofinisher about
compatibility when ordering prints.
 Do not specify a new print order for a card containing images whose print
order was set by a different camera. The print order may be overwritten.
Also, the print order may not be possible, depending on the image type.
390
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Print Ordering
 Sel.Image
Select and order images one by one.
If you press the <u> button and turn the
<6> dial counterclockwise, you can
select an image from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, turn the <6> dial clockwise.
Press the <M> button to save the
print order to the card.
Standard / Both
Quantity
Total images selected
Press <0>, and a print order for one
copy of the displayed image will be
placed. By turning the <5> dial, you
can set the number of copies to be
printed up to 99.
Index
Checkmark
Index icon
Press <0> to add a checkmark to the
box [X]. The image will be included in
the index print.
 Byn
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one
copy of all the images in the folder will be specified. If you select
[Clear all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for all the
images in the folder will be canceled.
 All image
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the
card will be set for printing. If you select [Clear all on card], the print
order will be cleared for all the images on the card.
 Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order
even if you set [Byn] or [All image].
 When using a PictBridge printer, print no more than 400 images for one
print order. If you specify more than this, all the images may not be printed.
391
W Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images
With a PictBridge printer, you can easily
print images with DPOF.
1
Prepare to print.
See page 380.
Follow the “Connecting the Camera to a Printer” procedure up to
step 5.
2 Under the [31] tab, select [Print order].
3 Select [Print].
[Print] will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a
printer and printing is possible.
4 Set the [Paper settings] (p.382).
Set the printing effects (p.384) if necessary.
5 Select [OK].
Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.
Certain printers may not imprint the file number.
If [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.
Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a
bright background or on the border.
 Under [Adjust levels], [Manual] cannot be selected.




 If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing of the remaining
images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not resume if any of the
following are the case:
• You changed the print order or deleted any of the print ordered images
before resuming the printing.
• When index is set, you changed the paper setting before resuming the
printing.
• The card’s remaining capacity was low when you paused the printing.
 If a problem occurs during printing, see page 388.
392
d Transferring Images to a Computer
You can connect the camera to a computer and operate the camera to
transfer images on the card to the computer. This is called direct image
transfer.
The direct image transfer can be performed with the camera while
you look at the LCD monitor.
The images transferred to the computer will be saved in the [Pictures]
or [My Pictures] folder and organized in folders by shooting date.
Caution for Image Transfer
Before connecting the camera to a computer, install the EOS Utility
(p.504) on your computer.
Preparing Image Transfer
the camera’s power switch to
1 Set
<2>.
the camera to a
2 Connect
computer.
 Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
 When connecting the cable to the
camera, use the cable protector
(p.36). Connect the cable to the
digital terminal with the plug’s
<
> icon facing the back of the
camera.
 Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal.
Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon (p.454). When
connecting the interface cable, use the provided cable protector (p.36).
393
d Transferring Images to a Computer
the camera’s power switch to
3 Set
<1>.
 When the computer displays a screen
to select the program, select [EOS
Utility].
 The EOS Utility screen will appear on
the computer.
After the EOS Utility screen appears, do not operate EOS Utility. If any
screen other than EOS Utility’s main window is displayed, [Direct transfer]
in step 5 on page 396 will not be displayed. (The image transfer function will
not be available.)
 If the EOS Utility screen does not appear, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual.
 Before disconnecting the cable, turn off the camera. Hold the plug (not
the cord) to pull out the cable.
3 Transferring RAW+JPEG Images
For RAW+JPEG images, you can specify
which image to transfer.
On the next page in step 2, select
[RAW+JPEG transfer], and select the
image to be transferred: [JPEG only],
[RAW only], or [RAW+JPEG].
394
d Transferring Images to a Computer
3 Selecting the Images to be Transferred
 Sel.Image
1
Select [Image transfer].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Image
transfer], then press <0>.
2 Select [Image sel./transfer].
3 Select [Sel.Image].
the images to be
4 Select
transferred.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be transferred, then press
<0>.
 Turn the <5> dial to display the [X] on
the screen’s upper left, then press <0>.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, turn the <6> dial clockwise.
 To select other images to be
transferred, repeat step 4.
 When [Sel.Image] is selected, you can check the image’s transfer status
on the upper left of the screen: No mark: Not selected. X: Selected for
transfer. l: Transfer failed. k: Transfer succeeded.
 The procedures for [RAW+JPEG transfer] (p.394) and above steps 1 to
4 can also be performed while the camera is not connected to a
computer.
395
d Transferring Images to a Computer
the image.
5 Transfer
 On the computer screen, check that
EOS Utility’s main window is displayed.
 Select [Direct transfer], then press
<0>.
 On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK], and the images will be
transferred to the computer.
 Images selected with [Sel.n] and
[All image] can also be transferred in
this way.
 Sel.n
Select [Sel.n] and select [Folder images not transfer’d]. When
you select a folder, all the images in that folder not yet transferred to
the computer will be selected.
Selecting [Folder images failed transf.] will select the selected
folder’s images that failed to transfer.
Selecting [Clear folder transf. history] will clear the transfer history
of the images in the selected folder. After clearing the transfer
history, you can select [Folder images not transfer’d] and again
transfer all the images in the folder.
 All image
If [All image] is selected and you select [Card images not
transferred], all the images on the card not yet transferred to a
computer will be selected.
For a description of [Card images failed transfer] and [Clear
card’s transf. history], see “Sel.n” above.
 If any screen other than EOS Utility’s main window is displayed on the
computer, [Direct transfer] is not displayed.
 During the image transfer, certain menu options cannot be used.
 You can also transfer movies.
 Up to 9,999 images can be transferred in one batch.
 Shooting is possible during the image transfer.
396
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When
you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to transfer images to a computer,
the specified images will be copied to a dedicated folder. This function
is useful for ordering photobooks online.
Specifying One Image at a Time
1
Select [Photobook Set-up].
 Under the [x1] tab, select
[Photobook set-up], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Select images].
the image to be specified.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be specified, then press
<0>.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
 To select other images to be
transferred, repeat step 3. The
number of specified images will be
displayed.
397
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When [x1: Photobook Set-up] is set
to [All images in folder] or [All images
on card], all the images in the folder or
on the card will be specified.
To clear your selections, select [Clear all
in folder] or [Clear all on card].
 RAW images and movies cannot be specified.
 Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another
camera for another photobook with this camera. The photobook settings
may be overwritten.
398
13
Customizing the
Camera
You can customize various camera functions to suit
your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions.
Also, current camera settings can be saved under <w>
<x> <y> positions of the Mode Dial.
The features explained in this chapter can be set and
used in the following shooting modes: <d> <s>
<f> <a> <F>.
399
3 Custom FunctionsN
81: Exposure
Exposure level increments
ISO speed setting increments
Bracketing auto cancel
Bracketing sequence
A LV
Shooting
p.402
p.403
k Movie
Shooting
k
k
k
In a
k
k
Number of bracketed shots
p.404
k
Safety shift
p.405
k
Same exposure for new aperture
p.406
k
(Still photo,
with WB
bracketing)
82: Exposure
Set shutter speed range
Set aperture range
p.408
k
k
k
k
The shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV)
shooting or movie shooting. (Settings are ineffective.)
400
3 Custom FunctionsN
83: Others
Warnings z in viewfinder
Dial direction during Tv/Av
Multi function lock
Custom Controls
Add cropping information
Default Erase option
Retract lens on power off
A LV
Shooting
k Movie
Shooting
k
k
k
k
p.409
p.410
p.411
p.412
Depends on setting
k
(During playback)
k
k
84: Clear
Selecting [84: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] will clear all the
Custom Function settings.
Even if [84: Clear all Custom Func.(C.Fn)] is executed, the settings for
[83: Custom Controls] will remain unchanged.
401
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Under the [8] tab, you can customize
various camera features to suit your
picture-taking preferences. Any settings
different from the default will be
displayed in blue.
C.Fn1: Exposure
Exposure level increments
1/3:1/3-stop
1/2:1/2-stop
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is
effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less fine
increments than 1/3-stop.
When [1/2-stop] is set, the exposure level will be displayed as shown below.
ISO speed setting increments
1/3: 1/3-stop
1/1: 1-stop
You can change the manual ISO speed setting increments to 1stop.
Even if [1/1] is set, ISO speed will be automatically set in 1/3-stop
increments when Auto ISO is set.
402
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Bracketing auto cancel
ON: Enable
When you set the power switch to <2>, the AEB and white balance
bracketing settings will be canceled. AEB will also be canceled when
the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting.
OFF: Disable
The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be
canceled even if you set the power switch to <2>. (If the flash
is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting, AEB will be
canceled temporarily, but the AEB range will be retained.)
Bracketing sequence
The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence
can be changed.
0-+: 0, -, +
-0+: -, 0, +
+0-: +, 0, AEB
0 : Standard
exposure
- : Decreased
exposure
+ : Increased
exposure
White Balance Bracketing
B/A Direction
M/G Direction
0 : Standard white balance 0 : Standard white balance
- : Blue bias
- : Magenta bias
+ : Amber bias
+ : Green bias
403
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Number of bracketed shots
The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can
be changed from the default, 3 shots, to 2, 5, or 7 shots.
When [Bracketing sequence: 0, -, +] is set, the bracketed shots will
be taken as shown in the table below.
3: 3 shots
2: 2 shots
5: 5 shots
7: 7 shots
(1-stop increments)
1st Shot
2nd
Shot
3rd
Shot
+1
4th
Shot
5th
Shot
3: 3 shots
Standard (0)
-1
2: 2 shots
Standard (0)
±1
5: 5 shots
Standard (0)
-2
-1
+1
+2
7: 7 shots
Standard (0)
-3
-2
-1
+1
6th
Shot
7th
Shot
+2
+3
If [2 shots] is set, you can select the + or - side when setting the AEB
range. Setting WB bracketing will result in a decreased exposure in the B/A
or M/G direction.
404
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Safety shift
OFF: Disable
Tv/Av: Shutter speed/Aperture
This takes effect in the shutter-priority AE (s) and aperturepriority AE (f) modes. If the subject brightness changes and the
standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure
range, the camera will automatically change the manually-selected
setting to obtain a standard exposure.
ISO: ISO speed
This works in the Program AE (d), shutter-priority AE (s), and
aperture-priority AE (f) modes. If the subject brightness
changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the
autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the
manually set ISO speed to obtain a standard exposure.
 Under [z2: ISO speed settings], even if [ISO speed range] or [Min.
shutter spd.] is changed from the default setting, safety shift will
override it if a standard exposure cannot be obtained.
 The minimum and maximum ISO speeds of the safety shift using the ISO
speed will be determined by the [Auto ISO range] setting (p.162).
However, if the manually set ISO speed exceeds the [Auto ISO range],
the safety shift will take effect up or down to the manually set ISO speed.
 Safety shift will take effect if necessary even when flash is used.
405
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Same exposure for new aperture
If the <a> mode (manual exposure shooting) is set and the ISO
speed is set manually (other than Auto ISO or H (12800) is set), the
maximum aperture’s f/number may change to a higher number
(smaller aperture) if you do any of the following: 1. Change the lens, 2.
Attach or detach an Extender, or 3. Use a zoom lens whose maximum
aperture f/number changes. If you then shoot at the exposure setting
as is, the image will be underexposed by the amount the maximum
aperture f/number changes to a higher number. However, by changing
the ISO speed or shutter speed (Tv) automatically, you can obtain the
same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1, 2, or 3.
OFF: Disable
Automatic changes in settings to maintain the specified exposure
will not be applied. The ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture
already set will be used for shooting. If you do 1, 2, or 3 and the
maximum aperture f/number increases, adjust the ISO speed and
shutter speed before you shoot.
ISO: ISO speed
If you do 1, 2, or 3, the ISO speed will automatically increase to
compensate for the amount that the maximum aperture f/number
increases by. The same exposure that would be obtained before
you did 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained.
Tv: Shutter speed
If you do 1, 2, or 3, a slower shutter speed will automatically be set
to compensate for the amount that the maximum aperture
f/number increases by. The same exposure that would be obtained
before you did 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained.
406
3 Custom Function SettingsN
 This function does not work with macro lenses whose actual aperture
f/number changes when the magnification changes.
 This function does not work with movies.
 If [ISO speed] is set and the exposure cannot be maintained within the
range set with [ISO speed range], the ISO speed will be automatically
switched within the specified range.
 If [Shutter speed] is set and the exposure cannot be maintained within
the range set with [82: Set shutter speed range], the shutter speed
will be automatically switched within the specified range.
 If you do 1, 2, or 3 and the camera turns off (power switch is set to
<2>, etc.) while the exposure is being maintained, the standard
exposure will be updated to the exposure at the moment the camera
turns off.
 This function also works with changes in the highest f/number (minimum
aperture).
 If you set [ISO speed] or [Shutter speed], do 1, 2, or 3, and then undo 1,
2, or 3 without manually changing the ISO speed, shutter speed, or
aperture, so that the camera is back to its original state, the original
exposure setting will be restored.
 If [ISO speed] is set and the ISO speed increases to an expanded ISO
speed, the shutter speed may change to maintain the exposure.
407
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn2: Exposure
Set shutter speed range
You can set the shutter speed range. In the <s> <a> modes, you
can set the shutter speed manually within the shutter speed range that
you have set. In the <d> <f> modes, the shutter speed will be set
automatically within the shutter speed range that you have set.
Highest speed
You can set it from 1/8000 sec. to 15 sec.
Lowest speed
You can set it from 30 sec. to 1/4000 sec.
Set aperture range
You can set the aperture range. In the <f> <a> <F> modes, you
can set the aperture manually within the aperture range that you have
set. In the <d> <s> modes, the aperture will be set automatically
within the aperture range that you have set.
Min. aperture (Max. f/)
You can set it from f/91 to f/1.4.
Max. aperture (Min. f/)
You can set it from f/1.0 to f/64.
The settable aperture range will differ depending on the lens’s maximum
and minimum apertures.
408
3 Custom Function SettingsN
C.Fn3: Others
Warnings z in viewfinder
When any of the following functions are set, the <z> icon can be
displayed in the viewfinder (p.31).
Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear, and
press <0> to append a <X>. Then select [OK] to register the setting.
When monochrome V is set
If the Picture Style is set to [Monochrome] (p.166), the warning
icon will appear.
When WB is corrected
If white balance correction is set (p.179), the warning icon will
appear.
When one-touch image quality is set
If you change the image-recording quality with the one-touch
image quality function (p.424), the warning icon will appear.
When M is set
If [z3: High ISO speed NR] is set to [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction] (p.183), the warning icon will appear.
When spot metering is set
If the metering mode is set to [Spot metering] (p.213), the
warning icon will appear.
If you set any of the checkmarked [X] functions, <z> will also appear for
the respective setting displayed on the Quick Control screen (p.60) and
Custom Quick Control screen (p.427).
409
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Dial direction during Tv/Av
: Normal
: Reverse direction
Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture
can be reversed.
In the <a> shooting mode, the turning direction of the <6> and
<5> dials will be reversed. In other shooting modes, the turning
direction of only the <6> dial will be reversed. The <5> dial’s
turning direction in the <a> mode and the turning direction to set
the exposure compensation in the <d>, <s>, and <f> mode
will be the same.
Multi function lock
When the <R> switch is set to the right, it can prevent the <6>,
<5>, and <9> from accidentally changing a setting.
Select the camera control you want to lock, then press <0> to
append a checkmark [X]. Select [OK] to register the setting.
6 Main Dial
5 Quick Control Dial
9 Multi-controller
 If the <R> switch is set and you try to use any of the locked
camera controls, <L> will appear in the viewfinder and on the LCD
panel. Also, [LOCK] will appear on the Quick Control screen (p.60) and
Custom Quick Control screen (p.427).
 By default, when locked, the <5> dial will be locked.
 Even if the <5> dial is appended with a [X] checkmark, you can still
use the touch pad <h>.
410
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Custom Controls
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials
according to your preferences. For details, see page 413.
Add cropping information
If you set cropping information, vertical lines for the aspect ratio you
have set will appear on the Live View image. You can then compose
the shot as if you were shooting with a medium- or large-format
camera (6x6 cm, 4x5 inch, etc.).
When you take a picture, the aspect ratio information for cropping the
image with the EOS software will be appended to the image. (The
image is recorded to the card without being cropped.)
After the image is transferred to a computer, you can use Digital Photo
Professional (EOS software, p.504) to easily crop the image to the
aspect ratio that was set.
OFF
6:6
3:4
4:5
: Off
: Aspect ratio 6:6
: Aspect ratio 3:4
: Aspect ratio 4:5
6:7 : Aspect ratio 6:7
5:6 : Aspect ratio 10:12
5:7 : Aspect ratio 5:7
 If [z4: Crop/aspect ratio] is set to any setting other than [Full-frame],
the cropping information cannot be set.
 Cropping information will also be appended for viewfinder shooting.
However, the cropping range will not be displayed.
 Even if a RAW image with cropping information added is processed with
the camera (p.364), the JPEG image cannot be saved as the cropped
image.
411
3 Custom Function SettingsN
Default Erase option
During image playback and image review after image capture, when
you press the <L> button, the erase menu appears (p.358). You can
set which option, [Cancel] or [Erase], is to be preselected on this
screen.
If [Erase] is set, you can just press <0> to quickly erase the image.
: [Cancel] selected
L : [Erase] selected
If [Erase] is set, be careful not to erase an image accidentally.
Retract lens on power off
This is to set the lens retraction mechanism for when a gear-driven
STM lens (such as EF40mm f/2.8 STM) is attached to the camera. You
can set it to retract the extended lens automatically when the camera’s
power switch is set to <2>.
ON: Enable
OFF: Disable
 With auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.
 Make sure that the lens has been retracted before detaching it.
When [Enable] is set, this function takes effect regardless of the lens’s
focus mode switch setting (AF or MF).
412
83: Custom ControlsN
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials
according to your preferences.
1
Select [83: Custom Controls].
 Under the [83] tab, select [Custom
Controls], then press <0>.
 The Custom Controls screen to select
control buttons and dials will appear.
a camera button or dial.
2 Select
 Select a camera button or dial, then
press <0>.
 The name of the camera control and
the assignable functions will be
displayed.
a function.
3 Assign
 Select a function, then press <0>.
 If the [z] icon appears on the
bottom left, you can press the
<B> button and set other related
options.
the setting.
4 Exit
 When you press <0> to exit the
setting, the screen in step 2 will
reappear.
 Press the <M> button to exit.
With the screen in step 2 displayed, you can press the <L> button to revert
the Custom Control settings to their defaults. Note that the [83: Custom
Controls] settings will not be canceled even if you select [84: Clear all
Custom Func. (C.Fn)].
413
83: Custom ControlsN
Assignable Functions to Camera Controls
Function
Page
k*1
k*1
419
k
k
420
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Metering and AF start
418
AF stop
k
AF
Switch to registered AF function
ONE SHOT z AI SERVO
Switch to registered AF point
AF point direct selection
Direct AF point selection: Vertical
421
Pause Movie Servo AF
Metering start
421
AE lock
k
AE lock (while button pressed)
Exposure
AE lock (hold)
AE lock, AF stop
422
FE lock
Set ISO speed (hold button, turn
Set ISO speed (
)
during metering)
Exposure compensation (hold button,
turn
)
Shutter speed setting in M mode
Aperture setting in M mode
414
k
423
83: Custom ControlsN
k
k
k
k*2
k*2
k
k
k*3
k*3
k
k*4
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
<
> stands for “AF stop button” provided on super telephoto lenses
equipped with Image Stabilizer.
415
83: Custom ControlsN
Images
Assignable Functions to Camera Controls
Function
Page
Switch between crop/aspect
423
One-touch image quality setting
One-touch image quality (hold)
424
Image quality
Picture Style
425
Depth-of-field preview
IS start
Menu display
425
Operation
Register/recall shooting function
k*7
k*7
k
k
Image playback
Magnify/Reduce (press SET, turn
)
Cycle: y • g/Drive • AF/WB • q
426
Unlock while button pressed
Flash function settings
No function (disabled)
416
83: Custom ControlsN
k*5
k*6
k*6
k*
k*6
6
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
<
> stands for “AF stop button” provided on super telephoto lenses
equipped with Image Stabilizer.
417
83: Custom ControlsN
: Metering and AF start
When you press the button assigned to this function, metering and AF
are executed.
*1:When assigned to the <p> or <A> button,
pressing the <B> button while the setting
screen is displayed will enable you to set the
detailed AF settings. When shooting, pressing the
<p> or <A> button will execute AF as it was
set.
 AF start position
When [Registered AF point] is set, you can press the <p> or
<A> button to switch to the registered AF point.
Registering the AF Point
1. Set the AF area selection mode to one of the following: Singlepoint Spot AF (manual selection), Single-point AF (manual
selection), AF point expansion (manual selection ), AF point
expansion (manual selection, surrounding points), or 61-point
automatic selection AF. Zone AF (manual selection of zone)
cannot be selected.
2. Select an AF point manually.
3. Hold down the <S> button and press the <U> button. A beep
will sound and the AF point will be registered. If the AF area
selection mode is set to any setting other than 61-point automatic
selection AF, the registered AF point will blink.
 When the AF point is registered, the following will be displayed:
• 61-point automatic selection AF:
HP (HP: Home Position)
• Spot AF, 1 pt AF, Expand AF Area: SEL (Center), SEL HP (Off
center)
 To cancel the registered AF point, hold down the <S> button and press
the <m> button. The registered AF point will also be canceled if you
select [54: Clear all camera settings].
418
83: Custom ControlsN
 AI Servo AF characteristics (p.109)
Press the <p> or <A> button to perform AF with the set case
from [Case1] to [Case6].
 AF operation (p.86)
Press the <p> or <A> button to perform AF with the set AF
operation.
 AF area selection mode (p.90)
Press the <p> or <A> button to perform AF with the set AF
area selection mode.
If you want to keep using currently selected AF point when you press
the <p> or <A> button, set [AF start position] to [Manually
selected AF point]. If you want to keep the currently set AI Servo AF
characteristics, AF operation, and AF area selection mode, select
[Maintain current setting].
 If [24: Orientation linked AF point] is set to [Separate AF pts:
Area+pt] or [Separate AF pts: Pt only], you can register the AF points
to be used separately for vertical (grip up or down) and horizontal
shooting.
 If [AF start position: Registered AF point] and [AF area selection
mode] are both set, [Registered AF point] will take effect.
: AF stop
The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this
function. Convenient when you want to stop the AF during AI Servo AF.
419
83: Custom ControlsN
: Switch to registered AF function
After setting and assigning this function to a button, you can apply the
following settings by holding down the assigned button for AF: AF area
selection mode (p.90), Tracking sensitivity (p.114), Acceleration/
deceleration tracking (p.115), AF point auto switching (p.116), Servo 1st
image priority (p.118), and Servo 2nd image priority (p.119). Convenient
when you want to change the AF characteristics during AI Servo AF.
*2:On the setting screen, press the <B> button to
display the detailed settings screen. Turn the <5>
or <6> dial to select the parameter to be
registered, then press <0> to append a
checkmark [X]. When you select a parameter and
press <0>, you can adjust the parameter.
By pressing the <L> button, you can revert the
settings to their defaults.
: ONE SHOT z AI SERVO
You can switch the AF operation. In One-Shot AF mode, when you hold
down the button to which this function is assigned, the camera switches
to AI Servo AF mode. In the AI Servo AF mode, the camera switches to
One-Shot AF mode only while you hold down the button. Convenient
when you need to keep switching between One-Shot AF and AI Servo
AF for a subject that keeps moving and stopping.
: Switch to registered AF point
During metering, when you press the button assigned to this function,
focusing point can be switched to the registered AF point.
*3:On the setting screen, when you press the <B> button, you can select [Switch
only when btn is held] or [Switch each time btn is pressed]. To register the AF
point, see page 418.
420
83: Custom ControlsN
: Direct AF point selection
During metering, you can select an AF point directly with the <9> dial
or <5> without pressing the <S> button. With the <5> dial, you can
select a left or right AF point. (Looping sequence for Zone AF.)
*4:On the Multi-controller setting screen, when you press the <B> button, you can
press the center of <9> to select [Switch to center AF point] or [Switch to
registered AF point]. To register the AF point, see page 418.
: Direct AF point selection: Vertical
During metering, you can turn the <5> dial to directly select an upper
or lower AF point without pressing the <S> button. (Looping sequence
for Zone AF.)
: Pause Movie Servo AF
During Movie Servo AF, you can pause the AF by pressing the Depthof-field preview button or <0>. Press the button again to resume
Movie Servo AF.
: Metering start
When you press the shutter button halfway, exposure metering is
performed (AF is not performed).
: AE lock
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock) during metering. Convenient when you want to
focus and meter the shot at different areas or when you want to take
multiple shots at the same exposure setting.
To change the aperture in <a> mode when [Direct AF point selection],
[Direct AF pt select: Vertical], or [Set ISO speed ( during metering)]
(p.422) is assigned to <5>, turn the <6> dial while holding down the
<A> button.
421
83: Custom ControlsN
: AE lock (while button pressed)
The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while you press the shutter
button.
: AE lock (hold)
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock). The AE lock will be maintained until you press the
button again. Convenient when you want to focus and meter the shot at
different areas or when you want to take multiple shots at the same
exposure setting.
: AE lock, AF stop
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock) and the AF will stop. Convenient during AI Servo AF
if you want AE lock at the same time when AF stops.
: FE lock
During flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function
will fire a preflash and record the required flash output (FE lock).
: Set ISO speed (hold button, turn
)
You can set the ISO speed by holding down <0> and turning the
<6> dial.
If this control is used while Auto ISO is set, manual ISO speed setting
will take effect. Auto ISO cannot be set. If you use this function in the
<a> mode, you can adjust the exposure with the ISO speed while
maintaining the current shutter speed and aperture.
: Set ISO speed (
during metering)
During metering, you can set the ISO speed by turning the <5> dial.
The settable range is the same as with
.
If you assign [AE lock (while button pressed)] to the shutter button, any
buttons assigned to [AE lock] or [AE lock (hold)] will also work as [AE lock
(while button pressed)].
422
83: Custom ControlsN
: Exposure compensation (hold button, turn
)
You can set the exposure compensation by holding down <0> and
turning the <6> dial. Convenient when you want to set exposure
compensation while <a> manual exposure and Auto ISO are set.
: Shutter speed setting in M mode
In manual exposure <a>, you can set the shutter speed with the
<6> or <5> dial.
: Aperture setting in M mode
In manual exposure <a>, you can set the aperture with the <5> or
<6> dial.
: Switch between crop/aspect
When you press the <B> button, you can switch from full-frame
shooting to crop shooting (approx. 1.3x or 1.6x) or shooting with the set
aspect ratio (1:1, 4:3, or 16:9). Pressing the <B> button switches
the setting.
*5:On the setting screen, press the <B> button to
display the detailed settings screen. Turn the <5>
dial to select the setting to be switched to, then
press <0> to append a checkmark [X].
The operations for [Set ISO speed (hold btn, turn
)] (p.422) and [Expo
comp (hold btn, turn
)] are possible even when the <R> switch is
set to the right (Multi function lock, p.59).
423
83: Custom ControlsN
: One-touch image quality setting
Pressing the button assigned to this function will switch to the imagerecording quality set here. While this change is in effect, the imagerecording quality (JPEG/RAW) will blink in the viewfinder (with [Show/
hide in viewfinder]’s [Image quality] checkmarked). After the shooting
ends, the One-touch image quality setting will be canceled and the
image-recording quality will be switched back to the previous quality.
*6:On the setting screen, by pressing the <B> button, you can select the imagerecording quality for this function.
: One-touch image quality (hold)
Pressing the button assigned to this function will switch to the imagerecording quality set here. While this change is in effect, the imagerecording quality (JPEG/RAW) will blink in the viewfinder (with [Show/
hide in viewfinder]’s [Image quality] checkmarked). Even after
shooting, the One-touch image quality setting will not be canceled. To
revert to the previous image-recording quality setting, press the button
assigned to this function again.
*6:You can select the image-recording quality for this function by pressing the <B>
button in the setting screen.
: Image quality
Press <0> to display the image-recording quality setting screen
(p.149) on the LCD monitor.
If RAW or RAW+JPEG is set for the image-recording quality to be switched
to with [One-touch image quality setting] and [One-touch image quality
(hold)], [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] (p.183) will not work after the switch.
For [z3: High ISO speed noise reduct’n], [Standard] will be applied for
shooting.
When the image-recording quality is switched with the One-touch image
quality setting, you can display <z> in the viewfinder (p.409).
424
83: Custom ControlsN
: Picture Style
Press <0> to display the Picture Style selection setting screen on the
LCD monitor (p.164).
: Depth-of-field preview
When you press the depth-of-field preview button, the aperture will stop
down and you can check the depth of field (p.209).
: IS start
If you press the button assigned to this function when the lens’s IS
switch is set to <1>, lens’s Image Stabilizer will operate (p.55).
: Menu display
Press <0> to display the menu on the LCD monitor.
: Register/recall shooting function
You can manually set the main shooting functions such as the shutter
speed, aperture, ISO speed, metering mode and AF area selection
mode, and register them to the camera. Only while you hold down the
button assigned to this function, you can recall and use the registered
shooting function settings and shoot.
*7:On the setting screen, press the <B> button to
display the detailed settings. Turn the <5> or
<6> dial to select the function to be registered,
then press <0> to append a checkmark [X] to it.
When you select a function and press <0>, you
can adjust the setting. By pressing the <L> button,
you can revert the settings to their defaults.
By selecting [Register current settings], the
camera’s current settings will be registered. To
register the AF point, see page 418.
425
83: Custom ControlsN
: Image playback
Pressing <0> will play back images.
: Magnify/Reduce (press SET, turn
)
Press <0> to magnify or reduce the images recorded on the card. See
page 330 for the operation procedure. During Live View or movie
shooting (except u+Tracking), you can also magnify the image (p.274,
275).
: Cycle: y • g/Drive • AF/WB • q
Pressing the <B> button changes the settable function in this
sequence: y•g9R•f9B•q.
: Unlock while button pressed
Even when the <R> switch is set to the right, only while you hold
down the depth-of-field preview button, you can use the camera control
buttons and dials restricted by [83: Multi function lock].
: Flash function settings
Pressing <0> will display the flash function setting screen.
: No function (disabled)
Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the
button.
426
Custom Quick Control
On the standard Quick Control screen (p.60), pre-determined shooting
functions are displayed in the default layout. On the Custom Quick
Control screen, you can customize the screen with your preferred
shooting functions and layout. This feature is called “Custom Quick
Control”.
This page explains how to change the layout of the Custom Quick
Control screen. Page 61 explains how to use the Quick Control screen,
and page 442 explains how to display the Custom Quick Control screen.
1
Select [Custom Quick Control].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Custom
Quick Control], then press <0>.
2 Select [Start editing layout].
the operation procedure
3 Read
and select [OK].
• Q : Add item
• L : Remove
• s : Select and confirm
 Items displayed on the default screen
are shown on the left.
427
Custom Quick Control
an item.
4 Add
 Press the <Q> button.
 Turn the <5> dial or use <9> to
select the item to be added, then
press <0>.
 To remove an item, select the item,
then press the <L> button.
Otherwise, select [Clear all items] in
step 2.
 For items that let you select the icon
size, turn the <5> dial or use <9>
to select the size, then press <0>.
 For items which can be positioned
and for display sizes, see page 430.
the item.
5 Position
 Use <6>, <5> or <9> to move
the item (framed with directional
wedges) to the desired position.
 If you want to change the size, press
the <B> button to change it.
 Press <0> to place the item. If there
is already an item on that position, it
will be overwritten (deleted).
 To move an item to another position,
select the item and press <0> to
move it.
If you first want to delete all the items displayed by default, select [Clear all
items] in step 2 and then go to step 4.
428
Custom Quick Control
Sample layout
 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to position
other items as desired.
 To delete an item already in position,
select it and press the <L> button.
the setting.
6 Exit
 Press the <M> button to exit the
setting. The screen in step 2 will
reappear.
Sample screen
the setting screen.
7 Check
 Under [53: z button display
options], check that [Custom Quick
Control screen] is checkmarked
(p.442).
 Press the <B> button to display
the Custom Quick Control screen
(p.442) and check the layout.
 Press the <Q> button to use the
Quick Control screen (p.61).
Resetting the Custom Quick Control Screen or
Clearing All Items
In step 2, selecting [Revert layout to default] will revert the Custom
Quick Control screen to the default layout of Custom Quick Control
screen (p.427).
Selecting [Clear all items] will delete all the items set. The screen will
then be blank.
429
Custom Quick Control
Available Items and Display Sizes for the Screen Layout
(Vertical x horizontal cells)
Item and Size
1x1
1x2
1x3
Shooting mode
k
Shutter speed
k
k
Aperture
k
k
ISO speed
k
k
Exposure compensation/
AEB setting
k
k
k
Flash exposure
compensation
k
k
k
Picture Style
k
White balance
k
k
White balance shift/
bracketing
k
k
Auto Lighting Optimizer
k
Custom Controls
k
AF operation
k
AF point selection
k
Metering mode
k
Drive mode
k
Recording function/
card selection
k
k
Date/Time/Zone
k
k
External Speedlite control
k
Highlight tone priority
k
Viewfinder grid
k
Sensor cleaning
k
2x2
2x3
k
k
k
k
k
k
 Depending on the items, the amount of displayable information and
settable functions for Quick Control may vary due to their display sizes.
 The same item cannot be placed in multiple positions on the screen.
430
Custom Quick Control
<A> Mode Settings and Display Conditions
You can also set Custom Quick Control and display the Custom Quick
Control screen in the <A> mode.
However, functions such as [Expo.comp./AEB] that are not displayed
on the menu screen for <A> mode will not appear on the Custom
Quick Control screen. Also, [ISO speed] and other functions that
cannot be set with the Quick Control screen in the <A> mode will be
grayed out.
 Not displayed
Exposure compensation/AEB, Flash exposure compensation, White
balance shift/bracketing, Custom Controls, External Speedlite
control, Highlight tone priority
 Grayed out (not settable with the Quick Control screen)
Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO speed, Picture Style, White balance,
Auto Lighting Optimizer, AF operation, AF point selection, Metering
mode
431
3 Registering My MenuN
Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom
Functions whose settings you change frequently. You can also name
the registered menu tabs and press the <M> button to display the
My Menu tab first.
Adding My Menu Tab
1
Select [Add My Menu tab].
 Under the [9] tab, select [Add My
Menu tab], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
 The [MY MENU1] tab is created.
 You can create up to five menu tabs
by repeating steps 1 and 2.
Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s)
1
432
Select [Configure: MY MENU*].
 Turn the <6> dial to select
[Configure: MY MENU*] (tab for
registering menu items), then press
<0>.
3 Registering My MenuN
2 Select [Select items to register].
the desired items.
3 Register
 Select the desired item, then press
<0>.
 Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog.
 You can register up to six items.
 To return to the screen in step 2,
press the <M> button.
My Menu Tab Settings
You can sort and delete items under the
menu tab, and rename or delete the
menu tab.
 Sort registered items
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select
[Sort registered items] and select the item whose order you want to
change. Then press <0>. With [z] displayed, turn the <5> dial to
change the order, then press <0>.
 Delete selected items / Delete all items on tab
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all
registered items.
433
3 Registering My MenuN
 Delete tab
You can delete the My Menu tab currently displayed. Select [Delete
tab] to delete the [MY MENU*] tab.
 Rename tab
You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].
1 Select [Rename tab].
text.
2 Enter
 Press the <L> button to delete any
unnecessary characters.
 Press the <Q> button. The text
palette will be highlighted with a color
frame, and text can be entered.
 Operate the <5> dial or <9> to
move the and select the desired
character. Then press <0> to enter
it.
 You can enter up to 16 characters.
the setting.
3 Exit
 After entering the text, press the
<M> button, then select [OK].
 The name is saved.
434
3 Registering My MenuN
Deleting all My Menu tabs / Deleting all items
You can delete all My Menu tabs and
delete all My Menu items.
 Delete all My Menu tabs
You can delete all My Menu tabs. When you select [Delete all My
Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] will be
deleted and the [9] tab will revert to its default.
 Delete all items
You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to
[MY MENU5] tabs and keep the tabs. The menu tab(s) will remain.
When [Delete all items] is selected, all the items registered under
all the created tabs will be deleted.
If you do [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs], tab names renamed
with [Rename tab] will also be deleted.
435
3 Registering My MenuN
Menu Display Settings
You can select [Menu display] to set the
menu screen that is to appear first when
you press the <M> button.
 Normal display
Displays the last displayed menu screen.
 Display from My Menu tab
Displays with the [9] tab selected.
 Display only My Menu tab
Only the [9] tab is displayed. (The z, 2, 3, 5, and 8 tabs will
not be displayed.)
436
w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN
You can register current camera settings, such as the shooting mode,
menu functions, and Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting
modes under the Mode Dial’s <w>, <x>, and <y> positions.
1
Select [Custom shooting mode
(C1-C3)].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Custom
shooting mode (C1-C3)], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Register settings].
the Custom shooting
3 Register
mode.
 Select the Custom shooting mode to
be registered, then press <0>.
 Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog.
 The current camera settings (p.438439) will be registered under the
Mode Dial’s C* position.
Automatic Updating
If you change a setting while you shoot in the <w>, <x>, or <y>
mode, the respective Custom shooting mode can be automatically
updated to reflect the changes in settings. To enable this automatic
update, in step 2, set [Auto update set.] to [Enable].
Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes
In step 2, if you select [Clear settings], the settings of respective
modes will revert to the default settings with no Custom shooting modes
registered.
437
w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN
Settings To Be Registered
 Shooting functions
Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO speed, AF operation,
AF area selection mode, AF point, Drive mode, Metering mode,
Exposure compensation amount, Flash exposure compensation
amount
 Menu functions
[z1] Image quality, Image review time, Beep, Release shutter
without card, Lens aberration correction, Flash firing, E-TTL II
flash metering, Flash sync speed in Av mode
[z2] Exposure compensation/AEB, ISO speed settings, Auto
Lighting Optimizer, White balance, Custom White Balance,
White balance shift/bracketing, Color space
[z3] Picture Style, Long exposure noise reduction, High ISO
speed noise reduction, Highlight tone priority, Multiple
exposure (settings), HDR Mode (settings)
[z4] Interval timer, Bulb timer, Anti-flicker shooting, Mirror lockup,
Crop/aspect ratio
[z5 (Live View shooting)]
Live View shooting, AF method, Continuous AF, Grid display,
Exposure simulation
[z6 (Live View shooting)]
Silent LV shooting, Metering timer
[z4 (Movie)]
Movie Servo AF, AF method, Grid display, Movie recording
size, Sound recording
[z5 (Movie)]
Silent LV shooting, Metering timer, Movie recording count,
Movie play count, Silent control, V button function, Timelapse movie (settings)
[21] Case 1, Case 2, Case 3, Case 4, Case 5, Case 6
[22] AI Servo 1st image priority, AI Servo 2nd image priority
438
w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN
[23] Lens electronic MF, AF-assist beam firing, One-Shot AF
release priority
[24] Lens drive when AF impossible, Selectable AF point, Select
AF area selection mode, AF area selection method,
Orientation linked AF point, Initial AF point,
AI Servo AF,
Auto AF point selection: EOS iTR AF
[25] Manual AF point selection pattern, AF point display during
focus, VF display illumination, AF Microadjustment
[x2] Slide show (settings), Image jump with 6
[x3] Highlight alert, AF point display, Playback grid, Histogram
display, Movie play count, Magnification (approx.)
[51] File numbering, Auto rotate, Eye-Fi settings
[52] Auto power off, LCD brightness, Viewfinder display
[53] Auto cleaning, z button display options, m button
function
[81] Exposure level increments, ISO speed setting increments,
Bracketing auto cancel, Bracketing sequence, Number of
bracketed shots, Safety shift, Same exposure for new
aperture
[82] Set shutter speed range, Set aperture range
[83] Dial direction during Tv/Av, Multi function lock, Custom
Controls, Add cropping information, Default Erase option,
Retract lens on power off
My Menu settings will not be registered under Custom shooting modes.
 Even when the Mode Dial is set to <w>, <x>, or <y>, you can still
change shooting function settings and menu settings.
 By pressing the <B> button, you can check which shooting mode is
registered under <w>, <x>, and <y> (p.442-444).
439
440
14
Reference
This chapter provides reference information for camera
features, system accessories, etc.
Certification Logo
Select [54: Certification Logo Display] and press <0> to
display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other
certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the
camera body, and on the camera’s package.
441
B Button Functions
When the camera is ready to shoot,
pressing the <B> button can switch
the display as follows: Camera settings,
Electronic level (p.75), Quick Control
screen (p.60), and Custom Quick Control
screen (p.427).
Under the [53] tab, [z button
display options] enables you to select
the options displayed when the <B>
button is pressed.
 Select the desired display option and
press <0> to append a checkmark
[X].
 After completing the selections, select
[OK].
Camera settings
Electronic level
Custom Quick
Control screen
Quick Control screen
442
B Button Functions
 If you turn off the power while the Electronic level, Quick Control screen,
or Custom Quick Control screen is displayed, the same screen will be
displayed when you turn on the power again. To cancel this function,
press the <B> button a number of times until the screen is blank,
then turn off the power switch.
 Note that you cannot remove the [X] for all four display options.
 The [Displays camera settings] sample screen is displayed in English
for all languages.
 Even if you uncheck the [Electronic level] so it does not appear, it will
still appear for Live View shooting and movie shooting when you press
the <B> button.
 While the Quick Control screen or Custom Quick Control screen is
displayed, pressing the <Q> button enables you to set a function with
Quick Control (p.61).
Camera Settings
Shooting mode
registered under the
Mode Dial’s wxy
(p.437)
(p.178)
(p.134)
(p.179, 180)
(p.193)
Transfer of some
images failed*
(p.395)
(p.185)
(p.183)
(p.44, 151)
(p.196)
* This icon is displayed when the transfer of some images failed.
443
B Button Functions
Quick Control Screen
Aperture
Shutter speed
Shooting mode
AE lock
Highlight tone priority
Exposure level
indicator
ISO speed
Exposure
compensation
Exposure
compensation
Custom Controls
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
White balance
correction
Picture Style
AF operation
Quick Control icon
Battery level
White balance
Metering mode
Eye-Fi card transmission status
GPS acquisition status
Drive mode
Image-recording
quality
Possible shots
Maximum burst/Number of
remaining multiple exposures
Card indicator
Multiple exposures/HDR/
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Card selection icon
Flash-ready/FE lock/
High-speed sync
Custom Quick Control Screen
For the Custom Quick Control screen, see page 427.
444
B Button Functions
Button Functions for the Quick Control and
Custom Quick Control Screens
When you press the <n>, <o>, <m>, or <S> button,
the setting screen appears and you can use <6>, <5>, <9>, or
<B> to set the functions.
Metering mode / White balance
AF operation / Drive mode
ISO speed /
Flash exposure compensation
AF point selection
445
3 Checking the Battery Information
You can check the battery’s condition on the LCD monitor. Each Battery
Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 has a unique serial number, and you can register
multiple batteries to the camera. When you use this feature, you can
check the registered batteries’ approximate remaining capacity and
operation history.
Select [Battery info.].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Battery
info.], then press <0>.
 The battery info. screen will appear.
Battery position
Battery model or household power source
being used.
The battery level indicator (p.48) is
displayed together with the remaining
battery level shown in 1% increments.
The number of shots taken with the current
battery. The number is reset when the
battery is recharged.
Battery’s recharge performance level is
displayed in one of three levels.
(Green): Battery’s recharge performance is fine.
(Green): Battery’s recharge performance is slightly degraded.
(Red): Purchasing a new battery is recommended.
Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is recommended. If
you use batteries that are not genuine Canon products, the camera’s full
performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.
 The shutter count is the number of still photos taken. (Movies are not
counted.)
 The battery information will also be displayed when Battery Pack LPE6N/LP-E6 is used with Battery Grip BG-E11 (sold separately). If AA/R6
batteries are used, only the remaining battery level will be displayed.
446
3 Checking the Battery Information
If a battery communication error message is displayed, follow the
instructions in the message.
Registering Batteries to the Camera
You can register up to six LP-E6N/LP-E6 batteries to the camera. To
register multiple batteries to the camera, follow the procedure below for
each battery.
1
Press the <B> button.
 With the battery info. screen
displayed, press the <B> button.
 The battery history screen will
appear.
 If the battery is not registered, it will
be grayed out.
[Register].
2 Select
 The confirmation dialog will appear.
[OK].
3 Select
 The battery will be registered and the
battery history screen will reappear.
 The grayed out battery number will
now be displayed in white.
 Press the <M> button. The battery
info. screen will reappear.
 The battery cannot be registered if Battery Grip BG-E11 (sold separately)
using AA/R6 batteries is attached or the camera is powered by the DC
Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately) and AC Adapter AC-E6N (sold
separately).
 If six batteries are already registered, [Register] cannot be selected. To
delete unnecessary battery information, see page 449.
447
3 Checking the Battery Information
Labeling Serial Numbers on Batteries
It is convenient to label each registered Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6
with their serial numbers, using commercially-available labels.
1
Serial number
Write the serial number on a
label.
 Write the serial number displayed on
the battery history screen on a label
approx. 25 mm x 15 mm / 1.0 in. x 0.6
in. in size.
b 2 9 fd
a30
the battery and affix the
2 Remove
label.
 Set the power switch to <2>.
 Open the battery compartment cover
and remove the battery.
 Affix the label as shown in the
illustration (on the side with no
electrical contacts).
 Repeat this procedure for all of your
batteries so you can easily see the
serial number.
 Do not affix the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in
step 2. Otherwise, the misplaced label may make it difficult to insert the
battery or impossible to turn on the camera.
 If you use Battery Grip BG-E11 (sold separately), the label may peel off
as you repeatedly insert and remove the battery. If it peels off, affix a new
label.
448
3 Checking the Battery Information
Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery
You can check the remaining capacity of any battery (even when not
installed) and also when it was last used.
Serial number
Date last used
Look for the serial number.
 Refer to the battery’s serial number
label and look for the battery’s serial
number on the battery history screen.
 You can check the respective
battery’s remaining capacity and the
date when it was last used.
Remaining capacity
of a battery
Deleting the Registered Battery Information
1
Select [Delete info.].
 Follow step 2 on page 447 to select [Delete info.], then press
<0>.
2 Select the battery information to be deleted.
 Select the battery information to be deleted, then press <0>.
 [X] will appear.
 To delete information for another battery, repeat this procedure.
3 Press the <L> button.
 The confirmation dialog will appear.
4 Select [OK].
 The battery information will be deleted and the screen in step 1
will reappear.
449
Using a Household Power Outlet
You can power the camera with a household power outlet by using the
DC Coupler DR-E6 and AC Adapter AC-E6N (both sold separately).
1
Connect the DC Coupler’s plug.
 Connect the DC Coupler’s plug to the
AC Adapter’s socket.
the power cord.
2 Connect
 Connect the power cord as shown in
the illustration.
 After using the camera, unplug the
power plug from the power outlet.
the cord in the groove.
3 Place
 Insert the DC Coupler’s cord to the
groove carefully without damaging
the cord.
the DC Coupler.
4 Insert
 Open the battery compartment cover
DC Coupler cord hole
and open the DC Coupler cord hole
cover.
 Insert the DC Coupler securely until it
locks and put the cord through the
hole.
 Close the cover.
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord or DC Coupler while the
camera’s power switch is set to <1>.
450
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can
automatically transfer captured images to a computer or upload them to
an online service via a wireless LAN.
The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on
how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image
transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or
contact the card manufacturer.
The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card
functions (including wireless transfer). In case of a problem
with an Eye-Fi card, please check with the card manufacturer.
Also note that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in
many countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card
is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been
approved for use in your area, please check with the card
manufacturer.
1 Insert an Eye-Fi card (p.43).
[Eye-Fi settings].
2 Select
 Under the [51] tab, select [Eye-Fi
settings], then press <0>.
 This menu is displayed only when an
Eye-Fi card is inserted into the
camera.
Eye-Fi transmission.
3 Enable
 Select [Eye-Fi trans.], then press
<0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
 If you set [Disable], there will be no
automatic transmission even with the
Eye-Fi card inserted (transmission
status icon I).
451
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
the connection
4 Display
information.
 Select [Connection info.], then press
<0>.
the [Access point SSID:].
5 Check
 Check that an access point is
displayed for [Access point SSID:].
 You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s
MAC address and firmware version.
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
the picture.
6 Take
 The picture is transferred and the
Transmission status
[H] icon switches from gray (not
connected) to one of the icons below.
 For transferred images, [O] is
displayed in the shooting information
display (p.323).
H(Gray) Not connected :
H(Blinking) Connecting... :
H(Illuminated) Connected :
H(d) Transferring...
:
452
No connection with access point.
Connecting to access point.
Connection to access point established.
Image transfer to access point in
progress.
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards
 If “ ” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card
information. Turn the camera’s power switch off and on again.
 Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In
hospitals, airports, and other places where wireless transmissions are
prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera.
 If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and
computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s instruction manual.
 Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image
transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted.
 The Eye-Fi card may become hot as it transmits.
 The battery power will be consumed faster.
 During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.
 If you insert a wireless LAN card other than an Eye-Fi card, [Eye-Fi
settings] will not appear. Also, the transmission status icon <H> will not
appear.
453
System Map
ST-E2
ST-E3-RT
Dioptric Adjustment
Lenses Eg
270EX II
430EX III-RT/ 600EX II-RT
430EX III
Macro Ring Lite
MR-14EX II
Macro Twin Lite
MT-26EX-RT
Bundled
Accessories
Eyecup Eg
Anti-Fog
Eyepiece Eg
Cable protector
Wide Strap
Angle Finder C
Battery Pack
LP-E6N*1
Battery Charger
LC-E6E
Hand Strap E2
AC Adapter DC Coupler
AC-E6N*5
DR-E6*5
Leather Case
EH20-L
Protecting
Cloth PC-E1
454
Battery Grip
BG-E11
Battery Magazine
BGM-E11L for
LP-E6N/LP-E6
(attached to BG-E11)
Car Battery
Cable CB-570
Car Battery
Charger
CBC-E6
Battery Magazine
BGM-E11A for
AA/R6 batteries
(attached to BG-E11)
System Map
GPS Receiver
GP-E2*2
Timer Remote Remote
Switch
Controller
TC-80N3 RS-80N3
Wireless
Controller
LC-5
Remote
Controller
RC-6
EF lenses
Directional
Stereo
Microphone
DM-E1
HDMI Cable
HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)
Wireless File
Transmitter
WFT-E7 (Ver. 2)/
WFT-E7*3
EOS
Solution Disk
TV/Video
Wireless LAN
access point
Wireless LAN adapter
Interface Cable IFC-150U II
(1.5 m/4.9 ft.)
Interface Cable IFC-500U II*4 (4.7 m/15.4 ft.)
Ethernet port
USB port
Computer
CF Card
Card reader
Connect Station
CS100
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory card
PictBridge-compatible printer
*1: Battery Pack LP-E6 can also be used.
*2: To use the GP-E2 with a cable, the GP-E2’s firmware must be
updated to Version 2.0.0 or later and Interface Cable IFC-40AB II or IFC-150AB II must be used.
*3: To use the older model WFT-E7 (not Version 2), the WFT-E7’s firmware must be updated
and Interface Cable IFC-40AB II or IFC-150AB II must be used.
*4: With IFC-500U II, the communication speed will be equivalent to Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0).
*5: AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 can also be used.
* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.
455
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Still Photo Shooting
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function
All image quality settings selectable
d
s
f
a
F
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Crop/aspect ratio
ISO speed
Picture Style
Automatically set/Auto ISO
o
Manually set
Automatically set/Auto
o
Manual selection
Auto
o
Preset
White balance
Custom
Color temperature setting
Correction/Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
o
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction
o
Highlight tone priority
Lens aberration
correction
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Anti-flicker shooting*1
Color space
sRGB
k
k
o
o
Adobe RGB
One-Shot AF*1
AI Servo AF*1
AI Focus AF*1
o
AF area selection mode*1
AF
AF point
Manual focusing (MF)
o
k
AF Microadjustment*1
u (face)+Tracking*2
FlexZone - Single*2
Continuous AF*2
456
: Not selectable/Disabled
A
k
k
k
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Function
A
d
s
f
a
F
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k*3
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
High-speed continuous shooting
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Low-speed continuous shooting
k
k
k
k
k
k
Silent single shooting
10-sec. self-timer/Remote control
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
2-sec. self-timer/Remote control
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Evaluative metering
Metering
Partial metering
Spot metering
Center-weighted average metering
Program shift
Exposure compensation
AEB
AE lock
Exposure
Depth-of-field preview
HDR shooting
Multiple exposures
Interval timer*1
*4
k
k
k
k
Bulb timer
Mirror Lockup*1
Single shooting
Drive
Silent continuous shooting
Flash exposure compensation
External
Speedlite
FE lock*1
Function settings
Custom Function settings
Live View shooting
Quick Control
k
k
k
k
*1: Settable only with viewfinder shooting.
*2: Settable only during Live View shooting.
*3: Settable only when Auto ISO is set.
*4: With Auto ISO, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
457
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Movie Shooting
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
: Not selectable/Disabled
Still Photos*1
Movies
Function
Picture
Style
k
k
k k k
k
k
k
k
k k k
Automatically set/Auto ISO o
o
o o k o
o
k
k
k
k k k o
k
k
k
Color temperature setting
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Correction
k
k k k
o
k
k k k o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k k k o
k k k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k k k k
k
k
k
k
k k k k
k
k
o
o
o o o o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Manually set
Automatically set/Auto
o
Manual selection
Auto
o
Preset
White
balance
a
k
Time-lapse movie
Custom
M y
d/F/s/f
y
All image quality settings selectable
(movie)
All image quality settings selectable
(still photos)
ISO speed
A d/F s f a A
k
k
k
k
k
k
k o
k
k
k
Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
M
k
k
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction*2
Highlight tone priority
Peripheral illumination
Lens
correction
aberration
Chromatic aberration
correction
correction
sRGB
Color
space
Adobe RGB
u+Tracking
AF
FlexiZone - Single
Manual focusing (MF)
Movie Servo AF
458
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Still Photos*1
Movies
Function
Metering
A d/F s f
a
y
k
M y
o
o
o o
k
k
k k *3
k k k *4
o
A
o
d/F/s/f
a
M
k
o
o
k
k
k *4
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Program shift
AE lock
Exposure
Exposure compensation
*3
AEB
Depth-of-field preview
Single shooting
High-speed continuous
shooting
Low-speed continuous
shooting
Drive
Silent single shooting
Silent continuous
shooting
10-sec. self-timer/
Remote control*5
2-sec. self-timer/Remote
control*5
External Speedlite
Sound recording
k k k k k
k k k k k
Quick Control
k k k k k
*1: Indicates still photo shooting during movie shooting.
*2: Multi Shot Noise Reduction cannot be set.
*3: With Auto ISO, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
*4: Settable only when Auto ISO is set.
*5: Works only before you start shooting a movie.
Time code
459
Menu Settings
Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting
z: Shooting 1 (Red)
Page
1 / 41 / 61
Image quality
73 / 83 / 7K / 8K / 75 / 85 / 7a /
8a / b / c
149
Image review time
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold
70
Beep
Enable / Disable
69
Release shutter
without card
Enable / Disable
44
Lens aberration
correction
External Speedlite
control
Peripheral illumination: Enable / Disable
Chromatic aberration: Enable / Disable
Flash firing / E-TTL II metering / Flash sync.
speed in Av mode / Flash function settings /
Flash C.Fn settings / Clear settings
188
247
 Shaded menu options are not displayed in the <A> mode.
 What is displayed under [z1: Image quality] depends on the [Record
func.] (p.146) setting under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.]. If
[Rec. separately] is set, set the image quality for each card.
 With movie shooting, certain menu items are not displayed. Also, the
[z6] tab will not appear.
460
Menu Settings
z: Shooting 2 (Red)
Page
Exposure compensation/ 1/3- and 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops
(AEB ±3 stops)
AEB setting*
ISO speed settings
ISO speed / ISO speed range /
Auto ISO range / Minimum shutter speed
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Disable / Low / Standard / High
White balance
Disabled in M or B modes
Color space
158
182
Q (Ambience priority) / Qw (White priority) /
W/E/R/Y/U/D/O/P (Approx. 2500 - 174
10000)
Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance
White Balance Shift/
Bracketing
214
215
176
White balance correction: B/A/M/G bias, 9 levels each
White balance bracketing: B/A and M/G bias,
single-level increments, ±3 levels
179
sRGB / Adobe RGB
193
* During movie shooting, [Expo.comp./AEB] will be [Exposure comp.].
z: Shooting 3 (Red)
Picture Style
DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /
RLandscape / u Fine Detail /
SNeutral / UFaithful / VMonochrome /
WUser Def. 1-3
164
Long exposure noise
reduction
Disable / Auto / Enable
185
High ISO speed noise
reduction
Disable / Low / Standard / High /
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
183
Highlight tone priority
Disable / Enable
187
Dust Delete Data
Obtain data to be used by EOS software to
delete dust spots
375
Multiple exposure
Multiple exposure / Multiple exposure control /
Number of exposures / Save source images /
Continue multiple exposure
226
HDR Mode
Adjust dynamic range / Effect / Continuous
HDR / Auto Image Align / Save source images
221
461
Menu Settings
z: Shooting 4* (Red)
Page
Interval timer
Disable / Enable (Interval / Number of shots)
239
Bulb timer
Disable / Enable (Exposure time)
219
Anti-flicker shooting
Disable / Enable
191
Mirror lockup
Disable / Press V twice to shoot / Shoot 1/8
sec after press / Shoot 1/4 sec after press /
Shoot 1/2 sec after press / Shoot 1 sec. after
press / Shoot 2 sec. after press
234
Crop/aspect ratio
Full-frame / 1.3x (crop) / 1.6x (crop) / 1:1
(aspect ratio) / 4:3 (aspect ratio) / 16:9 (aspect
ratio)
154
* In the <A> mode, these menu options are displayed under [z2].
z: Shooting 5* (Red)
Live View shooting
Enable / Disable
257
AF method
u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Single
268
Continuous AF
Disable / Enable
264
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
265
Exposure simulation
Enable / During e / Disable
265
* In the <A> mode, these menu options are displayed under [z3].
z: Shooting 6 (Red)
Silent LV shooting
Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable
266
Metering timer
4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /
10 min. / 30 min.
267
462
Menu Settings
2: AF1 (Purple)
Page
Case 1
Versatile multi purpose setting
110
Case 2
Continue to track the subjects, ignoring
possible obstacles
110
Case 3
Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering
AF points
111
Case 4
For subjects that accelerate or decelerate
quickly
111
Case 5
For erratic subjects moving quickly in any
direction
112
Case 6
For subjects that change speed and move
erratically
113
AI Servo 1st image
priority
Release priority / Equal priority / Focus priority
118
AI Servo 2nd image
priority
Shooting speed priority / Equal priority / Focus
priority
119
Lens electronic MF
Enable after One-Shot AF / Disable after OneShot AF / Disable in AF mode
120
AF-assist beam firing
Enable / Disable / IR AF assist beam only
121
One-Shot AF release
priority
Release priority / Focus priority
122
2: AF2 (Purple)
2: AF3 (Purple)
463
Menu Settings
2: AF4 (Purple)
Page
Lens drive when AF
impossible
Continue focus search / Stop focus search
123
Selectable AF point
61 points / Only cross-type AF points / 15
points / 9 points
124
Select AF area
selection mode
Manual selection: Spot AF / Manual selection:
1 point AF / Expand AF area:
/ Expand AF
area: Surround / Manual selection: Zone AF /
Auto selection: 61 point AF
125
AF area selection
method
S 9 M-Fn button / S 9 Main Dial
126
Orientation linked AF
point
Same for both vertical/horizontal /
Separate AF points: Area+point /
Separate AF points: Point only
126
Initial AF point,
Servo AF
Initial
Manual
128
AI
Auto AF point
selection: EOS iTR AF
AF point selected /
AF point / Auto
Enable / Disable
129
Stops at AF area edges / Continuous
130
2: AF5 (Purple)
Manual AF point
selection pattern
Selected (constant) / All (constant) / Selected
AF point display during
(pre-AF, focused) / Selected (focused) /
focus
Disable display
131
Auto / Enable / Disable
VF display illumination AF point during AI Servo AF: Non illuminated /
Illuminated
132
AF Microadjustment
134
464
Disable / All by same amount / Adjust by lens
Menu Settings
3: Playback 1 (Blue)
Page
Protect images
Protect images
334
Rotate image
Rotate images
333
Erase images
Erase images
358
Print order
Specify images to be printed (DPOF)
392
Photobook Set-up
Specify images for a photobook
397
Image copy
Copy images between cards
354
RAW image processing Process 1 images
364
3: Playback 2 (Blue)
Cropping
Partially crop JPEG images
371
Resize
Downsize JPEG image’s pixel count
369
Rating
[OFF] / l / m / n / o / p
337
Slide show
Set playback description / Display time /
Repeat, and start auto playback
348
Image transfer
Image selection/transfer / RAW+JPEG transfer
395
Image jump w/6
1 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date /
Folder / Movies / Stills / Protect / Rating
328
Highlight alert
Disable / Enable
325
AF point display
Disable / Enable
325
Playback grid
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
321
Histogram display
Brightness / RGB
326
3: Playback 3 (Blue)
Movie playback count* Rec time / Time code
304
1x (no magnification) / 2x (magnify from center) / 4x
(magnify from center) / 8x (magnify from center) / 16x
Magnification (approx.)
(magnify from center) / Actual size (from selected
point) / Same as last magnification (from center)
331
Control over HDMI
Disable / Enable
352
* The setting is linked to the [Time code]’s [Movie play count] under the [z5
(Movie)] tab.
465
Menu Settings
5: Set-up 1 (Yellow)
Page
Recording function:
Standard / Auto switch card / Record
separately / Record to multiple
146
Record/playback / Playback: f / g
148
Folder: Selecting and creating a folder
194
File numbering
Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset
199
File name
Preset code / User setting 1 / User setting 2
196
Auto rotate
OnzD / OnD / Off
362
Format card
Erase data on the card by formatting
67
Eye-Fi settings
Displayed when a commercially-available EyeFi card is inserted
451
1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. / 30
min. / Disable
69
Record function+card/
folder selection
5: Set-up 2 (Yellow)
Auto power off
LCD brightness
Auto: Adjustable to one of three brightness levels
Manual: Adjustable to one of seven brightness levels
361
Date/Time/Zone
Date (year, month, day) / Time (hr., min., sec.) /
Daylight saving time / Time zone
49
LanguageK
Select the interface language
51
Electronic level: Hide / Show
75
Grid display: Hide / Show
74
Show/hide in viewfinder:
Battery / White balance / Drive mode / AF
operation / Metering mode / Image quality /
Flicker detection
77
Viewfinder display
GPS device settings
466
Settable when the GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold
separately) is attached
-
Menu Settings
5: Set-up 3 (Yellow)
Page
Video system
For NTSC / For PAL
297
351
Battery information
Power source / Remaining capacity / Shutter
count / Recharge performance / Battery
registration / Serial number / Battery history
446
Auto cleaning f: Enable / Disable
Sensor cleaning
Clean now f
374
Clean manually
377
z button display
options
Displays camera settings / Electronic level / Quick
Control screen / Custom Quick Control screen
442
Custom Quick Control
Customize the functions and layout for Quick
Control screen
427
m button function
Rating / Protect
337
336
Communication
settings
Displayed when Wireless File Transmitter
WFT-E7 (Ver. 2, sold separately) is attached.
-
 When using GPS device or a Wireless File Transmitter, be sure to check
the countries and areas of use, and use the device in accordance with
the laws and regulations of the country or region.
 Note that when connecting GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold separately) with a
cable, preparations as below are necessary.
- Update the GP-E2’s firmware to Version 2.0.0 or later. (Using the cable
for connection is not possible with the firmware version earlier than
Version 2.0.0.)
- Interface Cable IFC-40AB II or IFC-150AB II (both sold separately)
must be used.
When using the GP-E2 attached to the hot shoe, preparations as above
are not necessary. For how to update the GP-E2’s firmware, refer to the
Canon website.
467
Menu Settings
5: Set-up 4 (Yellow)
Page
Custom shooting mode Register current camera settings to the Mode
(C1-C3)
Dial’s w, x, and y positions
437
Clear all camera settings Resets the camera to the default settings
70
Copyright information
Display copyright information / Enter author’s
name / Enter copyright details /
Delete copyright information
201
Certification Logo
Display
Some of the camera’s certification logos are
displayed
441
z firmware ver.
Select to update the firmware of the camera,
lens, Speedlite, or Wireless File Transmitter
-
8: Custom Functions (Orange)
C.Fn1: Exposure
C.Fn2: Exposure
402
Customize camera functions as desired
C.Fn3: Others
C.Fn4: Clear
408
409
Clear all Custom Function settings
401
Add My Menu tabs 1-5
432
9: My Menu (Green)
Add My Menu tab
Delete all My Menu tabs Delete all My Menu tabs
435
Delete all items
Delete all items under My Menu tabs 1-5
435
Menu display
Normal display / Display from My Menu tab /
Display only My Menu tab
436
468
Menu Settings
Movie Shooting
z: Shooting 4*1 (Movie) (Red)
Page
Movie Servo AF
Enable / Disable
313
AF method
u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Single
315
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
315
Movie recording size
• 1920x1080 / 1280x720 / 640x480
• NTSC: 59.94p / 29.97p / 23.98p
PAL: 50.00p / 25.00p
• ALL-I (For editing) / IPB (Standard)
297
Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable
Sound recording*2
Recording level
Wind filter: Disable / Enable
300
Attenuator: Disable / Enable
*1: In the <A> mode, these menu options are displayed under [z2].
*2: In the <A> mode, [Sound recording] settings will be [On] [Off].
469
Menu Settings
z: Shooting 5*1 (Movie) (Red)
Page
Silent LV shooting
Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable
315
Metering timer
4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. /
1 min. / 10 min. / 30 min.
316
Time code
Count up / Start time setting / Movie recording
count / Movie play count*2 / Drop frame*3
303
Silent Control
Enable h / Disable h
302
V button function
Time-lapse movie
/z / q/z /
/k / q/k
Disable / Enable (Interval / No. of shots / Time
required / Playback time/ Card- time left)
*1: In the <A> mode, these menu options are displayed under [z3].
*2: The setting is linked to [Movie play count] under the [x3] tab.
*3: Displayed when 8 (59.94 fps) or 6 (29.97 fps) is set.
470
316
306
Troubleshooting Guide
If a problem occurs with the camera, first consult this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Power-Related Problems
The battery does not recharge.
 If the battery’s remaining capacity is 94% or higher, the battery will not
be recharged (p.446).
 Do not use any battery other than genuine Battery Pack LP-E6N/LPE6.
The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.
 If (1) the battery charger or battery has a problem or (2) communication
with the battery failed (with a non-Canon battery pack), the protection
circuit will stop charging, and the charge lamp will blink in orange at a
high speed. In the case of (1), unplug the charger’s power plug from the
power outlet. Detach and reattach the battery to the charger. Wait a few
minutes, then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If the
problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
The charger’s lamp does not blink.
 If the internal temperature of the battery attached to the charger is
high, the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons (lamp
off). During charging, if the battery’s temperature becomes high for
any reason, charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks). When the
battery temperature goes down, charging will resume automatically.
The camera does not operate even when the power switch is set to <1>.




Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.42).
Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera (p.42).
Recharge the battery (p.40).
Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.43).
471
Troubleshooting Guide
The access lamp still lights or blinks
even when the power switch is <2>.
 If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card, the
access lamp will remain on or continue to blink for a few seconds. When
the image recording is completed, the power will turn off automatically.
[Does this battery/do these batteries display the Canon logo?]
is displayed.
 Do not use any battery other than a genuine Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6.
 Remove and install the battery again (p.42).
 If the battery contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
 Use a fully-charged battery (p.40).
 The battery performance may have degraded. See [53: Battery info.]
to check the battery’s recharge performance level (p.446). If the
battery performance is poor, replace the battery with a new one.
 The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following
operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor frequently.
• Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged period.
• The Eye-Fi card’s communication function is operating.
The camera turns off by itself.
 Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take
effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.69).
 Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor will
still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min. (The camera’s
power does not turn off.)
472
Troubleshooting Guide
Shooting-Related Problems
The lens cannot be attached.
 The camera cannot be used with EF-S or EF-M lenses (p.52).
The viewfinder is dark.
 Install a recharged battery in the camera (p.40).
No images can be shot or recorded.
 Make sure the card is properly inserted (p.43).
 If you are using an SD card, slide the card’s write-protect switch to the
Write/Erase setting (p.43).
 If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to
make space (p.43, 358).
 If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode and the focus indicator
<o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be taken. Press the
shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or focus
manually (p.55, 141).
The card cannot be used.
 If a card error message is displayed, see page 46 or 487.
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
 Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF (p.87). Focus lock is not possible
in the AI Servo AF, or when servo takes effect in AI Focus AF (p.83).
473
Troubleshooting Guide
I have to press the shutter button twice completely
to take a picture.
 If [z4: Mirror lockup] is set to [Press V twice to shoot], set it to
[Disable].
The image is out of focus or blurred.
Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <AF> (p.52).
Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (p.54-55).
If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.
In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter
speed (p.206), set a higher ISO speed (p.158), use flash (p.244), or
use a tripod.
 See “Minimizing Blurred Photos” on page 235.




There are fewer AF points.
 Depending on the attached lens, the number of usable AF points and
patterns will differ. The lenses are categorized into nine groups from A
to I. Check which group your lens belongs to. Using a lens in Groups F
to H will have fewer usable AF points (p.103-104).
The AF point is blinking or two AF points are displayed.
 Regarding lighting up or blinking of the AF points when you press the
<S> button, see page 94.
 The AF point at the registered area is blinking (p.94, 418).
 The manually-selected AF point (or zone) and the registered AF point
are displayed (p.93, 418).
474
Troubleshooting Guide
The AF points do not light up in red.
 The AF points light up in red when focus is achieved in low-light
conditions.
 In the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, and <F> modes, you can set
whether to have the AF points light in red when focus is achieved
(p.132).
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
 The continuous shooting speed may become slower depending on the
shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions, brightness, lens, flash use,
temperature, battery type, remaining battery level, etc. (p.143).
 In AI Servo AF operation, the continuous shooting speed may become
slower depending on the subject conditions and lens used (p.143).
 If you use Battery Pack LP-E6 and shoot in low temperatures (battery
temperature is low), the high-speed continuous shooting speed may
become slower (p.143).
 The continuous shooting speed may become slower if the remaining
battery level is low or if you shoot under low-light conditions (p.143).
 If you use Battery Grip BG-E11 (sold separately) with AA/R6 batteries,
the maximum continuous shooting speed will be approx. 3.0 fps for
high-speed continuous shooting.
 If you set [z4: Anti-flicker shoot.] to [Enable] and shoot under a
flickering light source, the continuous shooting speed may decrease
slightly, the shooting interval may become irregular, or the release time
lag may become longer (p.191).
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
 If you shoot something that has fine detail such as a field of grass, the
file size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower
than the number mentioned on page 151.
475
Troubleshooting Guide
I cannot shoot in the 4:3 or 16:9 aspect ratio.
 During viewfinder shooting, you cannot shoot in either the 4:3 or the
16:9 aspect ratio even when the aspect ratio is set. During Live View
shooting, you can shoot images in the 4:3 and 16:9 aspect ratios
(p.154).
ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected.
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the settable ISO
speed range will be ISO 200 - ISO 6400. Even if you expand the
settable ISO speed range with [ISO speed range], you cannot select
the L (equivalent to ISO 50) or H (equivalent to ISO 12800). When
[z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable], ISO 100/125/160, L,
or H can be set (p.187).
Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation,
the image comes out bright.
 Set [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable]. When [Low],
[Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image may come
out bright (p.182).
I cannot set the exposure compensation while both manual
exposure and Auto ISO are set.
 See page 211 to set the exposure compensation.
 Even if an exposure compensation is performed, it will not be applied
for flash photography.
476
Troubleshooting Guide
Multi Shot Noise Reduction cannot be set.
 If the image-recording quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, [Multi
Shot Noise Reduction] cannot be set.
The Live View image or movie shooting image is
not displayed during multiple-exposure shooting.
 If [On:ContShtng] is set, Live View display, image review after image
capture, or image playback is not possible during shooting (p.226).
Live View shooting ends when multiple exposure
shooting is performed.
 If you perform Live View shooting with [On:ContShtng], Live View
function will end automatically when the first exposure is taken. Take
the second and subsequent exposures while looking through the
viewfinder.
The multiple-exposure image is shot in 1 quality.
 When the image-recording quality is set to 41 or 61, the
multiple-exposure image will be recorded in 1 quality (p.233).
When I use the <f> mode with flash,
the shutter speed becomes slow.
 If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed
automatically becomes slow (slow-sync shooting) so that both the
subject and background are properly exposed. To prevent a slow
shutter speed, under [z1: External Speedlite control], set [Flash
sync. speed in Av mode] to [1/200-1/60sec. auto] or [1/200 sec.
(fixed)] (p.248).
477
Troubleshooting Guide
The flash does not fire.
 Make sure the flash (or PC sync cord) is securely attached to the
camera.
 If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z6:
Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.266).
The flash always fires at full output.
 If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash will
always be fired at full output (p.245).
 When the flash Custom Function setting for [Flash metering mode] is
set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash), the flash will always be fired at
full output (p.253).
Flash exposure compensation cannot be set.
 If flash exposure compensation is already set with the Speedlite, flash
exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera. When the
external Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is canceled (set to 0),
flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera.
High-speed sync cannot be set in the <f> mode.
 Under [z1: External Speedlite control], set [Flash sync. speed in
Av mode] to [Auto] (p.248).
The shutter makes two shooting sounds
during Live View shooting.
 If you use flash, the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot
(p.257).
478
Troubleshooting Guide
During Live View or movie shooting, a white
icon is displayed.
or red E
 It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the white
< > icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may deteriorate.
If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View or
movie shooting will soon stop automatically (p.277, 317).
Movie shooting stops by itself.
 If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop
automatically. For cards that can record movies, see page 5. To find
out the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s website.
 If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically.
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.
 If the shooting mode is <A>, <d>, <s>, <f>, or <F>, the ISO
speed will be set automatically. In the <a> mode, you can freely set
the ISO speed (p.287).
479
Troubleshooting Guide
The manually set ISO speed changes when
switching to movie shooting.
 If you shoot a movie with manual exposure set to L (equivalent to ISO
50), the ISO speed setting will switch to ISO 100. Even if you switch
back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed will not revert to L.
The exposure changes during movie shooting.
 If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting, the
changes in the exposure may be recorded.
 Zooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in the
exposure regardless of whether the lens’s maximum aperture changes
or not. The changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result.
The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear
during movie shooting.
 Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources
during movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or
color tone may be recorded. In the <a> or <s> mode, a slow
shutter speed may reduce the problem. The problem may be more
noticeable in time-lapse movie shooting.
The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.
 If you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a moving
subject, the image may look distorted. The problem may be more
noticeable in time-lapse movie shooting.
480
Troubleshooting Guide
When I shoot still photos during movie shooting,
the movie shooting stops.
 To shoot still photos during movie shooting, using a CF card capable of
UDMA transfer or a UHS-I SD card is recommended.
 Setting a lower image quality for still photos or shooting fewer
continuous still photos may resolve the problem.
Time code is off.
 Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy
between the actual time and time code. When you want to edit a movie
using time code, it is recommended not to shoot still photos during
movie shooting.
Operation Problems
I cannot change the setting with the <6>, <5> or <9>.
 Set the <R> switch to the left (lock release, p.59).
 Check the [83: Multi function lock] setting (p.410).
A camera button or dial does not work as expected.
 Check the [83: Custom Controls] setting (p.413).
481
Troubleshooting Guide
Display Problems
The menu screen shows fewer tabs and options.
 In the <A> mode, only certain menu tabs and options are displayed.
Set the shooting mode to <d>, <s>, <f>, <a> or <F> (p.64).
 Under the [9] tab, [Menu display] is set to [Display only My Menu
tab] (p.436).
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).
 Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character
will be an underscore (p.193).
The fourth character in the file name changes.
 With [51: File name], select the camera’s unique file name or the file
name registered under User setting 1 (p.196).
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
 If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may
not start from 0001 (p.199).
The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.
 Check that the correct date and time are set (p.49).
 Check the time zone and daylight saving time (p.49-50).
482
Troubleshooting Guide
The date and time are not in the picture.
 The shooting date and time do not appear in the picture. The date and
time are recorded in the image data as shooting information. When
printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture, using the
date and time recorded in the shooting information (p.385, 389).
[###] is displayed.
 If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the
camera can display, [###] will be displayed (p.339).
In the viewfinder, the AF point display speed is slow.
 In low temperatures, the display speed of the AF points may become
slower due to the AF point display device’s (liquid crystal)
characteristics. The display speed will return to normal at room
temperature.
The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.
 If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
 In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow
or may look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.
[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.
 [Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted in
the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect switch set to the
LOCK position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection
status or disable Eye-Fi transmission (p.451).
483
Troubleshooting Guide
Playback Problems
Part of the image blinks in black.
 [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] (p.325).
A red box is displayed on the image.
 [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.325).
The image cannot be erased.
 If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (p.334).
The movie cannot be played back.
 Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the camera.
Camera operation noise can be heard
when the movie is played back.
 If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the
operation noise will also be recorded. Using the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended (p.301).
The movie has still moments.
 During autoexposure movie shooting, if there is a drastic change in the
exposure level, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness
stabilizes. In such cases, shoot in the <a> mode (p.286).
484
Troubleshooting Guide
No picture on the TV set.
 Check if the [53: Video system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For
PAL] (depending on the video system of your TV set).
 Check that the HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in (p.351).
There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.
 If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created
automatically (p.299).
My card reader does not recognize the card.
 Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, large-capacity
CF cards or SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized. In such a
case, connect your camera to the computer with the interface cable,
then transfer the images to your computer, using EOS Utility (EOS
software, p.504).
I cannot process the RAW image.
 41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the camera. Use
the EOS software, Digital Photo Professional to process the image
(p.504).
I cannot resize or crop the image.
 JPEG c, 1, 41, and 61 images cannot be resized or
cropped with the camera (p.369, 371).
485
Troubleshooting Guide
Sensor Cleaning Problems
The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning.
 If you selected [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a noise, but no
picture is taken (p.374).
Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
 If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> / <2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed (p.47).
Printing-Related Problems
There are fewer printing effects than
listed in the instruction manual.
 Contents displayed on the screen vary depending on the printer. This
instruction manual lists all the printing effects available (p.384).
Computer Connection Problems
Communication between the connected camera and
computer does not work.
 When using EOS Utility (EOS software), set [z5: Time-lapse movie]
to [Disable] (p.306).
I cannot transfer images to a computer.
 Install the EOS software (EOS Solution Disk CD-ROM) on the
computer (p.504).
 Check that EOS Utility’s main window is displayed.
486
Error Codes
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Error number
Cause and countermeasures
Number
01
02
Error Message and Solution
Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the
lens contacts.
 Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens, use a Canon
lens, or remove and install the battery again (p.25, 26, 42).
Card* cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card* or format card*
with camera.
 Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the
card (p.43, 67).
Cannot save images because card* is full. Replace card*.
04
06
 Replace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card
(p.43, 67, 358).
Sensor cleaning could not be performed. Turn the camera off and
on again.
 Operate the power switch (p.47).
10, 20
30, 40
50, 60
70, 80
99
An error prevented shooting. Turn the camera off and on again or
re-install the battery.
 Operate the power switch, remove and install the battery again, or
use a Canon lens (p.42, 47).
* If the error still persists, write down the error number and contact your nearest
Canon Service Center.
487
Specifications
• Type
Type:
Recording media:
Image sensor size:
Compatible lenses:
Lens mount:
Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera
CF cards (Type I, UDMA 7 supported)
SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards
* UHS-I cards compatible.
Approx. 36.0 x 24.0 mm
Canon EF lenses
* Excluding EF-S and EF-M lenses
(35mm-equivalent lens focal length is as indicated on
the lens)
Canon EF mount
• Image Sensor
Type:
Effective pixels:
Aspect ratio:
Dust delete feature:
CMOS sensor
Approx. 50.6 megapixels
* Rounded off to the nearest 10,000th.
3:2
Auto/Manual, Appending Dust Delete Data
• Recording System
Recording format:
Image type:
Pixels recorded
(With full-frame):
Crop/aspect ratio:
488
Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0
JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original),
RAW+JPEG simultaneous recording possible
L (Large)
: Approx. 50.3 megapixels (8688 x 5792)
M1 (Medium 1) : Approx. 39.3 megapixels (7680 x 5120)
M2 (Medium 2) : Approx. 22.1 megapixels (5760 x 3840)
S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 12.4 megapixels (4320 x 2880)
S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 2.5 megapixels (1920 x 1280)
S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 0.35 megapixels (720 x 480)
RAW
: Approx. 50.3 megapixels (8688 x 5792)
M-RAW
: Approx. 28.0 megapixels (6480 x 4320)
S-RAW
: Approx. 12.4 megapixels (4320 x 2880)
Crop shooting and shooting with the set aspect ratio
possible.
Full-frame / Approx. 1.3x (crop) / Approx. 1.6x (crop) /
1:1 (aspect ratio) / 4:3 (aspect ratio) / 16:9 (aspect ratio)
Specifications
Recording function:
Create/select a folder:
File name:
File numbering:
Standard, Auto switch card, Record separately, Record
to multiple
Possible
Preset code / User setting 1 / User setting 2
Continuous, Auto reset, Manual reset
• Image Processing During Shooting
Picture Style:
White balance:
Noise reduction:
Automatic image
brightness correction:
Highlight tone priority:
Lens aberration
correction:
Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Fine Detail,
Neutral, Faithful, Monochrome, User Defined 1 - 3
Auto (Ambience priority), Auto (White priority), Preset
(Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light, White
fluorescent light, Flash), Custom, Color temperature
setting (approx. 2500-10000 K), White balance
correction, and White balance bracketing provided
* Flash color temperature information transmission
possible
Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots
Auto Lighting Optimizer provided
Provided
Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration
correction
• Viewfinder
Type:
Coverage:
Magnification:
Eye point:
Built-in dioptric
adjustment:
Focusing screen:
Grid display:
Electronic level:
Function setting display:
Mirror:
Depth-of-field preview:
Eye-level pentaprism
Vertical/Horizontal approx. 100% (with Eye point approx.
21 mm, full-frame)
Approx. 0.71x (-1 m-1 with 50mm lens at infinity)
Approx. 21mm (from eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1)
Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)
Fixed
Provided
Provided
Battery, White balance, Drive mode, AF operation,
Metering mode, Image quality: JPEG/RAW, Flicker
detection, Warning symbol !
Quick-return type
Provided
489
Specifications
• Autofocus
Type:
TTL secondary image-registration, phase-difference
detection with the dedicated AF sensor
AF points:
61 (Cross-type AF point: Max. 41 points)
* Number of available AF points, cross-type points, and
Dual cross-type points vary depending on the lens.
* Dual cross-type focusing at f/2.8 with 5 AF points
vertically aligned at the center.
(AF group: When Group A lenses are used)
Focusing brightness
EV -2 - 18 (Conditions: f/2.8-sensitive center AF point,
range:
One-Shot AF, room temperature, ISO 100)
Focus operation:
One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF, Manual
focusing (MF)
AF area selection mode: Single-point Spot AF (manual selection), Single-point AF
(manual selection), AF point expansion (manual
selection: up, down, left, and right), AF point expansion
(manual selection: surround), Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), 61-point automatic selection AF
AF point automatic
Based on EOS iTR AF setting
selection conditions:
(Enables AF incorporating human face/color information)
* iTR: Intelligent Tracking and Recognition
AF Configuration Tool: Case 1 - 6
AI Servo AF
Tracking sensitivity, Acceleration/deceleration tracking,
characteristics:
AF point auto switching
AF Custom Functions: 16 functions
AF fine adjustment:
AF Microadjustment (All lenses by the same amount,
Adjust by lens)
AF-assist beam:
Emitted by the EOS-dedicated external Speedlite
• Exposure Control
Metering mode:
Brightness metering
range:
490
Approx. 150,000-pixel RGB+IR metering sensor and
252-zone TTL metering at max. aperture
EOS iSA (Intelligent Subject Analysis) system
• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)
• Partial metering (approx. 6.1% of viewfinder at center)
• Spot metering (approx. 1.3% of viewfinder at center)
• Center-weighted average metering
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Specifications
Exposure control:
ISO speed
(Recommended
exposure index):
ISO speed settings:
Exposure
compensation:
AE lock:
Anti-flicker:
Interval timer:
Bulb timer:
Program AE (Scene Intelligent Auto, Program), Shutterpriority AE, Aperture-priority AE, Manual exposure, Bulb
exposure
Scene Intelligent Auto: ISO 100 - ISO 3200 set
automatically
P, Tv, Av, M, B: Auto ISO, ISO 100 - ISO 6400 (in 1/3- or
whole-stop increments), or ISO expansion to L
(equivalent to ISO 50) or H (equivalent to ISO 12800)
ISO speed range, Auto ISO range, and Auto ISO
minimum shutter speed settable
Manual: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
AEB:
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (can be
combined with manual exposure compensation)
Auto:
Applied in One-Shot AF mode with evaluative
metering when focus is achieved
Manual: By AE lock button
Possible
Shooting interval and shot count settable
Bulb exposure time settable
• HDR Shooting
Dynamic range adjustment: Auto, ±1, ±2, ±3
Effects:
Natural, Art standard, Art vivid, Art bold, Art embossed
Auto image align:
Provided
• Multiple Exposures
Shooting method:
Function/control priority, Continuous shooting priority
Number of multiple
2 to 9 exposures
exposures:
Multiple-exposure control: Additive, Average, Bright, Dark
• Shutter
Type:
Shutter speed:
Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter
1/8000 sec. to 30 sec. (total shutter speed range; available
range varies by shooting mode), Bulb, X-sync at 1/200 sec.
• Drive System
Drive mode:
Single shooting, High-speed continuous shooting, Lowspeed continuous shooting, Silent single shooting, Silent
continuous shooting, 10-sec. self-timer/remote control,
2-sec. self-timer/remote control
491
Specifications
Continuous shooting
speed:
Max. burst
(With full-frame):
High-speed continuous shooting:
Max. approx. 5.0 shots/sec.
Low-speed continuous shooting:
Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.
Silent continuous shooting:
Max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec.
JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 31 shots (approx. 510 shots)
RAW: Approx. 12 shots (approx. 14 shots)
RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 12 shots (approx. 12 shots)
* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards (ISO
100 and Standard Picture Style) and an 8 GB CF card.
* Figures in parentheses apply to an UDMA mode 7, with
a CF card based on Canon’s testing standards.
• External Speedlite
Compatible Speedlites:
Flash metering:
Flash exposure
compensation:
FE lock:
PC terminal:
Flash control:
EX-series Speedlites
E-TTL II autoflash
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
Provided
Provided
Flash function settings, Flash C.Fn settings
• Live View Shooting
Focus method:
Contrast-detection AF system (Face+Tracking,
FlexiZone-Single)
Manual focus (approx. 6x and 16x magnified view
possible for focus check)
Continuous AF:
Provided
Focusing brightness range: EV 0 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Metering mode:
Evaluative metering (315 zones), Partial metering
(approx. 6.4% of Live View screen), Spot metering
(approx. 2.8% of Live View screen), Center-weighted
average metering
Brightness metering
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
range:
Silent shooting:
Provided (Mode 1 and 2)
Grid display:
3 types
492
Specifications
• Movie Shooting
Recording format:
Movie:
Audio:
Recording size and
frame rate:
Compression method:
File size:
Card requirements
(Writing/reading speed):
Focus method:
Movie servo AF:
Focusing brightness range:
Metering mode:
Brightness metering range:
Exposure control:
Exposure compensation:
ISO speed
(Recommended
exposure index):
Time code:
Drop frames:
MOV
MPEG-4 AVC / H.264
Variable (average) bit rate
Linear PCM
Full HD (1920x1080): 29.97p/25.00p/23.98p
HD (1280x720)
: 59.94p/50.00p
VGA (640x480)
: 29.97p/25.00p
ALL-I (For editing/I-only), IPB (Standard)
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/23.98p)/ALL-I
: Approx. 654 MB/min.
Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/23.98p)/IPB (Standard)
: Approx. 225 MB/min.
HD (59.94p/50.00p)/ALL-I
: Approx. 583 MB/min.
HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard) : Approx. 196 MB/min.
VGA (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Standard): Approx. 78 MB/min.
[CF card]
ALL-I: 30 MB/sec. or faster, IPB: 10 MB/sec. or faster
[SD card]
ALL-I: 20 MB/sec. or faster, IPB: 6 MB/sec. or faster
Contrast-detection AF system (Face+Tracking,
FlexiZone-Single)
Manual focus (approx. 6x and 16x magnified view
possible for focus check)
Possible
EV 0 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Center-weighted average and Evaluative metering with
the image sensor
* Automatically set by the focus method.
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Autoexposure shooting (Program AE for movie shooting),
Shutter-priority AE, Aperture-priority AE, Manual exposure
±3 stops in 1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments
Scene Intelligent Auto, Tv: Automatically set within ISO
100 - ISO 6400
P, Av, B: Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 6400,
expandable to H (equivalent to ISO 12800)
M: Auto ISO (automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 6400),
ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set manually (in 1/3- or whole-stop
increments), expandable to H (equivalent to ISO 12800)
Supported
Compatible with 59.94p/29.97p
493
Specifications
Sound recording:
Grid display:
Time-lapse movie:
Still photo shooting:
Built-in monaural microphone, external stereo
microphone terminal provided
Sound-recording level adjustable, wind filter provided,
attenuator provided
3 types
Shooting interval and number of shots settable
Required shooting time period, playback length, and
remaining card capacity viewable
Possible
• LCD Monitor
Type:
Monitor size and dots:
Brightness adjustment:
Electronic level:
Interface languages:
Help display:
TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor
Wide 8.1 cm (3.2-in) (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots
Auto (Dark, Standard, Bright), Manual (7 levels)
Provided
25
Possible
• Playback
Image display format:
Single-image display (without shooting information),
Single-image display (with simple information), Singleimage display (Shooting information displayed: Detailed
information, Lens/histogram, White balance, Picture
Style 1, Picture Style 2, Color space/noise reduction,
Lens aberration correction), Index display (4/9/36/100
images), Two-image display
Highlight alert:
Overexposed highlights blink
AF point display:
Provided
Grid display:
3 types
Magnified view:
Approx. 1.5x-16x, initial magnification and position
settable
Image browsing method: Single image, Jump by 10 or 100 images, By shooting
date, By folder, By movies, By stills, By protected
images, By rating
Image rotation:
Provided
Rating:
Provided
Movie playback:
Enabled (LCD monitor, HDMI)
Built-in speaker
Slide show:
All images, By date, By folder, By movies, By stills, By
protected images, By rating
Image protection:
Possible
Copying images:
Possible
494
Specifications
• Post-Processing of Images
In-camera RAW image
processing:
Resize:
Cropping:
Brightness correction, White balance, Picture Style, Auto
Lighting Optimizer, High ISO speed noise reduction,
JPEG image-recording quality, Color space, Peripheral
illumination correction, Distortion correction, Chromatic
aberration correction
Provided
Provided
• Direct Printing
Compatible printers:
Printable images:
Print ordering:
PictBridge-compatible printers
JPEG and RAW images
DPOF Version 1.1 compliant
• Image Transfer
Transferrable files:
Still photos (JPEG, RAW, RAW+JPEG images), Movies
• Custom Functions
Custom Functions:
Custom Quick Control:
My Menu:
Custom shooting mode:
Copyright information:
16
Provided
Up to 5 screens can be registered
Register under Mode Dial’s C1, C2, or C3
Text entry and inclusion enabled
• Interface
DIGITAL terminal:
SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.0)
Computer communication, direct printing, Wireless File
Transmitter WFT-E7 (Ver. 2), GPS Receiver GP-E2,
Connect Station CS100 connection
HDMI mini OUT terminal: Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible
External microphone IN 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack
terminal:
Remote control terminal: For N3-type remote control units
Wireless remote control: Compatible with Remote Controller RC-6
Eye-Fi card:
Supported
495
Specifications
• Power
Battery:
Battery information:
Number of possible
shots:
Movie shooting time:
Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6, quantity 1
* AC power usable with household power outlet
accessories.
* With Battery Grip BG-E11 attached, AA/R6 batteries
can be used.
Remaining capacity, Shutter count, Recharge
performance, and Battery registration possible
With viewfinder shooting:
Approx. 700 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
approx. 660 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
With Live View shooting:
Approx. 220 shots at room temperature (23°C/73°F),
approx. 210 shots at low temperatures (0°C/32°F)
* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N.
Total approx. 1 hr. 30 min. at room temperature (23°C/
73°F)
Total approx. 1 hr. 25 min. at low temperatures (0°C/
32°F)
* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N.
• Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 152.0 x 116.4 x 76.4 mm / 5.98 x 4.58 x 3.01 in.
Weight:
Approx. 930 g / 32.80 oz. (Based on CIPA Guidelines)
Approx. 845 g / 29.80 oz. (Body only)
• Operation Environment
Working temperature
range:
Working humidity:
496
0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
85% or less
Specifications
 All the specifications listed above are common between EOS 5DS and EOS 5DS R.
 All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.
 Dimensions and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines (except weight for
camera body only).
 Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.
 If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the
respective lens manufacturer.
497
Trademarks
 Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
 Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
 Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
 CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.
 SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
 HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
 All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be
used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video
that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a
video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”
* Notice displayed in English as required.
498
Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such
as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories
(e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this
warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine
Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable
basis.
Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it
with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or
accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.
499
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway,
Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be
disposed of with your household waste, according to
the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery
Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation
implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol
shown above, in accordance with the Battery
Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium,
Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above
an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g.,
on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or
to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this
type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human
health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated
with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will
contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your
local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste
disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or
www.canon-europe.com/battery.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.
500
15
Downloading Images
to Your Computer
This chapter explains how to download images from the
camera to your computer, gives an overview of the
software in the EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM), and
explains how to install the software on your computer.
EOS Solution Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
EOS Solution Disk
(Software)
501
Downloading Images to a Computer
You can use EOS software to download the images in the camera to
your computer. There are two ways to do this.
Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer
1
Install the software (p.505).
the provided interface cable
2 Use
to connect the camera to your
computer.
 Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
 When connecting the cable to the
camera, use the cable protector
(p.36). Connect the cable to the
digital terminal with the plug’s
<
> icon facing the back of
the camera.
 Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal.
EOS Utility to transfer the
3 Use
images.
 For details, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual.
Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon (p.454). When
connecting the interface cable, use the provided cable protector (p.36).
502
Downloading Images to a Computer
Downloading Images with a Card Reader
You can use a card reader to download images to your computer.
1
Install the software (p.505).
the card into the card
2 Insert
reader.
Digital Photo Professional to
3 Use
download the images.
 For details, refer to the Digital Photo
Professional Instruction Manual.
When downloading images from the camera to your computer with a card
reader without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to
your computer.
503
About the Software
EOS Solution Disk
EOS Solution Disk XXX
This disk contains various software for EOS cameras.
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
Note that the software provided with previous cameras might not
support still photos and movie files shot with this camera. Please use
the software provided with this camera.
a EOS Utility
Communication Software for the Camera and Computer
 You can download images (still images/movies) you have shot with the camera
to your computer.
 You can set the various settings of the camera from your computer.
 You can shoot photos remotely by connecting the camera to your computer.
b Digital Photo Professional
Image Viewing and Editing Software
 You can view, edit and print shot images on your computer at high-speed.
 You can edit images with originals remaining unchanged.
 Can be used by a wide range of users from amateurs to professionals. It is
especially recommended for users who mainly shoot RAW images.
c Picture Style Editor
Picture Style File Creating Software
 This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in processing
images.
 You can edit Picture Style to your unique image characteristics and create/save
an original Picture Style file.
504
Installing the Software
Installing the Software on Windows
Compatible OS
1
Windows 8.1
Windows 8
Windows 7
Check that the camera is not connected to your computer.
 Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install
the software. The software will not be installed correctly.
 If a previous version is installed, follow the steps below to reinstall
the software. (The newer version will overwrite the previous version.)
2 Insert the EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM).
3 Select your geographic area, country and language.
4 Click [Easy Installation] to start installation.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation
procedure.
If prompted, install Microsoft Silverlight.
5 Click [Finish] when the installation has completed.
6 Remove the CD.
505
Installing the Software
Installing the Software on Macintosh
Compatible OS
1
MAC OS X 10.8 - 10.10
Check that the camera is not connected to your computer.
 Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install
the software. The software will not be installed correctly.
 If a previous version is installed, follow the steps below to reinstall
the software. (The newer version will overwrite the previous version.)
2 Insert the EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM).
On your computer’s desktop, double-click and open the CD-ROM
icon, and then double-click [setup].
3 Select your geographic area, country and language.
4 Click [Easy Installation] to start installation.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation
procedure.
Click [Restart] when the installation has completed.
5
6 Once the computer has restarted, remove the CD.
506
507
508
Index
Numerics
1:1 (aspect ratio) ...................154, 262
1.3x (crop).............................154, 262
1.6x (crop).............................154, 262
10- or 2-sec. self-timer ..................144
1280x720 (movie) .........................297
16:9 (aspect ratio) .................154, 262
1920x1080 (movie) .......................297
4:3 (aspect ratio) ...................154, 262
61-point automatic selection
AF .............................................91, 97
640x480 (movie) ...........................297
A
A (Scene Intelligent Auto) ............80
AC Adapter ...................................450
Acceleration/
deceleration tracking.....................115
Access lamp..............................45, 46
Accessories.......................................3
Adjust all by same amount............134
Adjust by lens................................136
Adobe RGB...................................193
AE lock..........................................217
AEB
(Auto Exposure Bracketing) ...215, 403
AF ...................................................85
AF area selection
mode...............................90, 92, 95
AF-assist beam.........................121
AF Configuration Tool ...............109
AF group...................................100
AF method ........................268, 315
AF Microadjustment..................134
AF-ON (AF start)
button..........................55, 414, 416
AF operation ...............................86
AF point ....................90, 93, 95, 99
AF point expansion...............90, 95
AF point registration................. 418
AF point selection .............. 93, 421
Area AF frame...................... 91, 97
Beeper ....................................... 69
Color information...................... 129
Cross-type focusing ................... 99
Customization .......................... 118
Direct AF point selection .......... 421
Dual cross-type focusing............ 99
f/8 AF limit .......................... 99, 104
Facial information..................... 129
Manual focusing (MF) ...... 141, 275
Out of focus.................. 54, 55, 474
Recomposing ..................... 83, 217
Spot AF point ....................... 31, 95
Subjects difficult for AF .... 140, 273
AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF) ............... 88
AI SERVO (AI Servo AF)................ 88
Acceleration/
deceleration tracking................ 115
AF Operation indicator ....... 89, 132
AF point auto switching............ 116
AF points light up in red ..... 89, 132
AF sensor................................... 99
Tracking sensitivity................... 114
ALL-I (For editing/I-only)............... 298
Ambience priority (AWB) .............. 175
Ambient light sensor............... 28, 361
Anti-flicker shooting ...................... 191
Aperture-priority AE.............. 208, 282
Area AF frame .......................... 91, 97
Aspect ratio .......................... 154, 262
Attenuator..................................... 301
Auto (D) ................................... 165
Auto Lighting Optimizer .......... 79, 182
Auto playback............................... 348
Auto power off .......................... 47, 69
Auto reset ..................................... 200
Auto rotate vertical images........... 362
509
Index
Auto switch card ...........................147
Autofocus 9 AF
Automatic selection (AF)...........91, 97
Av (Aperture-priority AE).......208, 282
B
B (Bulb).................................218, 280
Battery ........................40, 42, 48, 446
Battery Grip.....................48, 446, 454
Beeper ..............................69, 81, 144
Black-and-white
images ..........................166, 171, 384
Bracketing
AEB (Auto exposure
bracketing)........................215, 403
FEB
(Flash exposure bracketing).....251
WB-BKT (White balance
bracketing)........................180, 403
Bulb exposures .............................218
Bulb timer .................................219
buSY (BUSY)................................153
C
w (Custom shooting)...................437
Cable ........3, 351, 380, 393, 454, 502
Protector.....................................36
Camera
Camera shake ............................54
Clearing the camera settings......70
Holding the camera ....................54
Settings display ........................443
Cards ..............................5, 25, 43, 67
Card reminder ............................44
Formatting ..................................67
Low-level formatting ...................68
Troubleshooting....................46, 68
Write protection ..........................43
Case .............................................109
510
Center-weighted average
metering ....................................... 213
CF card 9 Cards
Charger .................................... 34, 40
Chromatic aberration correction... 189
Cleaning (image sensor) .............. 373
Clearing the camera settings ......... 70
AI Servo AF characteristics ..... 117
Camera function settings ........... 70
Custom Controls
(buttons & dials)....................... 413
Custom Function settings ........ 401
Custom Quick Control settings... 428
Flash Custom Function
settings .................................... 253
My menu .................................. 435
Clipped highlights ......................... 325
CLn............................................... 377
Color saturation............................ 170
Color space .................................. 193
Color temperature ................ 174, 178
Color tone..................................... 170
Continuous AF ............................. 264
Continuous file numbering ........... 199
Continuous shooting .................... 142
Contrast................................ 170, 182
Copyright information ................... 201
Creative photo.............. 164, 221, 226
M (Creative Zone) icon ................... 8
Crop (when shooting)........... 154, 262
Cropping (for printing) .................. 387
Cropping (images)........................ 371
Cropping information.................... 411
Cross-type focusing ....................... 99
Custom Controls .......................... 413
Custom functions ................. 400, 402
Custom Quick Control .................. 427
Custom shooting mode ................ 437
Custom WB .................................. 176
Index
D
D+ .................................................187
Date/time.........................................49
Daylight saving time........................50
DC Coupler ...................................450
Default settings tables...70, 71, 72, 73
Depth-of-field preview ...................209
Detailed information (shooting) .....323
Dials
Main Dial.....................................56
Quick Control Dial.......................57
Digital
terminal .............27, 36, 380, 393, 502
Dimmed menu items .......................66
Dioptric adjustment .........................54
Direct printing................................379
Direct selection of AF point ...........421
Downloading images
(to a computer)..............................502
DPOF
(Digital Print Order Format)...........389
Drive mode....................................142
Dual cross-type focusing.................99
Dust Delete Data...........................375
E
Electronic level..........................75, 76
Erasing images .............................358
Err ...........................................29, 487
Error codes ...................................487
Evaluative metering ......................212
exFAT..............................................68
Exposure compensation ...............214
Exposure compensation with
Auto ISO .......................................211
Exposure level increments............402
Exposure level
indicator ....................30, 32, 258, 289
Exposure maintained for
new aperture ................................ 406
Exposure simulation ..................... 265
External Speedlite 9 Flash
Eyecup ......................................... 236
Eye-Fi cards ................................. 451
Eyepiece cover....................... 35, 236
F
Faithful (U)............................... 166
FE lock ......................................... 244
Feature guide ................................. 78
FEB .............................................. 251
File extension ............................... 198
File name...................................... 196
Underscore "_"................. 193, 198
File size ........................ 151, 298, 323
Filter effects .................................. 171
Final image simulation.......... 261, 292
Fine (image-recording
quality).................................. 149, 151
Fine Detail (u) ......................... 165
Fineness (Sharpness) .................. 170
Firmware ...................................... 468
First-curtain synchronization ........ 251
Flash (Speedlite) .......................... 243
Custom Functions .................... 253
External flash ........................... 244
FEB
(Flash exposure bracketing) .... 251
FE lock ..................................... 244
Flash control ............................ 247
Flash exposure
compensation................... 244, 251
Flash mode .............................. 249
Flash sync contacts ................... 26
Flash sync speed ............. 245, 248
Flash sync. speed in Av
mode ........................................ 248
511
Index
Manual flash .............................249
Shutter synchronization
(1st/2nd curtain) .......................251
Focus indicator ...............................80
Focus lock.......................................83
Focus mode switch .....6, 52, 141, 275
Focusing 9 AF, Manual Focusing
(MF)
Focusing point
(AF point) ......................90, 93, 95, 99
Folder creation/selection.......194, 195
For editing (ALL-I).........................298
Formatting (card initialization).........67
Frame rate ....................................297
Free run ........................................303
Full Auto mode................................80
Full High-Definition
(Full HD) (movie) ..................279, 297
Full-frame (3:2) .....................154, 262
Functions settable by
shooting mode ..............................456
G
Grid .........................74, 265, 315, 321
H
HD (movie)....................................297
HDMI...............................36, 342, 351
HDMI CEC ....................................352
HDR ..............................................221
Help ................................................78
High ISO speed noise reduction ...183
High-Definition (HD) movies .........297
Highlight alert................................325
Highlight tone priority ....................187
High-speed continuous shooting ..142
Histogram
(Brightness/RGB)..........258, 289, 326
Hot shoe .................................26, 244
512
Household power ......................... 450
I
ICC profile .................................... 193
Icon .................................................. 8
Illumination (AF point) .................. 132
Illumination (LCD panel)................. 59
Image dust prevention.................. 373
Image-recording quality........ 149, 297
Image review time .......................... 70
Images
AF point display ....................... 325
Auto playback .......................... 348
Auto reset ................................ 200
Auto rotation ............................ 362
Continuous numbering............. 199
Copying.................................... 354
Downloading images
(to a computer) ........................ 502
Erase ....................................... 358
Highlight alert........................... 325
Histogram ................................ 326
Image file numbering ............... 199
Index display............................ 327
Jump display
(image browsing) ..................... 328
Magnification............................ 330
Manual reset ............................ 200
Manual rotation ........................ 333
Playback .................................. 319
Protection................................. 334
Rating ...................................... 337
Shooting information................ 322
Size.......................... 151, 298, 323
Slide show ............................... 348
Transfer.................................... 393
Two-image display ................... 332
Viewing on a TV set ......... 342, 351
Index display ................................ 327
INFO. button... 60, 258, 289, 320, 442
Index
Initial AF Point...............................128
Interval timer .................................239
IPB (Standard) ..............................298
ISO speed .....................158, 283, 287
Automatic setting (Auto) ...........160
Automatic setting range............162
ISO expansion ..........................161
Manual setting range ................161
Minimum shutter speed ............163
Setting increments....................402
iTR AF...........................................129
J
JPEG.....................................149, 151
Jump display .................................328
L
Landscape (R)..........................165
Language ........................................51
Large
(image-recording quality) ......151, 369
LCD monitor....................................25
Brightness adjustment ..............361
Electronic level .....................75, 76
Image playback ........................319
Menu display ......................64, 460
Shooting function settings ..60, 444
LCD panel .......................................29
Illumination .................................59
Lens ..........................................25, 52
Chromatic aberration
correction..................................189
Focus mode
switch......................6, 52, 141, 275
Group for usable AF points.......100
Lock release ...............................53
Peripheral illumination
correction..................................188
Live View shooting ..................84, 255
Crop/aspect ratio ......................262
Exposure simulation................. 265
Face+Tracking ......................... 269
FlexiZone - Single .................... 271
Grid display .............................. 265
Information display................... 258
Manual focusing (MF) .............. 275
Metering timer .......................... 267
Possible shots.......................... 257
Quick Control ........................... 263
Silent shooting ......................... 266
LOCK...................................... 59, 410
Long exposure noise reduction .... 185
Long exposures............................ 218
Low-speed continuous shooting... 142
M
M (Manual exposure) ........... 210, 286
Magnification ................ 274, 275, 330
Initial position ........................... 331
Main Dial ........................................ 56
Malfunction ................................... 471
Manual exposure.................. 210, 286
Manual focusing (MF)........... 141, 275
Manual reset................................. 200
Manual selection
(AF point)............................ 90, 93, 95
Maximum burst..................... 151, 153
Medium
(image-recording quality)...... 151, 369
Memory cards 9 Cards
Menu .............................................. 64
My Menu .................................. 432
Setting procedure....................... 65
Settings .................................... 460
3 icon......................................... 8
Metering mode ............................. 212
Metering timer ................ 55, 267, 316
M-Fn ....................... 92, 126, 415, 417
Microadjustment ........................... 134
513
Index
Microphone ...........................280, 301
Mirror lockup .................................234
Mode Dial..................................33, 56
Monochrome (V) ......................166
Monochrome images ....................384
Movies ..........................................279
AE lock .....................................284
AF method........................295, 315
Aperture-priority AE..................282
Attenuator.................................301
Autoexposure shooting.............280
Compression method ...............298
Count up...................................303
Drop frame ...............................305
Editing out first and last
scenes ......................................346
Enjoying movies .......................342
File size ............................298, 299
Frame rate................................297
Free run....................................303
Grid...........................................315
Information display ...................289
Manual exposure shooting .......286
Metering timer ..........................316
Microphone.......................280, 301
Movie shooting button ......280, 316
Playback...........................342, 344
Quick Control............................296
Rec run.....................................303
Recording size..........................297
Recording time .........................298
Recording/playback count ........304
Servo AF ..................................313
Shutter-priority AE ....................281
Silent control.............................302
Silent shooting..........................315
Sound recording .......................300
Start time setting.......................303
Stills ..........................................293
Time code.................................303
514
Time-lapse ............................... 306
Viewing on a TV set ......... 342, 351
Wind filter................................. 301
M-RAW
(Medium RAW)............. 149, 151, 152
Multi function .......... 92, 126, 415, 417
Multi function lock................... 59, 410
Multi Shot Noise Reduction.......... 183
Multi-controller................................ 58
Multiple exposures ....................... 226
My Menu ...................................... 432
N
Neutral (S)............................... 165
Noise reduction
High ISO speed ....................... 183
Long exposures ....................... 185
Nomenclature................................. 26
Non-Canon flash units.................. 245
Normal
(image-recording quality) ..... 149, 151
NTSC ........................... 297, 351, 467
O
ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF) ............ 87
One-Shot AF .................................. 87
One-touch image
quality setting ....................... 153, 424
P
P (Program AE).................... 204, 280
PAL............................... 297, 351, 467
Partial metering ............................ 212
PC terminal .................................. 245
Peripheral illumination correction . 188
Personal white balance ................ 177
Photobook set-up ......................... 397
PictBridge..................................... 379
Picture Style ................. 164, 168, 172
Index
Pixels ............................149, 151, 157
Playback .......................................319
Portrait (Q) ...............................165
Possible recording time
(movie) ..................................291, 298
Possible shots.................48, 151, 257
Power..............................................47
Auto power off ......................47, 69
Battery information ...................446
Battery level........................48, 446
Household power......................450
Possible shots ............48, 151, 257
Recharge performance.............446
Recharging .................................40
Pressing completely........................55
Pressing halfway.............................55
Printing..........................................379
Cropping ...................................387
Direct printing ...........................379
Page layout...............................383
Paper settings...........................383
Photobook set-up .....................397
Print order (DPOF) ...................389
Printing effects ..........................384
Tilt correction ............................387
Program AE ..........................204, 280
Program shift ............................205
Protecting images .........................334
Q
Q
(Quick Control)........61, 263, 296, 340
Quick Control Dial ...........................57
R
Rating mark...................................337
RAW..............................149, 151, 152
RAW image processing ................364
RAW+JPEG ..........................149, 151
Rec run .........................................303
Recharging ..................................... 40
Record function ............................ 146
Record separately (CF and SD) ... 147
Record to multiple ........................ 147
Recording level............................. 300
Reduced display........................... 327
Release shutter without card.......... 44
Remote control shooting .............. 237
Remote switch.............................. 237
Resizing........................................ 369
Rotation (image)................... 333, 362
S
Safety precautions.......................... 20
Safety shift.................................... 405
Scene icons.......................... 260, 285
Scene Intelligent Auto .................... 80
SD (VGA/movie)........................... 297
SD, SDHC, SDXC cards 9 Cards
Second-curtain synchronization ... 251
Self-timer .............................. 144, 238
Sensitivity 9 ISO speed
Sensor cleaning............................ 373
Sepia (Monochrome).................... 171
Servo AF .......................... 83, 88, 313
Sharpness .................................... 170
Shooting area ............................... 154
Shooting function settings ...... 60, 444
Shooting information display ........ 322
Shooting modes ............................. 33
Av (Aperture-priority AE) .......... 208
B (Bulb) .................................... 218
w (Custom shooting).............. 437
M (Manual exposure) ............... 210
P (Program AE)........................ 204
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) ............ 206
A (Scene Intelligent Auto)....... 80
Shooting orientation registration... 126
Shutter button................................. 55
515
Index
Shutter synchronization ................251
Shutter-priority AE ................206, 281
Silent shooting
Silent continuous shooting .......142
Silent LV shooting.............266, 315
Silent single shooting ...............142
Single shooting .............................142
Single-image display.....................320
Single-point AF .................90, 95, 271
Single-point Spot AF .................90, 95
Slide show ....................................348
Small
(image-recording quality) ......151, 369
Software........................................504
Speaker...................................28, 344
Specifications................................488
Spot AF point ............................31, 95
Spot metering................................213
S-RAW (Small RAW) ....149, 151, 152
sRGB ............................................193
Standard (IPB) ..............................298
Standard (P).............................165
Stop down aperture.......................209
Strap ...............................................35
Strength (Sharpness)....................170
System map..................................454
T
Temperature warning ............277, 317
Threshold (Sharpness) .................170
Time code .....................................303
Time zone .......................................49
Time-lapse movie..........................306
Tone priority ..................................187
Toning effect (Monochrome) .........171
Touch pad ...............................58, 302
Tracking sensitivity .......................114
Tripod socket ..................................28
Troubleshooting guide ..................471
516
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) ........ 206, 281
Two-image display ....................... 332
U
Ultra DMA (UDMA)......................... 44
Underscore "_" ..................... 193, 198
USB (DIGITAL)
terminal ............ 27, 36, 380, 393, 502
User Def. (W) ........................... 166
V
VGA (movie)................................. 297
Video system................ 297, 351, 467
Viewfinder ...................................... 31
Dioptric adjustment .................... 54
Electronic level........................... 76
Grid ............................................ 74
Information display..................... 77
Viewing on a TV set ............. 342, 351
Volume (movie playback) ............. 345
W
Warning icon ................................ 409
White balance (WB) ..................... 174
Auto ......................................... 175
Bracketing................................ 180
Color temperature setting ........ 178
Correction ................................ 179
Custom .................................... 176
Personal................................... 177
White priority (AWB)..................... 175
Wind filter ..................................... 301
Z
Zone AF ................................... 91, 96
517
CANON INC.
30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
Europe, Africa & Middle East
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
For your local Canon office, please refer to your warranty card or to www.canon-europe.com/Support
The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N.V.
The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of November 2017.
For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,
contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,
refer to the Canon website.
CEL-SV9GA212
© CANON INC. 2017
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement